2018 Nissan Rogue | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA

User Manual: 2018-rogue

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 546 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2018 Nissan Rogue Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information
OM18EA 0T32U0
Table of Contents

2018 ROGUE

OWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2018 NISSAN ROGUE T32-D

T32-D

Printing : August 2017

Publication No.:

Printed in U.S.A.

OM18EA 0T32U0

This manual was prepared to help you un-

derstand the operation and maintenance

of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many

miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.

Please read through this manual before

operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Book-

let explains details about the warranties

covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance

and schedules” section of this manual

explains details about maintaining and

servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a

separate Customer Care/Lemon Law

Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re-

solve any concerns you may have with

your vehicle, and clarify your rights un-

der your state’s lemon law.

When you require any service or have any

questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to

assist you with the extensive resources

available to them.

In addition to factory-installed options,

your vehicle may also be equipped with

additional accessories installed prior to de-

livery. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your ve-

hicle is equipped. It is important that you

familiarize yourself with all disclosures,

warnings, cautions and instructions con-

cerning proper use of such accessories

prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac-

cessory. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your ve-

hicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure

familiarity with controls and maintenance

requirements, assisting you in the safe op-

eration of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

∙ NEVER drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs.

∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for

conditions.

∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle fea-

tures or taking other actions that

could distract you.

∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and

appropriate child restraint systems.

Pre-teen children should be seated in

the rear seat.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

∙ ALWAYS provide information about

the proper use of vehicle safety fea-

tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

For descriptions specified for all-wheel

drive models, an AWD mark is placed at the

beginning of the applicable

sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features for

off-road use, failure to operate all-wheel

drive models correctly may result in loss

of control or an accident. For additional

information, refer to “Driving safety pre-

cautions” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passen-

ger car because it has a higher center

of gravity for off-road use. As with

other vehicles with features of this

type, failure to operate this vehicle

correctly may result in loss of control

or an accident.

For additional information, refer to

“On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions”, “Avoiding collision and

rollover” and “Driving safety precau-

tions” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its

performance, safety, emissions or du-

rability and may even violate govern-

mental regulations. In addition, dam-

age or performance problems

resulting from modifications may not

be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-

agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses

the port during normal driving, for ex-

ample remote insurance company

monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,

telematics or engine reprogramming,

may cause interference or damage to

vehicle systems. We do not recommend

or endorse the use of any aftermarket

OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically

approved by NISSAN. The vehicle war-

ranty may not cover damage caused by

any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all

features and equipment available on this

model. Features and equipment in your ve-

hicle may vary depending on model, trim

level, options selected, order, date of pro-

duction, region or availability. Therefore,

you may find information about features or

equipment that are not included or in-

stalled on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-

tions in this manual are those in effect at

the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the

right to change specifications, perfor-

mance, design or component suppliers

without notice and without obligation.

From time to time, NISSAN may update or

revise this manual to provide Owners with

the most accurate information currently

available. Please carefully read and retain

with this manual all revision updates sent

to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac-

cess to accurate and up-to-date informa-

tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver-

sions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any

updates can also be found in the Owner

section of the NISSAN website at

https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/

navigation/manualsGuide

. If you have

questions concerning any information in

your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs. For contact information, re-

fer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO-

GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual.

They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause death or seri-

ous personal injury. To avoid or reduce

the risk, the procedures must be fol-

lowed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause minor or

moderate personal injury or damage to

your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,

the procedures must be followed

carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do

this” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to

the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

these indicate movement or action.

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

these call attention to an item in the illus-

tration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

ents, and certain vehicle components

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive

harm. In addition, certain fluids con-

tained in vehicles and certain products

of component wear contain or emit

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects or other reproductive harm.

Operating, servicing and maintaining a

passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle

can expose you to chemicals including

engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,

phthalates, and lead, which are known

to the State of California to cause can-

cer and birth defects or other reproduc-

tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid

breathing exhaust, do not idle the en-

gine except as necessary, service your

vehicle in a well-ventilated area and

wear gloves or wash your hands fre-

quently when servicing your vehicle.

For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-

teries, may contain perchlorate material.

The following advisory is provided: “Per-

chlorate Material – special handling may

apply. For additional information, refer

to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate/”.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any

form, or by any means, electronic, me-

chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-

erwise, without the prior written permis-

sion of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your

NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service

needs.

However, if there is something that your

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or

you would like to provide NISSAN directly

with comments or questions, please con-

tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask

for the following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone

number

– Vehicle identification number (attached

to the top of the instrument panel on the

driver’s side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the informa-

tion at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..........0-2

Exterior front ....................................0-3

Exterior rear .....................................0-4

Passenger compartment........................0-5

Instrument panel................................0-6

Engine compartment check locations...........0-8

Warning and indicator lights.....................0-9

1. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-49)

2. Occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) (P. 1-49)

3. Front Seat belt with pretensioner(s)

and shoulder heights adjuster

(P. 1-15, 1-49)

4. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-10)

5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag

(P. 1-49)

6. 2nd row center position top tether

strap (located on ceiling) (P. 1-27)

7. Folding 3rd row bench

(if so equipped) (P. 1-2)

8. 2nd row outboard seat top tether

strap anchor (located on bottom

of seatback) (P. 1-27)

9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) (P. 1-27)

10. Folding 2nd row bench (P. 1-2)

11. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-49)

12. Seats (P. 1-2)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2545

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Engine hood (P. 3-27)

2. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-41)

Wiper blades (P. 8-18)

3. Windshield (P. 8-18)

Windshield-washer fluid (P. 8-10)

4. Power windows (P. 2-66)

5. Door locks (P. 3-5)

NISSAN Intelligent Key®

(if so equipped) (P. 3-11)

NISSAN Jackknife key

(if so equipped) (P. 3-8)

Keys (P. 3-2)

6. Mirrors (P. 3-40)

Side view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-11)

7. Tire pressure (P. 8-30)

Flat tire (P. 6-3)

Tire chains (P. 8-30)

8. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-43)

9. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-43)

Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)

Daytime running light system

(P. 2-43)

10. Front view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-11)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2540

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-41)

2. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5)

3. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-36)

Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-36)

Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)

4. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)

5. Rearview camera (P. 4-3, 4-11)

6. Liftgate release (P. 3-28)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2541

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Glove box (P. 2-58)

2. Map lights (P. 2-71)

3. Power panoramic moonroof

(if so equipped) (P. 2-68)

4. Console box (P. 2-58)

5. Luggage hooks (P. 2-58)

6. Center armrest (2nd row) (P. 1-2)

7. Cup holders (P. 2-58)

8. Sun visors (P. 3-39)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2515

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Vent (P. 4-28)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so

equipped)/turn signal switch

(P. 2-43)

3. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)

Warning and indicator lights

(P. 2-11)

Vehicle information display (P. 2-20)

4. Wiper and washer switch, rear

wiper washer switch (P. 2-41)

5. Ignition switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-14)

Push-button ignition switch

(if so equipped) (P. 5-15)

6. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 6-2)

7. Radio*

Navigation system*

8. Front passenger supplemental air

bag (P. 1-49)

9. Glove box (P. 2-58)

10. Heater and air conditioning

controls (P. 4-29)

11. Power outlet (P. 2-55)

12. Shift lever (P. 5-23)

13. Auxiliary jack*

USB port*

LII2516

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

14. Front passenger air bag status

light (P. 1-49)

15. Cruise control main/set switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-64)

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-66)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System*

ProPILOT

Assist switch

(if so equipped) (P. 5-90)

16. Driver supplemental air bag

(P. 1-49)

Horn (P. 2-51)

17. Tilt and telescopic steering (P. 3-38)

18. Control panel and vehicle informa-

tion display switches (P. 2-20)

19. Hood release (P. 3-27)

20. Fuel door release (P. 3-36)

SPORT mode switch (P. 5-33)

ECO mode switch (P. 5-33)

Power liftgate switch (if so

equipped) (P. 3-28)

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) lock switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-54)

Dynamic driver assist switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-53)

Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

21. Instrument brightness control

(P. 2-43)

Twin trip odometer reset switch

(P. 2-4)

*: Refer to the separate NissanConnect®

Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

QR25DE engine

1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4)

2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6)

3. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-9)

4. Battery (P. 8-12)

5. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)

6. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-21)

7. Radiator cap (P. 8-4)

8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6)

9. Drive belt location (P. 8-16)

10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-10)

Engine cover removed for clarity.

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LDI2809

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Warning

light

Name Page

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

2-12

Automatic Emer-

gency Braking

(AEB) system

warning light (if so

equipped)

2-12

Automatic Emer-

gency Braking

(AEB) with Pedes-

trian Detection

system warning

light (if so

equipped)

2-12

Brake warning

light

2-13

Warning

light

Name Page

Charge warning

light

2-13

Electronic parking

brake warning

light (if so

equipped)

2-14

Low tire pressure

warning light

2-14

Master warning

light

2-15

Power steering

warning light

2-16

Seat belt warning

light and chime

2-16

Supplemental air

bag warning light

2-17

Indicator

light

Name Page

All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) LOCK indi-

cator light (if so

equipped)

2-17

Front fog light in-

dicator light (if so

equipped)

2-17

Front passenger

air bag status

light

2-17

High beam assist

indicator light

(green) (if so

equipped)

2-18

High beam indi-

cator light (blue)

2-18

Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL)

2-18

Security indicator

light

2-19

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Indicator

light

Name Page

Side light and

headlight indica-

tor light (green)

2-19

Slip indicator light 2-19

SPORT mode indi-

cator light

2-19

Turn signal/

hazard indicator

lights

2-19

Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

2-19

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats............................................ 1-2

Front manual seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ................................1-3

Front power seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ............................... 1-4

2nd row bench seat adjustment.............. 1-6

Armrests ......................................1-7

Flexible seating ................................1-7

Head restraints/headrests ......................1-10

Adjustable head restraint/headrest

components .................................1-12

Non-adjustable head restraint/

headrest components........................1-12

Remove......................................1-12

Install.........................................1-13

Adjust ........................................1-13

Seatbelts.......................................1-15

Precautions on seat belt usage...............1-15

Seat belt warning light........................1-18

Pregnant women.............................1-18

Injured persons...............................1-18

Three-point type seat belt with

retractor .....................................1-18

Seat belt extenders..........................1-23

Seat belt maintenance ......................1-24

Child safety.....................................1-24

Infants ......................................1-25

Small children ...............................1-25

Larger children ..............................1-25

Child restraints ................................. 1-27

Precautions on child restraints .............. 1-27

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system ............................1-29

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH .................................1-32

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts .........................1-34

Forward-facing child restraint

installation using LATCH ..................... 1-37

Forward-facing child restraint

installation using the seat belts..............1-40

Booster seats ...............................1-45

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)...........1-49

Precautions on SRS..........................1-49

Supplemental air bag warning labels ........1-67

Supplemental air bag warning light..........1-68

WARNING

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back and upright in the seat with both

feet on the floor and adjust the seat

properly. For additional information,

refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section.

∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely locked.

∙ Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls or

make the vehicle move. Unattended

children could become involved in se-

rious accidents.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation. The seat may

move suddenly and could cause loss

of control of the vehicle.

∙ The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort.

Seat belts are most effective when the

passenger sits well back and straight

up in the seat. If the seatback is re-

clined, the risk of sliding under the lap

belt and being injured is increased.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-

ally. For additional information about ad-

justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined

in this section.

Forward and backward

Pull the center of the bar up and hold it

while you slide the seat forward or back-

ward to the desired position. Release the

bar to lock the seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up

and lean back. To bring the seatback for-

ward, pull the lever up and lean your body

forward. Release the lever to lock the seat-

back in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in the P (Park) position.

LRS2160 LRS2161

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to

adjust the seat height until the desired po-

sition is achieved.

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

(if so equipped)

Operating tips

∙ The power seat motor has an auto-

reset overload protection circuit. If the

motor stops during operation, wait

30 seconds then reactivate the switch.

∙ Do not operate the power seat switch

for a long period of time when the en-

gine is off. This will discharge the bat-

tery.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch as shown will slide the

seat forward or backward to the desired

position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch as shown until the

desired angle is obtained.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

LRS2843 LRS2662

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in P (Park).

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Move the switch as shown to achieve de-

sired seat height.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides ad-

justable lower back support to the driver.

Push the switch as shown to adjust the

seatback lumbar area.

LRS2784 LRS2270

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

2ND ROW BENCH SEAT

ADJUSTMENT

Forward and backward

Pull the center of the bar 䊊

1up and hold it

while you slide the seat forward or back-

ward to the desired position. Release the

bar to lock the seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever

䊊

2and lean back. To bring the seatback

forward, pull the lever 䊊

2up and lean your

body forward. Release the lever to lock the

seatback in position.

The recline feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in P (Park).

WARNING

∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely locked.

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back and upright in the seat with both

feet on the floor and adjust the seat

belt properly. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt

usage” in this section.

Outboard seats

LRS2717

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARMRESTS

The 2nd row center armrest is locked in the

up position. To lower the armrest, pull on

the armrest strap that is located in the

armrest pivot area.

To return the armrest to the up position,

pull up on the armrest until it is locked in

the up position.

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seats when

they are in the fold-down position. In a

collision, people riding in these areas

without proper restraints are more

likely to be seriously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped

with seats and seat belts. Be sure ev-

eryone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

∙ Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

∙ Do not fold down the rear seats when

occupants are in the rear seat area or

any luggage is on the rear seats.

– Make sure that the seat path is

clear before moving the seat.

– Be careful not to allow hands or

feet to get caught or pinched in the

seat.

∙ Head restraints/headrests should be

adjusted properly as they may pro-

vide significant protection against in-

jury in an accident. Always replace

and adjust them properly if they have

been removed for any reason.

∙ If the head restraints/headrests are

removed for any reason, they should

be securely stored to prevent them

from causing injury to passengers or

damage to the vehicle in case of sud-

den braking or an accident.

∙ When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched po-

sition. If they are not completely se-

cured, passengers may be injured in

an accident or sudden stop.

∙ Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury.

LRS2713

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

Accessing the 3rd row seats (if so

equipped)

The 3rd row can be accessed from outside

the vehicle by using the seatback release

lever located on the 2nd row seatback. To

access the 3rd row from outside the ve-

hicle:

1. Lower or remove the 2nd row head

restraints/headrests and store them

properly so they are not loose in the

vehicle. For additional information, refer

to “Head restraints/headrests” in this

section.

2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat

belt hooks found on the sides of the

vehicle.

3. Lift up on the seatback release lever 䊊

located on the 2nd row seatback and

push the seatback forward. The seat-

back will stop at a 45° angle and the

slide lock will disengage. This allows the

entire seat to slide forward and an oc-

cupant to enter/exit the 3rd row.

4. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a

seating position, push up on the seat-

back until it latches in place.

Folding the 2nd row bench seat

(for vehicles equipped with 3rd

row seats)

To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for

maximum cargo hauling in vehicles

equipped with a 3rd row seat:

1. Follow steps 1–3 in “Accessing the 3rd

row seats” in this section to begin fold-

ing the seat.

2. Pull the strap 䊊

Bon the lower side of

the outboard seats to fold the 2nd row

seats completely flat.

LRS2844 LRS2753

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a

seating position, push up on the seat-

back until it latches in place.

Folding the 2nd row bench seat

(for vehicles not equipped with

3rd row seats)

To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for

maximum cargo hauling in vehicles not

equipped with 3rd row seats:

1. Lower or remove the 2nd row head

restraints/headrests and store them

properly so they are not loose in the

vehicle. For additional information, refer

to “Head restraints/headrests” in this

section.

2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat

belt hooks found on the sides of the

vehicle.

3. Lift up on the seatback release lever 䊊

on the top of the outboard seats to fold

the seatbacks flat.

4. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a

seating position, push up on the seat-

back until it latches in place.

LRS2754

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

Folding the 3rd row seats (if so

equipped)

To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum

cargo capacity:

1. Make sure the head

restraints/headrests are all the way

down.

2. Pull the strap 䊊

1to release the seat.

3. Once released, push the seatback for-

ward 䊊

To return the 3rd row seats to a seating

position:

1. Use the pull straps 䊊

1to raise each

seatback. Pull back until the seatback

latches into position. Make sure to

properly raise each seatback to an

upright and secured position.

WARNING

When the seat is returned to the normal

seating position, the head

restraints/headrests must be returned

to the upright position to properly pro-

tect vehicle occupants.

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplement

the other vehicle safety systems. They

may provide additional protection

against injury in certain rear end colli-

sions. Adjustable head

restraints/headrests must be adjusted

properly, as specified in this section.

Check the adjustment after someone

else uses the seat. Do not attach any-

thing to the head restraint/headrest

stalks or remove the head

restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat

if the head restraint/headrest has been

removed. If the head restraint/headrest

was removed, reinstall and properly ad-

just the head restraint/headrest before

an occupant uses the seating position.

Failure to follow these instructions can

reduce the effectiveness of the head

restraints/headrests. This may in-

crease the risk of serious injury or death

in a collision.

LRS2348

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The illustration shows the seating posi-

tions equipped with head

restraints/headrests.

䉱Indicates the seating position is

equipped with a head restraint.

䡲Indicates the seating position is equipped

with a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not

equipped with a head restraint or headrest

(if applicable).

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be inte-

grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests

have multiple notches along the stalk(s)

to lock them in a desired adjustment

position.

∙ The non-adjustable head

restraints/headrests have a single lock-

ing notch to secure them to the seat

frame.

∙ Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align the

head restraint/headrest so the cen-

ter of your ear is approximately level

with the center of the head

restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher than

the recommended alignment, place

the head restraint/headrest at the

highest position.

∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been

removed, ensure that it is reinstalled

and locked in place before riding in that

designated seating position.

2nd row seating

LRS2403

3rd row seating (if so equipped)

LRS2308

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD

RESTRAINT/HEADREST

COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the

head restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to

the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest

from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest

properly in a secure place so it is not

loose in the vehicle.

LRS2300 LRS2299 LRS2302

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position.

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest

stalks with the holes in the seat. Make

sure that the head restraint/headrest is

facing the correct direction. The stalk

with the notch (notches) 䊊

1must be

installed in the hole with the lock knob

䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position.

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the

center is level with the center of your ears. If

your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest position.

LRS2303 WRS0134

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

For non-adjustable head

restraint/headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it

up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and

push the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

LRS2351 LRS2305 LRS2306

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted and you are sitting upright and

well back in your seat with both feet on the

floor, your chances of being injured or killed

in a collision and/or the severity of injury

may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly

encourages you and all of your passengers

to buckle up every time you drive, even if

your seating position includes a supple-

mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories specify that seat belts be

worn at all times when a vehicle is being

driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

WARNING

∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be in the

rear seats and in an appropriate

restraint.

WARNING

∙ The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so

may reduce the effectiveness of the

entire restraint system and increase

the chance or severity of injury in an

accident. Serious injury or death can

occur if the seat belt is not worn

properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck.

The belt should be away from your

face and neck, but not falling off your

shoulder.

∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug

as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT

THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high

could increase the risk of internal inju-

ries in an accident.

∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-

curely fastened to the proper buckle.

∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

∙ Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

∙ If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the ignition is

placed in the ON position with all

doors closed and all seat belts fas-

tened, it may indicate a malfunction in

the system. Have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ No changes should be made to the

seat belt system. For example, do not

modify the seat belt, add material, or

install devices that may change the

seat belt routing or tension. Doing so

may affect the operation of the seat

belt system. Modifying or tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have

activated, they cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with the

retractor. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any colli-

sion. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NISSAN recommends that all seat belt

assemblies in use during a collision be

replaced unless the collision was mi-

nor and the belts show no damage

and continue to operate properly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use during

a collision should also be inspected

and replaced if either damage or im-

proper operation is noted.

∙ All child restraints and attaching

hardware should be inspected after

any collision. Always follow the re-

straint manufacturer’s inspection in-

structions and replacement recom-

mendations. The child restraints

should be replaced if they are

damaged.

SSS0014

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

Both the driver’s and passenger’s front

seats are equipped with a seat belt warn-

ing light. The warning light, located on the

instrument panel, will show the status of

the driver and passenger seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warning

light will not light up if the seat is not

occupied.

For additional information, refer to “Warn-

ing lights, indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant

women use seat belts. The seat belt should

be worn snug and always position the lap

belt as low as possible around the hips, not

the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Never run

the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal

area. Contact your doctor for specific rec-

ommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons

use seat belts. Check with your doctor for

specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be in the

rear seats and in an appropriate

restraint.

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back and upright in the seat with both

feet on the floor and adjust the seat

belt properly.

LRS0786

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the

seat belt becomes wrapped around a

child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-

vated, the child can be seriously in-

jured or killed if the seat belt retracts

and becomes tight. This can occur

even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle

the seat belt to release the child. If the

seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is

already unbuckled, release the child

by cutting the seat belt with a suitable

tool (such as a knife or scissors) to

release the seat belt.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Seats” in this section.

Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2160

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-

tractor and insert the tongue into the

buckle 䊊

Auntil you hear and feel the

latch engage.

∙The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on impact.

A slow pulling motion permits the

seat belt to move and allows you

some freedom of movement in the

seat.

∙If the seat belt cannot be pulled

from its fully retracted position,

firmly pull the belt and release it.

Then smoothly pull the belt out of

the retractor.

Power front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2662 LRS2674

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Position the lap belt portion low and

snug on the hips 䊊

Bas shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward

the retractor to take up extra slack 䊊

Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over

your shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear

seating positions’ three-point seat belts

have two modes of operation:

∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex-

tend and retract to allow the driver and

passengers some freedom of movement

in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt

when the vehicle slows down rapidly or

during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks

the seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat

belt cannot be extended again until the

seat belt tongue is detached from the

buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-

turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt

fully retracts. For additional information, re-

fer to “Child restraints” in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During nor-

mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR

mode should not be activated. If it is ac-

tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat

belt tension. It can also change the op-

eration of the front passenger air bag.

For additional information, refer to

“Front passenger air bag and status

light” in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be cer-

tain that the seatbacks are completely

secured in the latched position. If they

are not completely secured, passengers

may be injured in an accident or sudden

stop.

LRS2675

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button

on the buckle 䊊

1. The seat belt automati-

cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock

seat belt movement by two separate

methods:

∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from

the retractor

∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly

To increase your confidence in the seat

belts, check the operation as follows:

∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-

ward quickly. The retractor should lock

and restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this

check, get the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service or to learn more about seat belt

operation.

Shoulder belt height adjustment

(front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best for you. For

additional information, refer to “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” in this section. To

adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊

and move the shoulder belt anchor to the

desired position 䊊

2, so the belt passes over

the center of the shoulder. The belt should

be away from your face and neck, but not

falling off your shoulder. Release the ad-

justment button to lock the shoulder belt

anchor into position.

WRS0139 LRS0242

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the

shoulder belt anchor up and down to

make sure it is securely fixed in

position.

∙ The shoulder belt anchor height

should be adjusted to the position

best for you. Failure to do so may re-

duce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an

accident.

Seat belt hook

When the seat belt is not in use and when

folding down the rear seats, hook the rear

seat belts on the seat belt hooks.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it

is not possible to properly fit the

lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender

that is compatible with the installed seat

belts is available for purchase. The ex-

tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)

of length and are available for the:

∙ Driver and front passenger seating po-

sition

∙ 2nd and 3rd row seating position

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for assistance with purchasing an

extender if an extender is required.

WARNING

∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,

made by the same company which

made the original equipment seat

belts, should be used with NISSAN

seat belts.

∙ Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use

could result in serious personal injury

in the event of an accident.

∙ Never use seat belt extenders to in-

stall child restraints. If the child re-

straint is not secured properly, the

child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

3rd row shown (if so equipped); 2nd row

similar

LRS2157

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

∙To clean the seat belt webbing, apply

a mild soap solution or any solution rec-

ommended for cleaning upholstery or

carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow

the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not

allow the seat belts to retract until they

are completely dry.

∙If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the

seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the

shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry

cloth.

∙Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such

as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible

wires and anchors, work properly. If

loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other

damage on the webbing is found, the

entire seat belt assembly should be re-

placed.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat

belt becomes wrapped around a child’s

neck with the ALR mode activated, the

child can be seriously injured or killed if

the seat belt retracts and becomes

tight. This can occur even if the vehicle

is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-

lease the child. If the seat belt cannot be

unbuckled or is already unbuckled, re-

lease the child by cutting the seat belt

with a suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect

them. They need to be properly re-

strained.

In addition to the general information in

this manual, child safety information is

available from many other sources, includ-

ing doctors, teachers, government traffic

safety offices, and community organiza-

tions. Every child is different, so be sure to

learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child re-

straint systems:

∙ Rear-facing child restraints

∙ Forward-facing child restraints

∙ Booster seats

The proper restraint depends on the child’s

size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year

and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed

in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-

facing child restraints are available for chil-

dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-

straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster

seats are used to help position a vehicle

lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no

longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special pro-

tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not

fit them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-

ting seat belt could cause serious or fa-

tal injury. Always use appropriate child

restraints.

CHILD SAFETY

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require the use of approved child

restraints for infants and small children. For

additional information, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the ve-

hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An-

chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or

with the vehicle seat belt. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints” in this

section.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear

seat. Studies show that children are

safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because

your vehicle has a supplemental re-

straint system (air bag system) for the

front passenger. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS)” in this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be

placed in a rear-facing child restraint.

NISSAN recommends that infants be

placed in child restraints that comply with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

You should choose a child restraint that fits

your vehicle and always follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation and

use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh

at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a

rear-facing child restraint as long as pos-

sible up to the height or weight limit of the

child restraint. Children who outgrow the

height or weight limit of the rear-facing

child restraint and are at least 1 year old

should be secured in a forward-facing child

restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu-

facturer’s instructions for minimum and

maximum weight and height recommen-

dations. NISSAN recommends that small

children be placed in child restraints that

comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint that fits your vehicle and al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing

child restraint with a harness until they

reach the maximum height or weight limit

allowed by the child restraint manufac-

turer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight

limit of the harness-equipped forward-

facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends

that the child be placed in a commercially

available booster seat to obtain proper

seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the

booster seat should raise the child so that

the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the chest and the top, middle por-

tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt

should not cross the neck or face and

should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt

should lie snugly across the lower hips or

upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster

seat can only be used in seating positions

that have a three-point type seat belt. The

booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

have a label certifying that it complies with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

A booster seat should be used until the

child can pass the seat belt fit test below:

∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the

vehicle seatback?

∙ Is the child able to sit without slouch-

ing?

∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over

the front edge of the seat with feet flat

on the floor?

∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt

(lap belt low and snug across the hips

and shoulder belt across mid-chest

and shoulder)?

∙ Is the child able to use the properly ad-

justed head restraint/headrest?

∙ Will the child be able to stay in position

for the entire ride?

If you answered no to any of these ques-

tions, the child should remain in a booster

seat using a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow

different guidelines. Check local and

state regulations to confirm your child is

using the correct restraint system before

traveling.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the

cargo area. The child could be seriously

injured or killed in a sudden stop or

collision.

LRS2690

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– The child restraint must be used

and installed properly. Always fol-

low all of the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for installa-

tion and use.

– Infants and children should never

be held on anyone’s lap. Even the

strongest adult cannot resist the

forces of a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both

a child and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear

seat. Studies show that children

are safer when properly restrained

in the rear seat than in the front

seat. If you must install a forward-

facing child restraint in the front

seat, refer to “Forward-facing child

restraint installation using the seat

belts” in this section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

seat. An inflating air bag could se-

riously injure or kill a child. A rear-

facing child restraint must only be

used in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child re-

straint that will fit the child and ve-

hicle. Some child restraints may

not fit properly in your vehicle.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items

or equipment to the vehicle. Doing

so could damage the child re-

straint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly in-

stalled using the damaged

anchorage, and a child could be se-

riously injured or killed in a

collision.

– Never use the anchor points for

adult seat belts, or other items.

– A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the

front passenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-

sible after fitting the child

restraint.

– Infants and children should always

be placed in an appropriate child

restraint while in the vehicle.

∙ When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system

or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, loose objects can injure occu-

pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating

surface and buckles before placing a

child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal

child restraint anchor system, referred to

as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) system. Some child restraints

include rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to these an-

chors. For additional information, refer to

“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system” in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible

child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be

used.

Several manufacturers offer child re-

straints for infants and children of various

sizes. When selecting any child restraint,

keep the following points in mind:

∙ Choose only a restraint with a label cer-

tifying that it complies with Federal Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana-

dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-

cle’s seat and seat belt system.

∙ If the child restraint is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the child

restraint and check the various adjust-

ments to be sure the child restraint is

compatible with your child. Choose a

child restraint that is designed for your

child’s height and weight. Always follow

all recommended procedures.

∙ If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is less than 65 lbs.

(29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH

anchors or the seat belt to install the

child restraint (not both at the same

time).

∙ If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not

the lower anchors) to install the child

restraint.

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for installa-

tion.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved

child restraint at all times while the ve-

hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-

quires the top tether strap on forward-

facing child restraints be secured to the

designated anchor point on the vehicle.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special an-

chor points that are used with LATCH sys-

tem compatible child restraints. This sys-

tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX

or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys-

tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat

belt to secure the child restraint unless the

combined weight of the child and child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and child restraint

is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the ve-

hicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to

install the child restraint. Be sure to follow

the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation.

The LATCH lower anchor points are pro-

vided to install child restraints in the follow-

ing positions only:

∙ 2nd row bench seat – outboard seating

positions

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the loca-

tions shown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in

the 2nd row center position using

the LATCH system anchors. The

child restraint will not be secured

properly.

LATCH system lower anchor locations -

bench seat

LRS2975

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

– Inspect the lower anchors by in-

serting your fingers into the lower

anchor area. Feel to make sure

there are no obstructions over the

anchors such as seat belt webbing

or seat cushion material. The child

restraint will not be secured prop-

erly if the lower anchors are

obstructed.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items

or equipment to the vehicle. Doing

so could damage the child re-

straint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly in-

stalled using the damaged

anchorages, and a child could be

seriously injured or killed in a

collision.

LATCH lower anchor locations

The LATCH lower anchors are located as

shown. A label is attached to the seatback

to help you locate the LATCH lower an-

chors.

LATCH lower anchor location

WRS0700

LATCH label locations 2nd row bench

LRS2977

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Installing child restraint LATCH

lower anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include

two rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to two an-

chors located at certain seating positions

in your vehicle. With this system, you do not

have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the

child restraint. Check your child restraint for

a label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the

instructions provided by the child restraint

manufacturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefully

read and follow the instructions in this

manual and those supplied with the child

restraint.

Top tether anchor

WARNING

∙ Do not allow cargo to contact the top

tether strap when it is attached to the

top tether anchor. Properly secure the

cargo so it does not contact the top

tether strap. Cargo that is not properly

secured or cargo that contacts the top

tether strap may damage it during a

collision. A child could be seriously in-

jured or killed in a collision if the top

tether strap is damaged.

∙ Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly in-

stalled using the damaged anchor-

ages, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LRS0662

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located in the following

locations:

∙ 2nd row bench on the bottom of the

seatback in the seating positions

shown.

∙ Roof above the rear cargo area.

The top tether anchor located in the roof is

only to be used for a child restraint located

in the center position of the 2nd row.

A child restraint with a top tether strap

should only be placed in the center posi-

tion of the 2nd row if there are no 3rd row

occupants.

Rearward adjustment of the 2nd row

bench seat will result in loosening of the

top tether strap for the center position of

the 2nd row. Avoid moving the 2nd row

bench seat or retighten the top tether

strap following rearward movement of the

2nd row bench seat.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint in the 2nd row seats using

the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

2nd row bench seat

LRS2714

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

3. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your hand to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

WRS0801

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0802

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0673

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

4. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it

again. You may need to try a different

child restraint or try installing by using

the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not

all child restraints fit in all types of ve-

hicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 1 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in

the rear seats:

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS0674

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the

front seat. Position the child restraint

on the seat. Always follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts to the ELR

mode when the seat belt is fully re-

tracted.

Rear-facing – step 1

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 2

WRS0761

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS2395

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint to compress the vehicle seat

cushion and seatback while pulling up

on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If

the restraint is not secure, tighten the

seat belt as necessary, or put the re-

straint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS2396

Rear-facing – step 5

WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 6

LRS2397

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. Check to make sure that the child re-

straint is properly secured prior to each

use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 1 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats

using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point. For additional

information, refer to “Installing top

tether strap” in this section.

Forward-facing webbing-mounted –

step 2

LRS2398

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the child restraint is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating

position or a different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your knee to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

LRS2399

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0671

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it

again. You may need to try a different

child restraint. Not all child restraints fit

in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 1 through 6.

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

the LATCH lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the

LATCH lower anchors (2nd row bench out-

board seating positions only).

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0697

2nd row bench seat

LRS2714

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

2nd row bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure to

reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over

the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point 䊊

2as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the vehicle seat

belt in the rear seats or in the front passen-

ger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position.

Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and,

therefore, must not be used in the

front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the child restraint is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating

position or a different child restraint.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –

step 1

WRS0699

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point (2nd row in-

stallation only). For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Installing top tether strap”

in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts to ELR mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Forward-facing – step 3

WRS0680

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS2394

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint with your knee to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback

while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If

the restraint is not secure, tighten the

seat belt as necessary, or put the re-

straint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

Forward-facing – step 5

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0681

Forward-facing – step 8

WRS0698

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

9. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 2 through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front

passenger air bag status light

should illuminate. If this light is not illu-

minated, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

Move the child restraint to another

seating position. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat

belt.

Forward-facing – step 10

WRS0475

2nd row bench seat

LRS2714

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2nd row bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure to

reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over

the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point 䊊

2as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure to

reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Open the top tether anchor 䊊

2cover

located on the ceiling.

3. Secure the tether strap 䊊

1to the tether

anchor point 䊊

2as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack. Make sure the head

restraint/headrest does not contact

the top tether strap.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a

booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-

structions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not

used properly, the risk of a child being

injured or killed in a sudden stop or col-

lision greatly increases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s

face and neck and the lap portion

of the belt does not cross the

stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the

child’s arm.

– A booster seat must only be in-

stalled in a seating position that

has a lap/shoulder belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

A. Low back booster seat

B. High back booster seat

Booster seats of various sizes are offered

by several manufacturers. When selecting

any booster seat, keep the following points

in mind:

∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard 213.

∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-

cle’s seat and seat belt system.

∙ Make sure the child’s head will be prop-

erly supported by the booster seat or

vehicle seat. The seatback must be at

or above the center of the child’s ears.

For example, if a low back booster seat

is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be

at or above the center of the child’s ears.

If the seatback is lower than the center

of the child’s ears, a high back booster

seat should be used.

LRS2479 LRS0453 LRS0464

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ If the booster seat is compatible with

your vehicle, place the child in the

booster seat and check the various ad-

justments to be sure the booster seat is

compatible with the child. Always follow

all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved

child restraint at all times while the ve-

hicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to

booster seat installation in the rear seats

or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use the

lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us-

ing a booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety,”

“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-

tions of this manual before installing a child

restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat

in the 2nd or 3rd rows or in the front pas-

senger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in

the front seat, move the seat to the

rearmost position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a front-facing direction.

Always follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions.

WRS0699

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

3. The booster seat should be positioned

on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect booster seat fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the booster seat is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

booster seat fit, try another seating

position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt

low and snug on the child’s hips. Be

sure to follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the

seat belt toward the retractor to take

up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder

belt is positioned across the top,

middle portion of the child’s shoulder.

Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjust-

ing the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-

structions for properly fastening a seat

belt shown in “Three-point type seat

belt with retractor” in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front pas-

senger air bag status light may or

may not illuminate, depending on the

size of the child and the type of booster

seat being used. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

Front passenger position

LRS0454 WRS0475

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS

This SRS section contains important infor-

mation concerning the following systems:

∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen-

tal front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System)

∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag

∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag

∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag sys-

tem

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can

help cushion the impact force to the head

and chest of the driver and front passenger

in certain frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the chest area of the driver and

front passenger in certain side-impact col-

lisions. The side air bags are designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-

pacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the head of occupants in front and

rear outboard seating positions in certain

side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags

are designed to inflate on the side where

the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the

curtain air bags are designed to inflate and

remain inflated for a short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement the

crash protection provided by the driver and

front passenger seat belts and is not a

substitute for them. Seat belts should al-

ways be correctly worn and the occupant

seated a suitable distance away from the

steering wheel, instrument panel and door

finishers. For additional information, refer

to “Seat belts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(SRS)

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

WARNING

∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,

rear impact, rollover, or lower severity

frontal collision. Always wear your

seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents

∙ The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit. For additional information,

refer to “Front passenger air bag and

status light” in this section.

∙ The seat belts and the front air bags

are most effective when you are sit-

ting well back and upright in the seat.

The front air bags inflate with great

force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced

Air Bag System, if you are unre-

strained, leaning forward, sitting side-

ways or out of position in any way, you

are at greater risk of injury or death in

a crash. You may also receive serious

or fatal injuries from the front air bag

if you are up against it when it inflates.

Always sit back against the seatback

and as far away as practical from the

steering wheel or instrument panel.

Always properly use the seat belts.

∙ The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with sen-

sors that detect if the seat belts are

fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System monitors the severity of a

collision and seat belt usage, then in-

flates the air bags as needed. Failure

to properly wear seat belts can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

∙ The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sen-

sor (weight sensor) that turns the

front passenger air bag OFF under

some conditions. This sensor is only

used in this seat. Failure to be properly

seated and wearing the seat belt can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

WRS0031

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could increase

the risk that they are injured when the

front air bag inflates.

ARS1133

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

WARNING

∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them

in your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

WARNING

∙ Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front seat.

An inflating front air bag could seri-

ously injure or kill your child. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

ARS1044 ARS1045 ARS1046

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bags:

∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event

of a frontal impact, rear impact, or

lower severity side collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help reduce

the risk or severity of injury in various

kinds of accidents.

WARNING

∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective

when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat with both feet on

the floor. The side air bag and curtain

air bag inflate with great force. Do not

allow anyone to place their hand, leg

or face near the side air bag on the

side of the seatback of the front seat

or near the side roof rails. Do not allow

anyone sitting in the front seats or

rear outboard seats to extend their

hand out of the window or lean

against the door. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the previous illustrations.

WARNING

∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front

seat. If the side air bag inflates, you

may be seriously injured. Be espe-

cially careful with children, who

should always be properly restrained.

Some examples of dangerous riding

positions are shown in the

illustrations.

∙ Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

side air bag inflation.

WRS0431 WRS0032

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0162 SSS0159

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

1. Supplemental front-impact air bag

modules

2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

3. Occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor)

4. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules

5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bags

6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag infla-

tors

7. Satellite sensors

8. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

9. Pressure sensors in door (driver’s side

shown; front passenger side similar)

10. Crash zone sensor

LRS2815

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas-

senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, please observe the following

items.

∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear

bench seats to push or pull on the

seatback pocket.

∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than

9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

∙ Make sure that there is nothing press-

ing against the rear of the seatback,

such as a child restraint installed in

the rear seat or an object stored on

the floor.

∙ Make sure that there is no object

placed under the front passenger

seat.

∙ Make sure that there is no object

placed between the seat cushion and

center console or between the seat

cushion and the door.

∙ If a forward-facing child restraint is

installed in the front passenger seat,

do not position the front passenger

seat so the child restraint contacts the

instrument panel. If the child restraint

does contact the instrument panel,

the system may determine the seat is

occupied and the passenger air bag

may deploy in a collision. Also the

front passenger air bag status light

may not illuminate. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Child restraints” in

this section.

∙ Confirm the operating condition with

the front passenger air bag status

light.

∙ If you notice that the front passenger

air bag status light is not operating as

described in this section, get the oc-

cupant classification system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Until you have confirmed with a

dealer that your passenger seat occu-

pant classification system is working

properly, position the occupants in

the rear seating positions.

∙ Do not position the front passenger

seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the

front seat does contact the rear seat,

the air bag system may determine a

sensor malfunction has occurred and

the front passenger air bag status

light may illuminate and the supple-

mental air bag warning light may

flash.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and

front passenger seats. This system is de-

signed to meet certification requirements

under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in

Canada. However, all of the information,

cautions and warnings in this manual

still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air

bag is located in the center of the steering

wheel. The front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag is mounted in the

dashboard above the glove box. The front

air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they

may inflate if the forces in another type of

collision are similar to those of a higher

severity frontal impact. They may not in-

flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-

cation of proper front air bag system op-

eration.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

monitors information from the crash zone

sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat

belt buckle sensors and occupation classi-

fication sensor (weight sensor). Inflator op-

eration is based on the severity of a colli-

sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For

the front passenger, the occupant classifi-

cation sensor is also monitored. Based on

information from the sensor, only one front

air bag may inflate in a crash,depending on

the crash severity and whether the front

occupants are belted or unbelted. Addi-

tionally, the front passenger air bag may be

automatically turned off under some con-

ditions, depending on the weight detected

on the front passenger seat and how the

seat belt is used. If the front passenger air

bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag sta-

tus light will be illuminated. For additional

information, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section. One

front air bag inflating does not indicate im-

proper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air

bag system, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information

about the system. If you are considering

modification of your vehicle due to a dis-

ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con-

tact information is contained in the front of

this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud

noise may be heard, followed by the re-

lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be

taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-

tion and choking. Those with a history of a

breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the face and chest of the front occupants.

They can help save lives and reduce seri-

ous injuries. However, an inflating front air

bag may cause facial abrasions or other

injuries. Front air bags do not provide re-

straint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and front passenger seated upright

as far as practical away from the steering

wheel or instrument panel. The front air

bags inflate quickly in order to help protect

the front occupants. Because of this, the

force of the front air bag inflating can in-

crease the risk of injury if the occupant is

too close to, or is against, the front air bag

module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a

collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF under some

conditions. Read this section carefully

to learn how it operates. Proper use of

the seat, seat belt and child restraints is

necessary for most effective protec-

tion. Failure to follow all instructions in

this manual concerning the use of

seats, seat belts and child restraints can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with

an occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor) that turns the front passenger air

bag on or off depending on the weight ap-

plied to the front passenger seat. The sta-

tus of the front passenger air bag (ON or

OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air

bag status light which is located on

the instrument panel.

After the ignition switch is placed in the

"ON" position, the front passenger air bag

status light on the instrument panel illumi-

nates for about 7 seconds and then turns

off or remains illuminated depending on

the front passenger seat occupied status.

The light operates as follows:

CONDITION DESCRIPTION PASSENGER AIR BAG INDI-

CATOR LIGHT ( )FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS

Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Nobody/Somebody Bag or Child or Child Restraint or

Small Adult in front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED

In addition to the above, certain objects

placed on the front passenger seat may

also cause the light to operate as de-

scribed above depending on their weight.

For additional information, refer to “Normal

operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this

section.

WRS0475

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as de-

scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu-

lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,

it will not inflate in a crash.The driver air bag

and other air bags in your vehicle are not

part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help

reduce the risk of injury or death from an

inflating air bag to certain front passenger

seat occupants, such as children, by requir-

ing the air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the

requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this

vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to

detect an occupant and objects on the

seat by weight. For example, if a child is in

the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn

the front passenger air bag OFF in accor-

dance with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the regula-

tions is on the seat, its weight and the

child’s weight can be detected and cause

the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who

are properly seated and using the seat belt

as outlined in this manual should not

cause the front passenger air bag to be

automatically turned OFF. For small adults

it may be turned OFF, however if the occu-

pant takes his/her weight off the seat

cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,

by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by

otherwise being out of position), this could

cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.

Always be sure to be seated and wearing

the seat belt properly for the most effective

protection by the seat belt and supple-

mental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and

children be properly restrained in a rear

seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-

propriate child restraints and booster

seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If

this is not possible, the occupant classifica-

tion sensor is designed to operate as de-

scribed above to turn the front passenger

air bag OFF for specified child restraints as

required by the regulations. Failing to prop-

erly secure child restraints and to use the

ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or

move in a collision or sudden stop. This can

also result in the passenger air bag inflat-

ing in a crash instead of being OFF. For

additional information, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied,

the front passenger air bag is designed not

to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects

placed on the seat could result in air bag

inflation, because of the object’s weight de-

tected by the occupant classification sen-

sor. Other conditions could also result in air

bag inflation, such as if a child is standing

on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this

manual. Always be sure that you and all

vehicle occupants are seated and re-

strained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status

light, you can monitor when the front pas-

senger air bag is automatically turned OFF.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

front passenger air bag status light is illu-

minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),

it could be that the person is a small adult,

or is not sitting on the seat properly or not

using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front

seat, the front passenger air bag status

light may or may not be illuminated, de-

pending on the size of the child and the

type of child restraint being used. If the air

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

bag status light is not illuminated (indicat-

ing that the air bag might inflate in a crash),

it could be that the child restraint or seat

belt is not being used properly. Make sure

that the child restraint is installed properly,

the seat belt is used properly and the occu-

pant is positioned properly. If the air bag

status light is still not illuminated, reposi-

tion the occupant or child restraint in a rear

seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light

will not illuminate even though you believe

that the child restraint, the seat belts and

the occupant are properly positioned, it is

recommended that you take your vehicle

to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can

check system status by using a special

tool. However, until you have confirmed

with a dealer that your air bag is working

properly, reposition the occupant or child

restraint in a rear seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and

front passenger air bag status light will

take a few seconds to register a change in

the front passenger seat status. This is nor-

mal system operation and does not indi-

cate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-

ger air bag system, the supplemental air

bag warning light , located in the me-

ter and gauges area of the instrument

panel, will be illuminated (blinking or

steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification

sensor system to classify the front passen-

ger based on weight, please follow the pre-

cautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions

∙ Make sure that there are no objects

weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on

the seat or placed in the seatback

pocket.

∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other

object is not pressing against the rear

of the seatback.

∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not

pushing or pulling on the back of the

front passenger seat.

∙ Make sure that the front passenger

seat or seatback is not forced back

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ Make sure that there is no object placed

under the front passenger seat.

Steps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”

section of this manual. Sit upright, lean-

ing against the seatback, and centered

on the seat cushion with your feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on your

lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the

“Seat belts” section of this manual.

Front passenger seat belt buckle sta-

tus is monitored by the occupant clas-

sification system, and is used as an in-

put to determine occupancy status. So,

it is highly recommended that the front

passenger fasten their seat belt.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds

allowing the system to classify the

front passenger before the vehicle is

put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by check-

ing the front passenger air bag status

light.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification

sensor system generally keeps the clas-

sification locked during driving, so it is

important that you confirm that the

front passenger is properly classified

prior to driving. However, the occupant

classification sensor may recalculate the

weight of the occupant under some con-

ditions (both while driving and when

stopped), so front passenger seat occu-

pants should continue to remain seated

as outlined above.

Troubleshooting

If you think the front passenger air bag

status light is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying

the front passenger seat:

∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag

light is functioning as intended. The

front passenger air bag is suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small

adult, then this may be due to the following

conditions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on

the seat cushion with his/her feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console or between

the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person

should be advised not to ride in the front

passenger seat and the vehicle should be

checked as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

2. If the light is OFF with a small adult,

child or child restraint occupying the

front passenger seat.

This may be due to the following con-

ditions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,

leaning against the seatback, and cen-

tered on the seat cushion with his/her

feet comfortably extended to the floor.

∙ The child restraint is not properly in-

stalled, as outlined in the “Child re-

straints” section of this manual.

∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)

hanging on the seat or placed in the

seatback pocket.

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small

adult, child or child restraint should be re-

positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle

should be checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

3. If the light is OFF with no front passen-

ger and no objects on the front pas-

senger seat, the vehicle should be

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

Other supplemental front-impact air

bag precautions

WARNING

∙ Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrument

panel. Also, do not place any objects

between any occupant and the steer-

ing wheel or instrument panel. Such

objects may become dangerous pro-

jectiles and cause injury if the front air

bags inflate.

∙ Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will

be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This

is to prevent accidental inflation of

the supplemental air bag or damage

to the supplemental air bag system.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end struc-

ture. This could affect proper opera-

tion of the front air bag system.

∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal in-

jury. Tampering includes changes to

the steering wheel and the instru-

ment panel assembly by placing ma-

terial over the steering wheel pad and

above the instrument panel or by in-

stalling additional trim material

around the air bag system.

∙ Removing or modifying the front pas-

senger seat may affect the function of

the air bag system and result in seri-

ous personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

∙ Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing ma-

terial on the seat cushion or by install-

ing additional trim material, such as

seat covers, on the seat that are not

specifically designed to assure proper

air bag operation. Additionally, do not

stow any objects under the front pas-

senger seat or the seat cushion and

seatback. Such objects may interfere

with the proper operation of the occu-

pant classification sensor (weight

sensor).

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect

the front air bag system. Tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the front air bag. It is also recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for installation of electrical equip-

ment. The Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) wiring harnesses*

should not be modified or discon-

nected. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the air bag

system.

∙ A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified re-

pair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the

supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and

roof-mounted curtain side-

impact and rollover supplemental

air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside

of the seatback of the front seats. The cur-

tain air bags are located in the side roof

rails in all three rows. All of the informa-

tion, cautions and warnings in this

manual apply and must be followed. The

side air bags and curtain air bags are de-

signed to inflate in higher severity side col-

lisions, although they may inflate if the

WRS0381

1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

forces in another type of collision are simi-

lar to those of a higher severity impact.

They are designed to inflate on the side

where the vehicle is impacted. They may

not inflate in certain side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate

in certain types of rollover collisions or near

rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move-

ments (for example, during severe off-

roading) may cause the curtain air bags to

inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always

an indication of proper side air bag and

curtain air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,

followed by release of smoke.This smoke is

not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those

with a history of a breathing condition

should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the chest of the front occupants. Curtain

air bags help to cushion the impact force to

the head of occupants in the front and rear

outboard seating positions in all rows. They

can help save lives and reduce serious in-

juries. However, an inflating side air bag or

curtain air bag may cause abrasions or

other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air

bags do not provide restraint to the lower

body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn

and the driver and front passenger seated

upright as far as practical away from the

side air bag. Rear seat passengers should

be seated as far away as practical from the

door finishers and side roof rails. The side

air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly

in order to help protect the occupants. Be-

cause of this, the force of the side air bags

and curtain air bags inflating can increase

the risk of injury if the occupant is too close

to, or is against, these air bag modules dur-

ing inflation. The side air bag will deflate

quickly after the collision is over.

The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a

short time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags

operate only when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

WARNING

∙ Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do

not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door fin-

isher and the front seat. Such objects

may become dangerous projectiles

and cause injury if a side air bag

inflates.

∙ Right after inflation, several side air

bag and curtain air bag system com-

ponents will be hot. Do not touch

them; you may severely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems. This is to prevent damage to

or accidental inflation of the side air

bag and curtain air bag systems.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the

curtain air bag systems.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

∙ Tampering with the side air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal in-

jury. For example, do not change the

front seats by placing material near

the seatbacks or by installing addi-

tional trim material, such as seat cov-

ers, around the side air bag.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the side air bag and curtain air bag. It

is also recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for installation of elec-

trical equipment. The SRS wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or dis-

connected. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the side air bag

or curtain air bag systems.

*The SRS wiring harness or connectors

are yellow or orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the side air

bags and curtain air bag system and guide

the buyer to the appropriate sections in

this Owner’s Manual.

Seat belt with pretensioner(s)

(front seats)

WARNING

∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused

after activation. They must be re-

placed together with the retractor

and buckle as a unit.

∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but pretensioner(s) are not

activated, be sure to have the preten-

sioner system checked and, if neces-

sary, replaced. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioner system. This is to

prevent damage to or accidental acti-

vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper-

ing with the pretensioner system may

result in serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the pretensioner system. It is also rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for installation of electrical

equipment. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the preten-

sioner system.

∙ If you need to dispose of the preten-

sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Incorrect dis-

posal procedures could cause per-

sonal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate

with the supplemental air bag system in

certain types of collisions. Working with the

seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help

tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-

comes involved in certain types of colli-

sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-

pants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased within the

seat belt retractor and to the seat belt an-

chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.

These seat belts are used the same way as

conventional seat belts.

1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indi-

cate a fire. Care should be taken not to

inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breath-

ing condition should get fresh air promptly.

After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load

limiters allow the seat belt to release web-

bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against

the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning

light is used to indicate malfunctions

in the pretensioner system. For additional

information, refer to "Supplemental air bag

warning light" in this section. If the opera-

tion of the supplemental air bag warning

light indicates there is a malfunction, have

the system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the preten-

sioner system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels

The warning labels are located on the

surface of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental

front-impact air bag system are placed in

the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child restraint

on a seat protected by an air bag in

front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may

cause serious injury or death.

WRS0885

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-

tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates for about 7 seconds and

then turns off. This means the system is

operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and pretensioner systems need servicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-

onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner

systems may not operate properly. They

must be checked and repaired. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Repair and replacement

procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to

inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a re-

minder, unless it is damaged, the supple-

mental air bag warning light remains illu-

minated after inflation has occurred. These

systems should be repaired and/or re-

placed as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,

curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and re-

lated parts should be pointed out to the

person performing the maintenance. The

ignition switch should always be placed in

the LOCK position when working under the

hood or inside the vehicle.

LRS0100

1-68 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air

bag module will not function again

and must be replaced. Additionally,

the activated pretensioner(s) must

also be replaced. The air bag module

and pretensioner(s) should be re-

placed. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

However, the air bag module and pre-

tensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag systems and the pretensioner

system should be inspected if there is

any damage to the front end or side

portion of the vehicle. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

∙ If you need to dispose of the supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner sys-

tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle

from any direction, your Occupant

Classification Sensor (OCS) should be

checked to verify it is still functioning

correctly. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The OCS should be checked even if no

air bags deploy as a result of the im-

pact. Failure to verify proper OCS

function may result in an improper air

bag deployment resulting in injury or

death.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel................................2-2

Meters and gauges..............................2-4

Speedometer and odometer .................2-4

Tachometer ..................................2-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge ..........2-6

Fuel gauge ...................................2-7

Compass (if so equipped) .......................2-7

Compass display .............................2-8

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders .......................................2-11

Checking lights ..............................2-12

Warning lights ...............................2-12

Indicator lights .............................. 2-17

Audible reminders ...........................2-20

Vehicle information display .....................2-20

How to use the vehicle information

display ......................................2-21

Startup display ..............................2-21

Resetting the drive computer................2-22

Settings .....................................2-22

Vehicle information display warnings

and indicators...............................2-31

Security systems ...............................2-38

Vehicle security system .....................2-38

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .........2-39

Wiper and washer switch .......................2-41

Switch operation ............................2-41

Rear switch operation .......................2-42

Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch................2-43

Headlight and turn signal switch ...............2-43

Headlight control switch.....................2-43

LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

system ......................................2-48

Instrument brightness control...............2-49

Turn signal switch ...........................2-49

Fog light switch (if so equipped) .............2-50

Horn ...........................................2-51

Heated seat switches (if so equipped) ..........2-51

Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-52

Dynamic driver assistance switch

(for vehicles without ProPILOT™ Assist)

(if so equipped) .................................2-53

Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with

ProPILOT™ Assist) (if so equipped) ..............2-53

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch......2-54

All-wheel drive (AWD) lock switch

(if so equipped) .................................2-54

E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped)..............2-55

Power outlets ..................................2-55

12v outlets...................................2-55

Extended storage switch .......................2-57

Storage ........................................2-58

Front-door pockets..........................2-58

Seatback pockets ...........................2-58

Glovebox....................................2-59

Console box .................................2-59

Overhead sunglasses storage ...............2-59

Cup holders .................................2-60

Cargo area storage bin (if so equipped)......2-62

Divide-N-Hide® adjustable floor

(if so equipped) ..............................2-62

Luggage hooks (if so equipped) .............2-63

Cargo cover (if so equipped) .................2-64

Roof rack (if so equipped)....................2-65

Windows .......................................2-66

Power windows .............................2-66

Power moonroof (if so equipped) ...............2-68

Interior lights ...................................2-71

Console light ................................ 2-71

Map lights ...................................2-72

Personal lights (if so equipped) ..............2-72

Room light (if so equipped) ..................2-72

Luggage compartment light (if so equipped) . . . 2-73

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

(if so equipped) .................................2-73

Programming HomeLink® ...................2-74

Programming HomeLink® for Canadian

customers and gate openers................2-76

Operating the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver ..................................2-76

Programming trouble-diagnosis ............2-76

Clearing the programmed information ......2-77

Reprogramming a single HomeLink®

button.......................................2-77

If your vehicle is stolen.......................2-77

1. Vent (P. 4-28)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so

equipped)/turn signal switch

(P. 2-43)

3. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)

Warning and indicator lights

(P. 2-11)

Vehicle information display (P. 2-20)

4. Wiper and washer switch, rear

wiper washer switch (P. 2-41)

5. Ignition switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-14)

Push-button ignition switch

(if so equipped) (P. 5-15)

6. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 6-2)

7. Radio*

Navigation system*

8. Front passenger supplemental air

bag (P. 1-49)

9. Glove box (P. 2-58)

10. Heater and air conditioning

controls (P. 4-29)

11. Power outlet (P. 2-55)

12. Shift lever (P. 5-23)

13. Auxiliary jack*

USB port*

LII2516

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

14. Front passenger air bag status

light (P. 1-49)

15. Cruise control main/set switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-64)

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-66)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System*

ProPILOT

Assist switch

(if so equipped) (P. 5-90)

16. Driver supplemental air bag

(P. 1-49)

Horn (P. 2-51)

17. Tilt and telescopic steering (P. 3-38)

18. Control panel and vehicle informa-

tion display switches (P. 2-20)

19. Hood release (P. 3-27)

20. Fuel door release (P. 3-36)

SPORT mode switch (P. 5-33)

ECO mode switch (P. 5-33)

Power liftgate switch (if so

equipped) (P. 3-28)

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) lock switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-54)

Dynamic driver assist switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-53)

Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

21. Instrument brightness control

(P. 2-43)

Twin trip odometer reset switch

(P. 2-4)

*: Refer to the separate NissanConnect®

Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

Instruments and controls 2-3

1. Tachometer

2. Warning and indicator lights

3. Vehicle information display

4. Speedometer

5. Fuel gauge

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

This vehicle is equipped with a speedom-

eter and odometer. The speedometer is

located on the right side of the meter clus-

ter. The odometer is located within the ve-

hicle information display.

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

LIC2627

LIC2255

METERS AND GAUGES

2-4 Instruments and controls

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer and the twin trip odometer

䊊

1are displayed in the vehicle information

display when the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the dis-

tance of individual trips.

Changing the display

Push the TRIP RESET switch 䊊

2on the left

side of the instrument panel to change the

display as follows:

ODO →Trip →Trip →ODO

Resetting the trip odometer

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊

2for more

than 1 second resets the currently dis-

played trip odometer to zero.

Clock and Outside temperature

display

Clock

The clock is displayed at the top of the

vehicle information display.

Outside temperature display

The outside temperature is displayed at

the top of the vehicle information display.

The snowflake icon appears if the outside

temperature is below 37°F (3°C). The tem-

perature can be changed to display in Cel-

sius or Fahrenheit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Unit” in this section.

LIC3693 LIC3694

Instruments and controls 2-5

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev

engine into the red zone 䊊

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, reduce engine speed. Operating

the engine in the red zone may cause

serious engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature. The engine coolant tempera-

ture is within the normal range 䊊

1when

the gauge needle points within the zone

shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies

with the outside air temperature and driv-

ing conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-

ture near the hot (H) end of the normal

range,reduce vehicle speed to decrease

temperature. If the gauge is over the

normal range, stop the vehicle as soon

as safely possible. If the engine is over-

heated, continued operation of the ve-

hicle may seriously damage the engine.

For additional information, refer to “If

your vehicle overheats” in the “In case

of emergency” section of this manual

for immediate action required.

LIC2219 LIC2220

2-6 Instruments and controls

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel

level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during brak-

ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or

down hills.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) af-

ter the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

The low fuel warning message appears in

the vehicle information display when the

amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-

isters 0 (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door

is located on the passenger’s side of the

vehicle.

CAUTION

∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may

come on. Refuel as soon as possible.

After a few driving trips. the light

should turn off. If the light remains on

after a few driving trips, have the ve-

hicle inspected. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

this section.

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism

and indicates the heading direction of the

vehicle.

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

press the button as described in the

charts below to activate various features of

the automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.

Push and hold

the

button for

about:

Feature:

(Push button again for about

1 second to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

8 seconds

Compass zone can be changed

to correct false compass read-

ings

10 seconds Compass enters calibration

mode

For additional information about the auto-

matic anti-glare feature, refer to “Auto-

matic anti-glare rearview mirror” in the

“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion of this manual.

LIC2222

COMPASS (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-7

COMPASS DISPLAY

Press the button for about one sec-

ond when the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position to toggle the compass di-

rection display 䊊

1on or off. The display will

indicate the direction that the vehicle is

heading.

N: North

E: East

S: South

W: West

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the com-

pass by driving the vehicle in three com-

plete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by driv-

ing your vehicle on your everyday route.

The compass will be calibrated once it has

tracked three complete circles.

LIC1487

2-8 Instruments and controls

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north

and geographical north is known as vari-

ance. In some areas, this difference can

sometimes be great enough to cause false

compass readings. Follow these instruc-

tions to set the variance for your particular

location if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button for

about 8 seconds. The current zone

number will appear in the display. Re-

lease the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone

map. Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the button repeatedly to

toggle through the zone numbers until

the desired number appears in the dis-

play. Once you have selected a zone

number, the display will show a com-

pass direction within a few seconds.

Inaccurate compass direction

The compass display is equipped with au-

tomatic correction function. If the correct

direction is not shown, follow this proce-

dure.

WIC0355

Instruments and controls 2-9

1. With the display turned on, press and

hold the for about 10 seconds.

The “C” icon in the compass display will

illuminate.

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the

vehicle in three complete circles at a

maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles, the display

should return to normal.

CAUTION

∙ Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,

which are attached to the vehicle by

means of a magnet. They affect the

operation of the compass.

∙ When cleaning the mirror, use a paper

towel or similar material dampened

with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass

cleaner directly on the mirror as it

may cause the liquid cleaner to enter

the mirror housing.

2-10 Instruments and controls

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light

Power steering warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system

warning light (if so equipped)

Seat belt warning light and chime Security indicator light

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with

Pedestrian Detection system warning light

(if so equipped)

Supplemental air bag warning light Side light and headlight indicator light

(green)

or Brake warning light All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator

light (if so equipped)

Slip indicator light

Charge warning light Front fog light indicator light (if so

equipped)

SPORT mode indicator light

or Electronic parking brake warning

light (if so equipped)

Front passenger air bag status light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low tire pressure warning light High beam assist indicator light (green)

(if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

Master warning light High beam indicator light (blue)

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS

AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Instruments and controls 2-11

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking

brake, fasten the seat belts and place the

ignition switch in the ON position without

starting the engine. The following lights (if

so equipped) will come on:

, or , ,

The following lights (if so equipped) come

on briefly and then go off:

or , , , ,

If any light fails to come on or operate in a

way other than described, it may indicate a

burned-out bulb and/or a system mal-

function. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Some indicators and warnings are also dis-

played on the vehicle information display

between the speedometer and tachom-

eter. For additional information,refer to “Ve-

hicle information display” in this section.

WARNING LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in this section.

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the ABS warning light illuminates

and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is

operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while

the engine is running or while driving, it

may indicate the ABS is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system

then operates normally but without anti-

lock assistance. For additional information,

refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Automatic Emergency

Braking (AEB) system

warning light (if so

equipped)

This light comes on when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. It turns

off after the engine is started.

This light illuminates when the AEB system

is set to OFF on the vehicle information

display.

If the light illuminates when the AEB sys-

tem is on, it may indicate that the system is

unavailable. For additional information, re-

fer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Automatic Emergency

Braking (AEB) with

Pedestrian Detection

system warning light (if so

equipped)

This light comes on when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. It turns

off after the engine is started.

2-12 Instruments and controls

This light illuminates when the AEB with

Pedestrian Detection system is set to OFF

in the vehicle information display.

If the light illuminates when the AEB with

Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may

indicate that the system is unavailable. For

additional information, refer to “Automatic

Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian

Detection” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

or Brake warning

light

This light functions for both the parking

brake and the foot brake systems.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light warns of a low brake fluid

level. If the light comes on while the engine

is running, with the parking brake not ap-

plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol-

lowing:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake

fluid as necessary. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have

the warning system checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WARNING

∙

Your brake system may not be working

properly if the warning light is on. Driv-

ing could be dangerous. If you judge it

to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest

service station for repairs. Otherwise,

have your vehicle towed because driv-

ing it could be dangerous.

∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-

tance and braking will require greater

pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

∙ If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the

brake warning light and the ABS warning

light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is

not functioning properly. Have the brake

system checked and, if necessary, repaired.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Avoid high-speed

driving and abrupt braking. For additional

information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking Sys-

tem (ABS) warning light” in this section.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is

running, it may indicate the charging sys-

tem is not functioning properly. Turn the

engine off and check the generator belt. If

the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the

light remains on, have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAUTION

∙

Do not ground electrical accessories di-

rectly to the battery terminal. Doing so

will bypass the variable voltage control

system and the vehicle battery may not

charge completely. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Variable voltage

control system” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

∙ Do not continue driving if the genera-

tor belt is loose, broken or missing.

Instruments and controls 2-13

or Electronic parking

brake warning

light (if so

equipped)

This light illuminates when the electronic

braking brake is activated.

For additional information, refer to “Elec-

tronic parking brake” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Low tire pressure warning

light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni-

tors the tire pressure of all tires except the

spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns

of low tire pressure or indicates that the

TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about

1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illumi-

nate. A “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warn-

ing also appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust

the tire pressure of all four tires to the

recommended COLD tire pressure shown

on the Tire and Loading Information la-

bel located in the driver’s door opening.

The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-

flated to the recommended pressure,

the vehicle must be driven at speeds

above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure

warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge

to check the tire pressure.

The “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning

appears each time the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position as long as the low

tire pressure warning light remains illumi-

nated.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in this section and

“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in

the “Starting and driving” section and in the

“In case of emergency” section of this

manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the

low tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. The

light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The "Tire Pressure Low — Add Air" warning

does not appear if the low tire pressure

warning light illuminates to indicate a

TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, refer to “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section and “Tire

pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

2-14 Instruments and controls

∙ If the light does not illuminate with

the ignition switch placed in the ON

position, have the vehicle checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-

rious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could re-

sult in serious personal injury or

death. Check the tire pressure for all

four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label located in the driver’s

door opening to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light off. If the light still

illuminates while driving after adjust-

ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat

or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire

is flat and all tires are properly in-

flated, have the vehicle checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Have your

tires replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for these services.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

∙ Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the four wheels correctly.

Master warning light

When the ignition is in the ON position, the

master warning light illuminates if any of

the following are displayed on the vehicle

information display.

∙ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Tire Size Incorrect

See Owner’s Manual

∙ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) High Temp. Stop

vehicle

∙ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Error See Owner’s

Manual

∙ No key warning

∙ Low fuel warning

∙ Low windshield-washer fluid warning

∙ Parking brake release warning

∙ Door/liftgate open warning

∙ Loose fuel cap warning

If the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system mal-

functions, or the diameter of the front and

the rear wheels are different, the master

warning light will illuminate. For additional

information, refer to “All-Wheel Drive (AWD)”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Instruments and controls 2-15

∙ If the warning light comes on while driv-

ing there may be a malfunction in the

AWD system. Reduce the vehicle speed

and have your vehicle checked as soon

as possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

∙ If the master warning light was illumi-

nated while driving:

—AWD High Temp Stop vehicle

Pull off the road in a safe area and idle

the engine. The driving mode will

change to 2WD to prevent the AWD sys-

tem from malfunctioning. If the warn-

ing light turns off, you can drive again.

—Tire Size Incorrect See Owner’s

Manual

Pull off the road in a safe area and idle

the engine. Check that all tire sizes are

the same, tire pressure is correct and

tires are not worn.

∙ If the warning light is still on after the

above operations, have your vehicle

checked as soon as possible. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Power steering warning

light

WARNING

∙ If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as-

sist for the steering will not work.

Steering will be harder to operate.

∙ When the power steering warning

light illuminates with the engine run-

ning, there will be no power assist for

the steering. You will still have control

of the vehicle, but the steering will be

harder to operate. Have the power

steering system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the power steering warning light

illuminates. After starting the engine, the

power steering warning light turns off. This

indicates the power steering is operational.

If the power steering warning light illumi-

nates while the engine is running, it may

indicate the power steering is not function-

ing properly and may need servicing. Have

the power steering checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When the power steering warning light illu-

minates with the engine running, there will

be no power assist for the steering, but you

will still have control of the vehicle. At this

time, greater steering effort is required to

operate the steering wheel, especially in

sharp turns and at low speeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power

steering” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten

your seat belts. The light illuminates when-

ever the ignition switch is placed in the ON

or START position and remains illuminated

until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the

same time, the chime sounds for about

6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is

securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illumi-

nate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not

fastened when the front passenger’s seat

is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position, the sys-

tem does not activate the warning light for

the front passenger.

2-16 Instruments and controls

For additional information, refer to “Seat

belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual.

Supplemental air bag

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

or START position, the supplemental air

bag warning light illuminates for about

7 seconds and then turns off. This means

the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,

and pretensioner seat belt systems need

servicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-

onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these services.

Unless checked and repaired, the supple-

mental restraint system (air bag system)

and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func-

tion properly. For additional information, re-

fer to “Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in this section.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK

indicator light (if so

equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion, the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indica-

tor light illuminates and then turns off.

When selecting AWD LOCK mode while the

engine is running, the AWD LOCK indicator

light illuminates.

CAUTION

Do not drive on dry hard surface roads

in the LOCK mode.

Front fog light indicator

light (if so equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illumi-

nates when the front fog lights are on. For

additional information, refer to “Fog light

switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag

status light

The front passenger air bag status light will

be lit and the passenger front air bag will be

off depending on how the front passenger

seat is being used.

For additional information, refer to “Front

passenger air bag and status light” in the

“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system” section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-17

High beam assist indicator

light (green) (if so equipped)

This indicator light illuminates when the

headlights come on while the headlight

switch is in the AUTO position with the high

beams selected. This indicates that the

high beam assist is operational.

For additional information, refer to “Head-

light and turn signal switch” in this section.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This blue light comes on when the head-

light high beams are on and goes out when

the low beams are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes

on when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate a

potential emission control malfunction.

The MIL may also come on steady if the

fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the

vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure

the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed

tightly, and that the vehicle has at least

3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light

should turn off if no other potential emis-

sion control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for

20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds

when the engine is not running, it indicates

that the vehicle is not ready for an emission

control system inspection/maintenance

test. For additional information, refer to

“Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance

(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

∙

MIL on steady — An emission control sys-

tem malfunction has been detected.

Check the fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel

Cap warning appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display. If the fuel-filler cap is

loose or missing, tighten or install the cap

and continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a few

driving trips. If the light does not

turn off after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice. You do not need to have your vehicle

towed to the dealer.

∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has

been detected which may damage the

emission control system. To reduce or

avoid emission control system dam-

age:

– do not drive at speeds above

45 mph (72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or decelera-

tion.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on

steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

checked and repaired as necessary

could lead to poor driveability, reduced

fuel economy, and possible damage to

the emission control system.

2-18 Instruments and controls

Security indicator light

This light blinks when the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF or LOCK position.

The blinking security indicator light indi-

cates that the security systems equipped

on the vehicle are operational.

For additional information, refer to “Security

systems” in this section.

Side light and headlight

indicator light (green)

The side light and headlight indicator light

illuminates when the side light or headlight

position is selected. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Headlight and turn signal

switch” in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC sys-

tem is operating, thus alerting the driver to

the fact that the road surface is slippery

and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

You may feel or hear the system working;

this is normal.

The light will blink for a few seconds after

the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

The indicator light also comes on

when you place the ignition switch in the

ON position. The light will turn off after ap-

proximately 2 seconds if the system is op-

erational. If the light does not come on

have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

SPORT mode indicator

light

This light illuminates and then turns off

when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, and when the SPORT mode is se-

lected.

For additional information, refer to “Con-

tinuously Variable Transmission (CVT)” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Turn signal/hazard

indicator lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn

signal switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is

turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the

VDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indi-

cates the VDC system has been turned off.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine and the system will operate

normally. For additional information, refer

to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

The VDC indicator light also comes on

when you place the ignition switch in the

ON position. The light will turn off after

about 2 seconds if the system is opera-

tional. If the light stays on or comes on

along with the indicator light while

you are driving, have the VDC system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

While the VDC system is operating, you

might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys-

tem working when starting the vehicle or

accelerating, but this is normal.

Instruments and controls 2-19

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a disc brake pad requires

replacement, it makes a high pitched

scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-

tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de-

pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon

as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is

opened while the ignition switch is placed

in the OFF position or placed in the OFF or

LOCK position with the key left in the ve-

hicle. Make sure the ignition switch is

placed in the LOCK position, and take the

key with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF

position, a chime sounds when the driver’s

door is opened if the headlights or parking

lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before

leaving the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key® door

buzzer (if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if

any one of the following improper opera-

tions is found.

∙ The Intelligent Key is left inside the ve-

hicle when locking the doors.

∙ Any doors are not closed securely when

locking the doors.

When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check

both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For

additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual. The vehicle information display is located

to the left of the speedometer. It displays

such items as:

∙ Vehicle settings

∙ Trip computer information

∙ Drive system warnings and settings

∙ Cruise control system information

∙ NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation infor-

mation

∙ Chassis Control

∙ Indicators and warnings

∙ Tire Pressure information

LIC2630

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

2-20 Instruments and controls

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE

INFORMATION DISPLAY

The vehicle information display can be

changed using the

,, and OK buttons located on the

steering wheel.

䊊

1- Use these

buttons to navigate the vehicle infor-

mation display.

䊊

2OK - Change or select an item in the

vehicle information display.

䊊

3— Returns to the previous menu.

The OK, and buttons also

control audio and control panel functions

in some conditions. Most screens and

menus offer instruction prompts of the

steering switch buttons to indicate how to

control the vehicle information display.

Dots on the left side of the vehicle informa-

tion display will appear if there is more than

one page of menu items. The OK button

changes the audio source and

the buttons also control voice

recognition manual mode. For additional

information, refer to the separate

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

STARTUP DISPLAY

When the vehicle is placed in the ON posi-

tion, the vehicle information display may

display the following screens:

∙ Home

∙ Cruise Control

∙ Average speed

∙ Trip

∙ Fuel Economy

∙ Compass

∙ Audio

∙ Safety Shield

∙ Tire Pressure

∙ 4x4–i

∙ Chassis Control

∙ Warnings

∙ Settings

Warnings will only display if there are any

present. For additional information, refer to

“Vehicle information display warnings and

indicators” in this section.

To control which items display in the ve-

hicle information display, refer to “Meter

settings” in this section.

LIC3566

Instruments and controls 2-21

RESETTING THE DRIVE COMPUTER

1. Press the or buttons

until you reach the desired drive com-

puter mode.

NOTE:

Once you have a drive computer dis-

played, you can use the

and buttons to switch between

Drive Computer 䊊

1or 䊊

2. Press the OK button.

3. Select one of the following items:

∙ “Cancel” — returns to the previous

screen without resetting the trip com-

puter.

∙ Drive computer value

– “Average Speed” - resets the average

speed of the selected drive com-

puter.

– “Distance” - resets the distance and

time of the selected drive computer.

– “Fuel Economy” - resets the fuel

economy of the selected drive com-

puter.

∙ “All” — resets all linked values for the se-

lected drive computer. This includes

distance and time, average fuel

economy and average speed informa-

tion for the selected drive computer.

NOTE:

Drive computer 2 will automatically reset

each time the ignition is placed in the

OFF position.

SETTINGS

The setting mode allows you to change the

information displayed in the vehicle infor-

mation display:

∙ Driver Assistance

∙ Clock

∙ Meter Settings

∙ Vehicle Settings

∙ Maintenance

∙ Alarm

∙ Tire Pressures

∙ Unit

∙ Language

∙ Factory Reset

2-22 Instruments and controls

Driver Assistance

The driver assistance menu allows the user

to change the settings for driving, parking,

and braking aids.

Menu item Result

Driving Aids (if so equipped) Displays available driving aids.

Lane (if so equipped) Displays available lane options.

Warning Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) systems on or off. For

additional information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” and “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Blind Spot Displays available blind spot options.

Warning Allows user to turn Blind Spot Warning (BSW) on or off. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning

(BSW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of your owner’s manual.

Emergency Brake Allows user to turn the emergency brake feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Automatic Emer-

gency Braking (AEB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of your owner’s manual.

Steering Assist (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the steering assist on or off.

Parking Aids Displays available parking aids.

Moving Object (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Moving Object Detection (MOD) feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelli-

gent Around View Monitor” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of your

owner’s manual.

Cross Traffic Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) feature on or off.

Front Sensor (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the front sensor on or off.

Rear Sensor (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the rear sensor on or off.

Display (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the display on or off.

Volume (if so equipped) Allows user to select sensor volume (High, Mid. or Low).

Range (if so equipped) Allows user to select the sensor range (Far, Mid. or Near).

Chassis Control Displays available chassis controls options.

Trace Control Allows user to turn the trace control feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Trace Control

(I-TC)” in the “Starting and driving” section of your owner’s manual.

Engine Brake Allows user to turn the engine brake feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Engine Brake

(I-EB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of your owner’s manual.

Instruments and controls 2-23

Clock

Menu item Result

Clock When selected, the following message appears:

Models with Navigation: “Set clock in NAVI”. For additional information, refer to the separate

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

Models without Navigation: “Set clock in Audio”. For additional information, refer to the separate

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

Meter Settings

The meter settings allow the user to

change the settings for the vehicle infor-

mation display.

Menu item Result

Main Menu Selection Displays the available options.

Home Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display.

Average Speed Allows user to turn the average speed screen on or off in the vehicle information display.

Trip Allows user to turn the trip display on or off in the vehicle information display.

Fuel Economy Allows user to turn the fuel economy display on or off in the vehicle information display.

Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation display on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional

information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

Audio Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information,

refer to “Audio system” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this

manual.

Cruise Control Allows user to turn the cruise control display on or off in the vehicle information display.

Safety Shield (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the driving aids display on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional

information, refer to “Driver Assistance” in this section.

Tire Pressures Allows user to turn the tire pressure display on or off in the vehicle information display.

4x4–i (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the 4x4–i display on or off in the vehicle information display.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Menu item Result

Chassis Control Allows user to turn the chassis control display on or off in the vehicle information display.

Body Color Allows user to select the color of the vehicle displayed in the vehicle information display.

ECO Mode Settings Displays the available options for ECO mode settings.

ECO Indicator Allows the user to turn the ECO indicator on or off in the vehicle information display.

DISP Mode Allows user to select how the ECO mode in displayed.

Pedal Select to have the ECO mode shown as a pedal display.

Inst.FE Select to have the ECO mode shown as instant fuel economy.

ECO Drive Report Displays the available options for the ECO drive report.

Display Allows user to turn the ECO drive report on or off.

View History Allows user to view and reset ECO drive report history.

Welcome Effect Displays the available options for the welcome effect.

Dial Effect Allows user to turn the dial effect on or off.

Display Effect Allows user to turn the display effect on or off.

Vehicle Settings

The vehicle settings allow the user to

change the settings for lights, wipers, lock-

ing, keys, and other vehicle settings.

Menu item Result

Lighting Displays the available lighting options.

Welcome Light Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off.

Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off.

Light Sensitivity (if so equipped) Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle.

Light Off Delay (if so equipped) Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off.

Turn indicator Displays the available turn indicator options.

3 Flash Pass Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass feature on or off.

Locking Displays the available locking options.

I-Key Door Lock (if so equipped) Allows user to turn I-Key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated.

Instruments and controls 2-25

Menu item Result

Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the

door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is

pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the

door unlock operation is performed again within 5 seconds. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be

unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.

Auto Door Unlock Allows the user to customize the auto door unlock options.

Answer Bk. Horn Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators

will flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.

Wipers Displays the available wiper options.

Speed Dependent Allows user to turn wiper with speed on or off.

Reverse Link (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the reverse link feature on or off.

Drip Wipe Allows user to turn the drip wipe feature on or off.

Remote Start (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start on or off. When turned on, the engine can be restarted remotely.

For additional information, refer to “Remote Engine Start” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section

of this manual.

Battery Saver (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the battery saver on or off. When turned on, the battery saver automatically turns off the

ignition after a period of time when the ignition switch is left in the ON position.

Driving Position (if so equipped) Displays the available driving position options.

Exit Seat Slide Allows the user to turn the exit seat slide on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the driver’s seat

backward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into

the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the driver’s seat will move to the previous set

position. For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and ad-

justments” section of this manual.

2-26 Instruments and controls

Maintenance

The maintenance menu allows the user to

set reminders for various vehicle mainte-

nance items.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a

substitute for regular tire checks, in-

cluding tire pressure checks. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing

wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual. Many factors in-

cluding tire inflation, alignment, driving

habits and road conditions affect tire

wear and when tires should be re-

placed. Setting the tire replacement in-

dicator for a certain driving distance

does not mean your tires will last that

long. Use the tire replacement indicator

as a guide only and always perform

regular tire checks. Failure to perform

regular tire checks, including tire pres-

sure checks could result in tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to a collision, which could

result in serious personal injury or

death.

Menu item Result

Maintenance Displays various maintenance reminder options.

Oil and Filter Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Tire Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Other Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Instruments and controls 2-27

Alarm

The alarm menu allows the user to set spe-

cific alarms for various items on the vehicle.

Menu item Result

Timer Alert Allows user to set the timer alert alarm.

Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation alarm on or off.

Phone Allows user to turn the phone alarm on or off.

Mail Allows user to turn the mail alarm on or off.

Tire Pressures

The tire pressure menu allows the user to

change the units for the tire pressure dis-

play.

Menu item Result

Tire Pressure Unit Displays available units for tire pressure display.

Unit

The unit menu allows the user to custom-

ize the information that appears in the ve-

hicle information display.

Menu item Result

Mileage Displays available mileage options shown in the vehicle information display.

Tire Pressures Displays available tire pressures options shown in the vehicle information display.

Temperature Displays available temperature options shown in the vehicle information display.

2-28 Instruments and controls

Language

The language menu allows the user to

change the languages displayed in the ve-

hicle information display.

Menu item Result

Language Displays available language options for the vehicle information display.

Factory Reset

The factory reset menu allows the user to

restore the vehicle information display set-

tings to factory status.

Menu item Result

Factory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected,

the user can confirm or deny the reset.

Instruments and controls 2-29

LIC3764

2-30 Instruments and controls

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

1. Engine start operation

2. No Key Detected (if so equipped)

3. Shift to Park

4. Key Battery Low (if so equipped)

5. Engine start operation for Intelligent

Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)

(if so equipped)

6. Key ID incorrect (if so equipped)

7. Release Parking Brake

8. Low Fuel

9. Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped)

10. Door/liftgate Open

11. Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

(if so equipped)

12. Loose Fuel Cap

13. Tire Pressure Low — Add Air

14. Flat Tire — Visit dealer (if so equipped)

15. Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle

16. AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

17. AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle (if so

equipped)

18. Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner’s Manual

(if so equipped)

19. Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery

20. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

21. Power will turn off to save the battery

22. Power turned off to save the battery

23. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights

24. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

25. Timer Alert — Time for a driver break?

26. Chassis Control System Error: See

Owner’s Manual

27. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)

28. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indica-

tors (if so equipped)

29. Transmission Shift Position Indicator

30. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

31. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual

32. ECO mode indicator

33. Unavailable: High Cabin Temp (if so

equipped)

34. Unavailable: Road is slippery (if so

equipped)

35. Unavailable: VDC OFF (if so equipped)

36. Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if

so equipped)

37. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

38. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indica-

tor (if so equipped)

39. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) indi-

cator (if so equipped)

40. Steering Assist indicator (if so

equipped)

41. Not Available Poor Road Conditions (if

so equipped)

42. Currently not available (if so equipped)

43. Not Available Front Camera Ob-

structed (if so equipped)

44. Steering Assist Currently unavailable (if

so equipped)

45. Not Available Front camera visibility im-

paired (if so equipped)

46. Not Available Parking Brake On (if so

equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-31

47. Not Available Seat Belt Not Fastened (if

so equipped)

48. Step on Brake Now (if so equipped)

49. Steering Assist on Standby (if so

equipped)

50. Electronic parking brake indicator (if so

equipped)

Engine start operation

This indicator appears when the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will

start by pushing the ignition switch with

the brake pedal depressed. You can start

the engine from any position of the ignition

switch.

No Key Detected (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the Intelligent

Key is left outside the vehicle with the igni-

tion switch in the ON position. Make sure

the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

For additional information about the Intel-

ligent Key, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®”

in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section of this manual.

Shift to Park

This warning illuminates when the ignition

switch is in the OFF position and the shift

lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a

chime sounds when the ignition switch is

in the OFF position.

If this warning illuminates, move the shift

lever to the P (Park) position and start the

engine.

Key Battery Low (if so equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the Intelli-

gent Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the bat-

tery with a new one. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Battery replacement” in

the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Engine start operation for Intelligent

Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)

(if so equipped)

This indicator appears when the battery of

the Intelligent Key is low and when the In-

telligent Key system and the vehicle are not

communicating normally.

If this appears, touch the ignition switch

with the Intelligent Key while depressing

the brake pedal. For additional information,

refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery dis-

charge” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

Key ID incorrect (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the ignition

switch is placed from the OFF position and

the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the

system. You cannot start the engine with

an unregistered key.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual.

Release Parking Brake

This warning illuminates in the message

area of the vehicle information display

when the parking brake is set and the ve-

hicle is driven.

Low Fuel

This warning illuminates when the fuel level

in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as

soon as it is convenient, preferably before

the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There

will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank

when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0

(Empty).

2-32 Instruments and controls

Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped)

This warning illuminates when the

windshield-washer fluid is at a low level.

Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary.

For additional information, refer to

“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Door/liftgate Open

This warning illuminates when a door has

been opened when the engine is running.

Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

(if so equipped)

After the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, this light comes on for about

2 seconds and then turns off.

The Key System Error message warns of a

malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys-

tem. If the light comes on while the engine

is stopped, it may be impossible to start

the engine.

If the light comes on while the engine is

running, you can drive the vehicle. However

in these cases, contact a NISSAN dealer for

repair as soon as possible.

Loose Fuel Cap

This warning appears when the fuel-filler

cap is not tightened correctly after the ve-

hicle has been refueled. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the

“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion of this manual.

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

This warning appears when the low tire

pressure warning light in the meter illumi-

nates and low tire pressure is detected. The

warning appears each time the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position as long

as the low tire pressure warning light re-

mains illuminated. If this warning appears,

stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres-

sures of all four tires to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. For additional

information, refer to “Low tire pressure

warning light” in this section and “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Flat Tire – Visit dealer (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the low tire

pressure warning light in the meter illumi-

nates and one or more flat tires are de-

tected while driving. A chime also sounds

for approximately 10 seconds.

Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle

This warning appears in the message area

of the vehicle information display if low oil

pressure is detected. This gauge is not de-

signed to indicate low oil level. The low oil

pressure warning is not designed to indi-

cate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to

check the oil level. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when the all-wheel

drive system is not functioning properly

while the engine is running.

AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle (if so

equipped)

This warning may appear while trying to

free a stuck vehicle due to increased oil

temperature. The driving mode may

change to 2-Wheel Drive (2WD). If this warn-

ing is displayed, stop the vehicle with the

engine idling, as soon as it is safe to do so.

Then if the warning turns off, you can con-

tinue driving.

Instruments and controls 2-33

Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner’s Manual

(if so equipped)

This warning may appear if there is a large

difference between the diameters of the

front and rear wheels. Pull off the road in a

safe area, with the engine idling. Check that

all the tire sizes are the same, that the tire

pressure is correct and that the tires are

not excessively worn.

Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery

This warning appears when the battery is

low and needs to be charged.

Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

This warning may appear if the extended

storage switch is not pushed in. When this

warning appears, push in the extended

storage switch to turn off the warning. For

additional information, refer to “Extended

storage switch” in this section.

Power will turn off to save the battery

This warning appears in the message area

of the vehicle information display after a

period of time if the shift lever has not

moved from the P (Park) position.

Power turned off to save the battery

This warning appears after the ignition

switch is automatically turned off to save

the battery.

Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights

This warning appears when the headlights

are left in the ON position when exiting the

vehicle. Place the headlight switch to OFF

or AUTO position. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Headlight and turn signal

switch” in this section.

Headlight System Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

This warning illuminates when there is an

error with the system. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Headlight and turn signal

switch” in this section.

Timer Alert – Time for a driver break?

This indicator appears when the set time is

reached. The time can be set up to six

hours. For additional information on set-

ting the timer, refer to “Alarm” in this sec-

tion.

Chassis Control System Error: See Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped)

This warning appears if the Integrated

Dynamics-control Module detects an error

in the Intelligent Trace Control, Intelligent

Engine Brake, or the Active Ride Control

systems. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Chassis control” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator shows the cruise control sys-

tem status.

For additional information, refer to “Cruise

control” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indica-

tors (if so equipped)

These indicators show the Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system status. The sta-

tus is shown by color. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control

(ICC)” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

2-34 Instruments and controls

Transmission Shift Position Indicator

This indicator shows the transmission shift

position.

CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

This warning illuminates when there is a

problem with the CVT system. If this warn-

ing comes on, have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when one or more of

the following systems (if so equipped) is

not functioning properly:

∙ Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

∙ Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

∙ Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

If one or more of these warning appears,

have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit an NISSAN dealer for

this service.

ECO mode indicator

This indicator shows when the ECO mode

is engaged.

For additional information, refer to “ECO

mode switch” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

Unavailable: High Cabin Temp. (if so

equipped)

This message appears when the camera

detects an interior temperature of more

than approximately 104°F (40°C). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Lane Departure

Warning (LDW)” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

Unavailable: Road is slippery (if so

equipped)

This message appears when the Lane De-

parture Prevention (LDP) system becomes

unavailable because the road is slippery.

For additional information, refer to “Lane

Departure Prevention (LDP)” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Unavailable: VDC OFF (if so equipped)

This message appears when the Lane De-

parture Prevention (LDP) system becomes

unavailable because the VDC is turned off.

For additional information, refer to “Lane

Departure Prevention (LDP)” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if

so equipped)

This message appears when the Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system become un-

available because the front radar is ob-

structed. For additional information, refer

to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

This message appears when the Blind

Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic

Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable

because a radar blockage is detected. For

additional information, refer to “Blind Spot

Warning (BSW)” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert

(RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator

(if so equipped)

This indicator shows when the LDW system

is engaged.

For additional information, refer to ”Warn-

ing systems switch” in this section, “Lane

Departure Warning (LDW) system” and “In-

telligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Instruments and controls 2-35

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) indi-

cator (if so equipped)

This indicator shows when the I-LI system

is engaged.

For additional information, refer to ”Warn-

ing systems switch” in this section and “In-

telligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Steering Assist indicator (if so

equipped)

This indicator appears when the Steering

Assist system is engaged.

For additional information, refer to “ProPI-

LOT

Assist” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

Not Available Poor Road Conditions (if

so equipped)

This message may appear when the Intel-

ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT

Assist) system or the ICC system is en-

gaged.

Under the following conditions, the ICC

(with ProPILOT

Assist) or the ICC system

is automatically canceled:

∙ When the VDC operates

∙ When a wheel slips

The above system cannot be used in some

situations (VDC operates and wheel slip.)

Currently not available (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the Intel-

ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT

Assist) system or the ICC system is en-

gaged.

Under the following conditions, the ICC

(with ProPILOT

Assist) or the ICC system

is automatically canceled:

∙ When the VDC operates

∙ When a wheel slips

∙ When the VDC system is turned off

The above system cannot be used in some

situations (VDC operates, wheel slip and

VDC system is off.)

Not Available Front Camera Obstructed

(if so equipped)

This message may appear when the Intel-

ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT

Assist) system is engaged.

Under the following conditions, the ICC

(with ProPILOT

Assist) system is auto-

matically canceled:

∙ The camera area of the windshield is

fogged up or covered with dirt, water,

drops, ice, snow, etc.

∙ Strong light, such as sunlight or high

beams from oncoming vehicles, enter

the front camera

∙ When the wiper (HI) operates

The system will be available when the

above conditions no longer exist.

If the warning message continues to ap-

pear, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn

the engine off and clean the windshield.

Steering Assist Currently unavailable (if

so equipped)

This message may appear when the Steer-

ing Assist system is engaged.

Under the following conditions, the Steer-

ing Assist system is automatically can-

celed:

∙ When the wiper (LO) operates

∙ When lane markers in the traveling lane

cannot be correctly detected for a pe-

riod of time due to such items as a

snow rut, reflection of light on a rainy

day or several unclear lane markers are

present

2-36 Instruments and controls

If you want to use the Steering Assist sys-

tem again, cancel the ProPILOT

Assist

system and set it again when lane markers

are clearly visible.

Not Available Front camera visibility is

impaired (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the Intel-

ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT

Assist) system is engaged.

Under the following conditions, the ICC

(with ProPILOT

Assist) system is auto-

matically canceled:

∙ The camera area of the windshield is

fogged up or covered with dirt, water,

drops, ice, snow, etc.

∙ Strong light, such as sunlight or high

beams from oncoming vehicles, enter

the front camera

∙ When the wiper (HI) operates

The system will be available when the

above conditions no longer exist.

If the warning message continues to ap-

pear, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn

the engine off and clean the windshield.

Not Available Parking Brake On (if so

equipped)

This message may appear when the Intel-

ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT

Assist) system is engaged.

Under the following condition, the ICC (with

ProPILOT

Assist) system is automatically

canceled:

∙ The electronic parking brake is applied

The above system cannot be used when

the electric parking brake is activated.

Not Available Seat Belt Not Fastened (if

so equipped)

This message may appear when the Intel-

ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT

Assist) system is engaged.

Under the following condition, the ICC (with

ProPILOT

Assist) system is automatically

canceled:

∙ When the driver’s seat belt is not fas-

tened

The above system cannot be used when

the driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

Step on Brake Now (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the Intel-

ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT

Assist) system is engaged.

It will be displayed under the following con-

dition:

∙ While the vehicle is stopped by the ICC

(with ProPILOT

Assist), the driver’s

door is opened but the electronic park-

ing brake was not activated.

Please step on the brake immediately.

Steering Assist on Standby(if so

equipped)

This message may appear when the Steer-

ing Assist system is engaged.

It will be displayed under the following con-

dition:

∙ When not holding the steering wheel or

when there is no steering wheel opera-

tion

Please hold on the steering wheel immedi-

ately. When the steering operation is de-

tected, the warning turns off and the steer-

ing assist function is automatically

restored.

Instruments and controls 2-37

Electronic parking brake indicator (if so

equipped)

This indicates the current status of the

electronic parking brake.

For additional information, refer to “Elec-

tronic parking brake” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Your vehicle may have two types of security

systems:

∙ Vehicle security system

∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual

and audible alarm signals if someone

opens the doors or liftgate when the sys-

tem is armed. It is not, however, a motion

detection type system that activates when

a vehicle is moved or when a vibration oc-

curs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but

cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the

theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-

nents in all situations. Always secure your

vehicle even if parking for a brief period.

Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and

always lock the vehicle when unattended.

Be aware of your surroundings, and park in

secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protec-

tion, such as component locks, identifica-

tion markers, and tracking systems, are

available at auto supply stores and spe-

cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer

such equipment. Check with your insur-

ance company to see if you may be eligible

for discounts for various theft protection

features.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows. (The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the keys from the vehicle.

3. Close all doors and liftgate. Lock all

doors. The doors can be locked with

the key fob (if so equipped), Intelligent

Key (if so equipped), door handle re-

quest switch, or mechanical key.

LIC2385

SECURITY SYSTEMS

2-38 Instruments and controls

4. Confirm that the security indica-

tor light stays on for about 30 seconds.

The vehicle security system is now pre-

armed. The vehicle security system will

automatically shift into the armed

phase. The security light begins

to flash once every three seconds. If

during the pre-armed phase one of the

following occurs, the system will not

arm:

∙ Any door is unlocked with the key fob (if

so equipped), the Intelligent Key (if so

equipped), mechanical key, or door re-

quest switch.

∙ Ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion.

∙Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will

activate with all the doors, hood and

liftgate locked with the ignition

switch placed in the LOCK position.

When placing the ignition switch in

the ON position, the system will be

released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the

following alarm:

∙ The headlights blink and the horn

sounds intermittently but synchro-

nously.

∙ The alarm automatically turns off after

a period of time. However, the alarm

reactivates if the vehicle is tampered

with again.

The alarm is activated by:

∙ opening any door or the liftgate without

using the key or Intelligent Key (even if

the door is unlocked by releasing the

door inside lock knob).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking a door

or the liftgate with the mechanical key the

key fob (if so equipped), pressing the

button on the Intelligent Key (if so

equipped), or pushing the request switch

on the driver’s or passenger’s door with the

Intelligent Key (if so equipped) in range of

the door handle.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of a registered key.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

Instruments and controls 2-39

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or

LOCK position.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is

malfunctioning, the light will remain on

while the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

If the light still remains on and/or the

engine will not start, seek service for the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-

vice as soon as possible. Please bring all

registered keys that you have. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

LIC0474

2-40 Instruments and controls

SWITCH OPERATION

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the windshield

and obscure your vision which may lead

to an accident. Warm the windshield

with the defroster before you wash the

windshield.

CAUTION

∙ Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

∙ Do not operate the washer if the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir is

empty.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with windshield-washer

fluid concentrates at full strength.

Some methyl alcohol based

windshield-washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufac-

turer’s recommended levels before

pouring the fluid into the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

NOTE:

If the windshield wiper operation is in-

terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may

stop moving to protect its motor. If this

occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF

position and remove the snow or ice that

is on and around the wiper arms. In ap-

proximately 1 minute, turn the switch on

again to operate the wiper.

The windshield wiper and washer operates

when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper

at the following speed:

䊊

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op-

eration can be adjusted by turning the

knob toward 䊊

A(Slower) or 䊊

B(Faster).

Also, the intermittent operation speed

varies in accordance with the vehicle

speed. (For example, when the vehicle

speed is high, the intermittent opera-

tion speed will be faster.)

䊊

2Low (LO) — continuous low speed op-

eration

䊊

3High (HI) — continuous high speed op-

eration

LIC2661

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-41

Lift the lever up 䊊

4to have one sweep op-

eration (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you 䊊

5to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several

times.

After a short delay the drip wipe function

will operate the wiper once more to clear

remaining windshield-washer fluid from

the windshield.

NOTE:

The Speed Dependent feature and Drip

Wipe feature may be disabled. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle in-

formation display” in this section. REAR SWITCH OPERATION

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the window and

obscure your vision. Warm the rear win-

dow with the defroster before you wash

the rear window.

CAUTION

∙ Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

∙ Do not operate the washer if the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir is

empty.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with windshield-washer

fluid concentrates at full strength.

Some methyl alcohol based

windshield-washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufac-

turer’s recommended levels before

pouring the fluid into the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

LIC2662

2-42 Instruments and controls

NOTE:

If the rear window wiper operation is in-

terrupted by snow, etc., the wiper may

stop moving to protect its motor. If this

occurs, turn the wiper switch to OFF and

remove the snow, etc. on and around the

wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn

the switch ON again to operate the wiper.

The rear window wiper and washer oper-

ate when the ignition switch is in the ON

position. Turn the switch clockwise from

the OFF position to operate the wiper.

䊊

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op-

eration (not adjustable)

䊊

2Low (ON) — continuous low speed op-

eration

Push the switch forward 䊊

3to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several

times.

NOTE:

The Reverse Link feature may be dis-

abled. For additional information, refer

to “Vehicle information display” in this

section.

To defrost the rear window glass and out-

side mirrors (if so equipped), start the en-

gine and push the rear window defroster

switch on. The rear window defroster indi-

cator light on the switch comes on. Push

the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically

turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

䊊

1Rotate the switch to the position,

and the front parking, tail, license plate,

and instrument panel lights will come

on.

䊊

2Rotate the switch to the position,

and the headlights will come on and all

the other lights remain on.

LIC2614

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2634

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR (if so equipped)

DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-43

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights

to turn on and off automatically. The auto-

light system can:

∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking,

tail, license plate and instrument panel

lights automatically when it is dark.

∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light.

∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of time

after you place the ignition switch in the

OFF position and all doors are closed.

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and the

time delay for autolight shutoff can be

adjusted. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in

this section.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO

position 䊊

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically

turns the headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position and a door is opened and left

open, the headlights remain on for a period

of time. If another door is opened while the

headlights are on, then the timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the

switch to the OFF, ,or position.

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2635 LIC2636

2-44 Instruments and controls

Be sure you do not put anything on top

of the autolight sensor located in the top

side 䊊

1of the instrument panel. The au-

tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it

is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as

if it is dark out and the headlights will

illuminate. If this occurs while parked

with the engine off and the ignition

switch placed in the ON position, your

vehicle’s battery could become dis-

charged.

Headlight beam select

䊊

1To select the high beam function, push

the lever forward. The high beam lights

come on and the light illumi-

nates.

䊊

2Pull the lever back to select the low

beam.

䊊

3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes

the headlight high beams on and off.

High Beam Assist (if so equipped)

The High Beam Assist system will operate

when the vehicle is driven at speeds of ap-

proximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and above. If

an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle ap-

pears in front of your vehicle when the

headlight high beam is on, the headlight

will be switched to the low beam automati-

cally.

WARNING

∙ The High Beam Assist system is a con-

venience but it is not a substitute for

safe driving operation. The driver

should remain alert at all times, en-

sure safe driving practices and switch

the high beams and low beam manu-

ally when necessary.

∙ The high beam or low beam may not

switch automatically under the fol-

lowing conditions. Switch the high

beam and low beam manually.

– During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, wind, etc.).

– When a light source similar to a

headlight or tail light is in the vicin-

ity of the vehicle.

LIC3051 LIC2637

Instruments and controls 2-45

– When the headlights of the on-

coming vehicle or the leading ve-

hicle are turned off, when the color

of the light is affected due to for-

eign materials on the lights, or

when the light beam is out of

position.

– When there is a sudden, continu-

ous change in brightness.

– When driving on a road that passes

over rolling hills, or a road that has

level differences.

– When driving on a road with many

curves.

– When a sign or mirror-like surface

is reflecting intense light towards

the front of the vehicle.

– When the container, etc. being

towed by a leading vehicle is re-

flecting intense light.

– When a headlight on your vehicle is

damaged or dirty.

– When the vehicle is leaning at an

angle due to a punctured tire, be-

ing towed, etc.

∙ The timing of switching the low beam

and high beam may change under the

following situations.

– The brightness of the headlights of

the oncoming vehicle or leading

vehicle.

– The movement and direction of

the oncoming vehicle and the lead-

ing vehicle.

– When only one light on the oncom-

ing vehicle or the leading vehicle is

illuminated.

– When the oncoming vehicle or the

leading vehicle is a two-wheeled

vehicle.

– Road conditions (incline, curve, the

road surface, etc.).

– The number of passengers and the

amount of luggage.

High Beam Assist operation

To activate the High Beam Assist system,

turn the headlight switch to the AUTO po-

sition 䊊

1and push the lever forward 䊊

(high beam position). The High Beam Assist

indicator light in the meter will illuminate

while the headlights are turned on.

If the High Beam Assist indicator light does

not illuminate in the above condition, it may

indicate that the system is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

LIC3696

2-46 Instruments and controls

When the vehicle speed lowers to less than

approximately 16 mph (25 km/h), the head-

light uses the low beam.

To turn off the High Beam Assist system,

turn the headlight switch to the posi-

tion or select the low beam position by

placing the lever in the neutral position.

Ambient image sensor maintenance

The ambient image sensor 䊊

1for the High

Beam Assist system is located in front of

the inside mirror. To maintain the proper

operation of the high beam assist system

and prevent a system malfunction, be sure

to observe the following:

∙ Always keep the windshield clean.

∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the ambient image sensor.

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas

around the ambient image sensor. Do

not touch the sensor lens that is lo-

cated on the ambient image sensor.

If the ambient image sensor is damaged

due to an accident, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Battery saver system

The battery saver system automatically

turns off the ignition after a period of time

when the ignition switch is left in the ON

position.

The battery saver system automatically

turns off the following lights after a period

of time when the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position and the doors are closed:

∙ Headlights, when the headlight switch

is in the or position

∙ Interior lights, when left in the ON posi-

tion

LIC3638

Instruments and controls 2-47

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature

automatically turns off the headlights

after a period of time, you should turn

the headlight switch to the OFF position

when the engine is not running to avoid

discharging the vehicle battery.

Automatic headlight aiming

control (if so equipped)

Vehicles with LED headlights may be

equipped with an automatic levelling sys-

tem. The headlight axis is controlled auto-

matically.

NISSAN recommends that you should con-

sult the local regulations on the use of

lights.

Manual headlight aiming control

(if so equipped)

Depending on the number of occupants in

the vehicle and the load it is carrying, the

headlight axis may be higher than desired.

If the vehicle is traveling on a hilly road, the

headlights may directly hit the rearview

mirror of the vehicle ahead or the wind-

shield of the oncoming vehicle. The light

axis can be lowered with the operation of

the switch.

The larger the number designated on the

switch, the lower the axis.

When traveling without a heavy load or on a

flat road, select position 0.

Select the switch position by referring to

the following sample.

Vehicle Load Switch

Position

Driver only or Driver/front

passenger 0

Driver/front seat passenger/

rear seat passengers 1

Driver/front seat passenger/

rear seat passengers/cargo

or driver/cargo/no trailer

Fully loaded/no trailer 3

LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS

(DRL) SYSTEM

The LED portion of the headlights auto-

matically illuminate at 100% intensity when

the engine is started and the parking brake

released. The LED Daytime Running Lights

(DRL) system operates with the headlight

switch in the OFF position. When you turn

the headlight switch to the position

for full illumination, the LED lights switch

from LED DRL system to the park function.

If the parking brake is applied before the

engine is started, the LED DRL system does

LIC0662

2-48 Instruments and controls

not illuminate. The LED DRL system illumi-

nates when the parking brake is released.

The LED DRL system will remain on until the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight

switch on for interior controls and switches

to illuminate, as those remain off while the

switch is in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the LED DRL system is active, tail

lights on your vehicle are not on. It is

necessary at dusk to turn on your head-

lights. Failure to do so could cause an

accident injuring yourself and others. INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

Press the “-” button 䊊

Ato decrease the

brightness of instrument panel lights.

Press the “+” button 䊊

Bto increase the

brightness of instrument panel lights.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

䊊

1Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is

completed, the turn signal cancels au-

tomatically.

Lane change signal

䊊

2Move the lever up or down until the

turn signal begins to flash, but the lever

does not latch, to signal a lane change.

Hold the lever until the lane change is

completed.

LIC2624 LIC2638

Instruments and controls 2-49

Move the lever up or down until the

turn signal begins to flash, but the lever

does not latch, and release the lever.

The turn signal will automatically flash

three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal

a lane change based on road and traffic

conditions.

NOTE:

The 3 flash pass feature may be disabled.

For additional information, refer to “Ve-

hicle information display” in this section.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so

equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight

switch to the position, then turn the

fog light switch to the position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight

switch in the AUTO position, the headlights

must be on, then turn the fog light switch to

the position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light

switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low

beams selected for the fog lights to oper-

ate. The fog lights automatically turn off

when the high beam headlights are se-

lected.

LIC2639

2-50 Instruments and controls

To sound the horn, push near the horn icon

on the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system.

Tampering with the supplemental front

air bag system may result in serious

personal injury.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use

the seat heater if you or the occupants

cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-

tures or have an inability to feel pain in

body parts that contact the seat. Use of

the seat heater by such people could

result in serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex-

tended periods or when no one is us-

ing the seat.

∙ Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket,

cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,

the seat may become overheated.

∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

similar object. This may result in dam-

age to the heater.

∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with

a dry cloth.

∙ When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any

similar materials.

∙ If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn

the switch off and have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LIC3568

HORN HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so

equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-51

The front seats are warmed by built-in

heaters.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,

as desired. The indicator light in the

switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermo-

stat, automatically turning the heater

on and off. The indicator light will re-

main on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to push the

switch to turn it off.

The heated steering wheel system is de-

signed to operate only when the surface

temperature of the steering wheel is below

68°F (20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to

warm the steering wheel after the engine

starts. The indicator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steering

wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will

heat the steering wheel and cycle off and

on to maintain a temperature above 68°F

(20°C). The indicator light will remain on as

long as the system is on.

Push the switch again to turn the heated

steering wheel system off manually. The

indicator light will go off.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steer-

ing wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the

switch is turned on, the system will not

heat the steering wheel. This is not a

malfunction.

LIC3475 LIC3476

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH (if

so equipped)

2-52 Instruments and controls

The dynamic driver assistance switch is

used to temporarily turn on and off the

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system

that is activated using the settings menu of

the vehicle information display.

The I-LI system must be turned on with the

dynamic driver assistance switch every

time the ignition is placed in the ON posi-

tion.

When the dynamic driver assistance

switch is turned off, the indicator 䊊

1on the

switch is off. The indicator will also be off if

the I-LI system is deactivated using the ve-

hicle information display.

The I-LI system warns the driver with a

warning light and a chime, and helps assist

the driver to return the vehicle to the center

of the traveling lane by applying the brakes

to the left or right wheels individually (for a

short period of time). For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Intelligent Lane Interven-

tion (I-LI)” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion and “Vehicle information display” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

The Steering Assist switch is used to turn

on and off the Steering Assist system that

is activated using the settings menu of the

vehicle information display.

The Steering Assist system controls the

steering system to help keep your vehicle

near the center of the lane when driving.

For additional information, refer to ”ProPI-

LOT™ Assist” and “Intelligent Lane Interven-

tion (I-LI)” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

LIC3681 LIC3853

DYNAMIC DRIVER ASSISTANCE

SWITCH (for vehicles without

ProPILOT™ Assist) (if so equipped)

STEERING ASSIST SWITCH (for

vehicles with ProPILOT™ Assist) (if

so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-53

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC

system on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the

VDC system reduces the engine output to

reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will

be reduced even if the accelerator is de-

pressed to the floor. If maximum engine

power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,

turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC

OFF switch. The indicator will come

on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine to turn on the system. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-

ing and driving” section of this manual.

The all-wheel drive (AWD) lock switch is lo-

cated on the instrument panel. The AWD

LOCK indicator light will illuminate when

the switch is turned on. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Warning lights, indicator

lights and audible reminders” in this sec-

tion and “AWD Lock Switch Operations” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Each time you push the switch, the AWD

mode will switch: AUTO →LOCK →AUTO.

LIC3344 LIC2645

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) LOCK

SWITCH (if so equipped)

2-54 Instruments and controls

The E-call (SOS) system switch is used in

combination with a NissanConnect® Ser-

vices subscription to call for assistance in

case of an emergency.

Pushing the switch will (with a paid subscrip-

tion) reach a Response Specialist that will

provide assistance based on the situation

described by the vehicle’s occupant. For ad-

ditional information, or to enroll your vehicle,

refer to www.NissanUSA.com/connect,

www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect, or

www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect/fr or call

855–426–6628.

12V OUTLETS

The power outlets are for powering electri-

cal accessories such as cellular tele-

phones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A)

maximum.

The front and center console power outlets

are powered only when the ignition switch

is in the ON position, or while the accessory

power is active.

NOTE:

∙ When the ignition is in the OFF position,

the front and center console power

outlets stop delivering power one min-

ute after the door is opened and stays

open.

∙ If the door remains closed after the ig-

nition is placed in the OFF position, the

front and center console power outlets

continue to deliver power until the ac-

cessory power timer has elapsed.

∙ The cargo area power outlet(s) contin-

ues to deliver power normally.

LIC3357

Instrument Panel

LIC2615

E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH (if so

equipped)

POWER OUTLETS

Instruments and controls 2-55

CAUTION

∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

∙ Only certain power outlets are de-

signed for use with a cigarette lighter

unit. Do not use any other power out-

let for an accessory lighter. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for additional information.

∙ Do not use with accessories that ex-

ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

∙ Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

∙ Use power outlets with the engine

running to avoid discharging the ve-

hicle battery.

∙ Avoid using power outlets when the

air conditioner, headlights or rear win-

dow defroster is on.

∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned OFF.

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may open.

∙ When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other

liquid to contact the outlet.

Center Console

LIC3697

Cargo Area

LIC2617

2-56 Instruments and controls

The extended storage switch is used when

shipping the vehicle. It is located in the fuse

panel on the driver’s side of the instrument

panel. If any electrical equipment does not

operate, ensure the extended storage

switch is pushed fully in place, as shown.

To inspect the extended storage switch,

ensure the ignition switch and headlight

switch are off, remove the fuse box cover

䊊

Ausing a suitable tool in combination

with a cloth to avoid damaging the trim.

LIC3359

OFF position

LIC3266

ON position

LIC3268

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-57

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS SEATBACK POCKETS

There is a pocket located on the back of the

driver and passenger seats. These pockets

can be used to store maps.

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas-

senger’s advanced air bag system,

please observe the following items:

∙ Do not allow a passenger in the 2nd

row to push or pull on the seatback

pocket.

∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than

9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

LIC2308 LIC2618

STORAGE

2-58 Instruments and controls

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving

to help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console box, press in on the

lever 䊊

1and raise the lid 䊊

To close, push the lid down until the lock

latches.

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES

STORAGE

To open the sunglasses holder, push and

release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the

holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed

while driving to avoid obstructing the

driver’s view and to help prevent an

accident.

LIC3718 LIC3698 LIC2312

Instruments and controls 2-59

CAUTION

∙ Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct

sunlight. The heat may damage the

sunglasses.

CUP HOLDERS WARNING

∙ Do not recline the rear seatback when

you use the cup holders on the rear

armrest. Doing so may cause the bev-

erages to spill over, and if they are hot,

they may scald the passengers.

∙ Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being used to

prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid

is hot, it can scald you or your

passenger.

Front console

LIC2619

2nd row

LIC2620

2-60 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident

Bottle holder — front

LIC2622

Bottle holder — rear

LIC2623

Instruments and controls 2-61

CAUTION

∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in

the vehicle and possibly injure people

during sudden braking or an accident.

∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liq-

uid containers.

CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN (if so

equipped)

WARNING

If your vehicle is equipped with 3rd row

seating, do not attempt to store/place a

spare tire in the cargo area storage

area. In a collision a spare tire could be-

come loose and strike a person result-

ing in severe injury or death.

To access the floor storage area, pull up on

the handle to lift the luggage board.

DIVIDE-N-HIDE® ADJUSTABLE

FLOOR (if so equipped)

WARNING

Do not put objects heavier than 165 lbs.

(75 kg) on the Divide-N-Hide® while in

the mid position. In the upper position,

objects should not weigh more than

30 lbs. (14 kg).

There are multiple positions for the ad-

justable floor. The upper position allows

for additional storage below the adjust-

able floor.

Bottle holder — 3rd row (if so equipped)

LIC2837 LIC2625 LIC2646

2-62 Instruments and controls

To move the adjustable floor from the

lower position to the upper position:

1. Use the handle to lift the adjustable

floor.

2. Move the adjustable floor to the upper

guide track and ensure it is secure in

place.

LUGGAGE HOOKS (if so equipped)

When securing items using luggage hooks

located on the side finisher do not apply a

load over more than 6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a

single hook.

The luggage hooks that are located on the

floor should have loads less than 110 lbs.

(490 N) to a single hook.

The luggage hooks can be used to secure

cargo with ropes or other types of straps.

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ Use suitable ropes and hooks to se-

cure cargo.

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-

gage area. It is extremely dangerous

to ride in a cargo area inside of a ve-

hicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped

with seats and seat belts.

∙ The child restraint top tether strap

may be damaged by contact with

items in the cargo area. Secure any

items in the cargo area. Your child

could be seriously injured or killed in a

collision if the top tether strap is

damaged.

∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

LIC2647 LIC2629

Instruments and controls 2-63

CARGO COVER (if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ Never put anything on the cargo

cover, no matter how small. Any ob-

ject on it could cause an injury in an

accident or sudden stop.

∙ Do not put objects heavier than 44 lbs.

(20 kg) on the cargo cover for long

periods of time.

∙ Do not leave the cargo cover in the

vehicle with it disengaged from the

holder.

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ Properly secure cargo and do not al-

low it to contact the top tether strap

when it is attached to the top tether

anchor. Cargo that is not properly se-

cured or cargo that contacts the top

tether strap may damage the top

tether strap during a collision. If the

cargo cover contacts the top tether

strap when it is attached to the top

tether anchor, remove the cargo cover

from the vehicle or secure it on the

cargo floor below its attachment lo-

cation. If the cargo cover is not re-

moved, it may damage the top tether

strap during a collision. Your child

could be seriously injured or killed in a

collision if the child restraint top

tether strap is damaged.

The cargo cover keeps the luggage com-

partment contents hidden from the out-

side.

WIC1003

2-64 Instruments and controls

Only attach the hook and loop fastener on

the cargo cover privacy cloth to the area on

the rear seatback where it is supposed to

be attached. Otherwise, the seat surface

could be damaged.

To remove the cargo cover:

䊊

1Remove the straps from the rear

hatch.

䊊

2Remove the edge of the cargo cover

privacy cloth from the rear seatback.

䊊

3Remove the cargo cover holders from

the rear pillar.

ROOF RACK (if so equipped)

Do not apply any load directly to the roof

side rails. Cross bars must be installed be-

fore applying load/cargo/luggage to the

roof of the vehicle. Genuine NISSAN acces-

sory cross bars are available through a

NISSAN dealer. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for additional informa-

tion.

The service load capacity for the roof side

rails is 74 kg (165 lbs.), however, do not ex-

ceed the accessory cross bars load capac-

ity.

Be careful that your vehicle does not ex-

ceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR front and rear). For additional infor-

mation regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to

“Vehicle loading information” in the “Techni-

cal and consumer information” section of

this manual.

WARNING

∙ Always install the cross bars onto the

roof side rails before loading cargo of

any kind. Loading cargo directly onto

the roof side rails or the vehicle’s roof

may cause vehicle damage.

∙ Drive extra carefully when the vehicle

is loaded at or near the cargo carrying

capacity, especially if the significant

portion of that load is carried on the

cross bars.

∙ Heavy loading of the cross bars has

the potential to affect the vehicle sta-

bility and handling during sudden or

unusual handling maneuvers.

∙ Roof rack cross bars should be evenly

distributed.

∙ Do not exceed maximum roof rack

cross bars load capacity.

LIC2386

Instruments and controls 2-65

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

∙ Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehicle

while it is in motion and before closing

the windows. Use the window lock

switch to prevent unexpected use of

the power windows.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadver-

tent door lock activation, do not leave

children, people who require the as-

sistance of others or pets unattended

in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-

perature inside a closed vehicle on a

warm day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk of

injury or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ig-

nition switch is placed in the ON position, or

for a period of time after the ignition switch

is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s

or passenger’s door is opened during this

period of time, the power to the windows is

canceled.

Driver’s side power window

switches

1. Window lock button

2. Power door lock switch

3. Front passenger side switch

4. Right rear passenger side switch

5. Left rear passenger side switch

6. Driver side automatic switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped

with switches to open or close all of the

windows.

LIC3208

WINDOWS

2-66 Instruments and controls

To open a window, push the switch to the

first detent and continue to hold down until

the desired window position is reached. To

close a window, pull the switch to the first

detent and continue to hold up until the

desired window position is reached.

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock switch is depressed,

only the driver’s side window can be

opened or closed. Push it again to cancel

the window lock function.

Front passenger’s power window

switch

The passenger’s window switch operates

only the corresponding passenger’s win-

dow.To open the window partially, push the

switch down 䊊

1lightly until the desired

window position is reached. To close the

window partially, pull the switch up 䊊

2until

the desired window position is reached.

Rear power window switch

The rear power window switches open or

close only the corresponding windows. To

open the window, push the switch and hold

it down 䊊

1. To close the window, pull the

switch up 䊊

LIC2309 LIC2663

Instruments and controls 2-67

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with au-

tomatic operation, press the window

switch down to the second detent and re-

lease it; it need not be held. The window

automatically opens all the way. To stop

the window, lift the switch up while the win-

dow is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with au-

tomatic operation, pull the switch up to the

second detent and release it; it need not be

held. To stop the window, push the switch

down while the window is closing.

Auto-reverse function

The auto-reverse function can be acti-

vated when a window is closed by auto-

matic operation.

Depending on the environment or driv-

ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-

tion may be activated if an impact or

load similar to something being caught

in the window occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the

window.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, re-

placed, or jump started, the power window

auto-reverse function may not operate

properly. Have the power window auto-

reverse system re-initialized. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

If the control unit detects something

caught in a window equipped with auto-

matic operation as it is closing, the window

will be immediately lowered.

The moonroof will only operate when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

The moonroof is operational for a period of

time, even if the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position. If the driver’s door or the

front passenger’s door is opened during

this period of time, the power to the moon-

roof is canceled.

When operating the power moonroof or

panoramic sunshade, the switch need not

be held continuously. To stop the moon-

roof or sunshade at any point while it is

opening or closing, slide the switch mo-

mentarily.

LIC0410 LIC3477

POWER MOONROOF (if so equipped)

2-68 Instruments and controls

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open the moonroof, slide the switch

toward the OPEN 䊊

1position to the second

detent and release it. If the switch is slid to

the first detent and released while the sun-

shade is closed only the sunshade will

open.

To fully close the moonroof, slide the switch

toward the CLOSE 䊊

2position to the sec-

ond detent and release it. If the switch is

slid to the first detent and released, the

moonroof will close but the sunshade will

remain open.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt the moonroof up, push and release

the tilt switch 䊊

3. If the moonroof is open, it

will automatically close and then tilt up.

To tilt the moonroof down but keep the

sunshade open, push and release the tilt

switch 䊊

3or slide the switch toward the

CLOSE position 䊊

2to the first detent.

To tilt the moonroof down and close the

sunshade at the same time, slide the

switch toward the CLOSE position 䊊

2to the

second detent.

Auto-reverse function (when

closing or tilting down the

moonroof)

The auto-reverse function can be acti-

vated when the moonroof is closed or

tilted down by automatic operation when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition or for a period of time after the igni-

tion switch is placed in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driv-

ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-

tion may be activated if an impact or

load similar to something being caught

in the moonroof occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the

moonroof.

When closing

If the control unit detects something

caught in the moonroof as it moves to the

front, the moonroof will immediately open

backward.

When tilting down

If the control unit detects something

caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the

moonroof will immediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions

and repeats opening or tilting up the

moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down

switch within 5 seconds after it happens;

the moonroof will fully close gradually.

Make sure nothing is caught in the moon-

roof.

WARNING

∙ In an accident you could be thrown

from the vehicle through an open

moonroof. Always use seat belts and

child restraints.

∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out

of the moonroof opening while the

vehicle is in motion or while the

moonroof is closing.

Instruments and controls 2-69

CAUTION

∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or

sand from the moonroof before

opening.

∙ Do not place heavy objects on the

moonroof or surrounding area.

Panoramic sunshade

The panoramic sunshade operates when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

When opening or closing the sunshade the

switch need not be held.

To open the sunshade:

∙ To fully open the sunshade, slide the

switch 䊊

1toward the OPEN position to

the first detent.

∙ To fully open the sunshade and the

moonroof together, slide the switch 䊊

toward the OPEN position to the sec-

ond detent.

To close the sunshade:

∙ To fully close the sunshade, slide the

switch 䊊

2toward the CLOSE position to

the second detent. If the moonroof is

open, both the moonroof and the sun-

shade will close automatically.

∙ If the switch is slid 䊊

2toward the CLOSE

position to the first detent while the

moonroof is open, only the moonroof

will close. The sunshade will remain

open.

WARNING

∙ To avoid personal injury, keep your

hands, fingers and head away from

the sunshade arm, the arm rail and

sunshade inlet port.

∙ Do not allow children near the rear

sunshade system. They could be

injured.

∙ Do not place objects on or near the

rear sunshade. This could cause im-

proper operation or damage it.

∙ Do not pull or push the rear sunshade.

This could cause improper operation

or damage it.

CAUTION

∙ Do not place objects (such as newspa-

pers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the sun-

shade inlet port. Doing so may en-

tangle these objects in the sunshade

when it is extending or retracting,

causing improper operation or dam-

age to the sunshade.

∙ Do not push the sunshade arm with

your hands, etc., as this may deform it.

Improper operation or damage to the

sunshade may result.

∙ Do not put any object into the sun-

shade inlet port as this may result in

improper operation or damage the

sunshade.

∙ Do not hang any object on the arm rail

as this may result in improper opera-

tion or damage the sunshade.

∙ Do not forcefully pull the sunshade.

Doing so may elongate the sunshade.

Improper operation or damage to the

sunshade may result.

If the moonroof does not close

Have your moonroof checked and re-

paired. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-70 Instruments and controls

When the ON switch 䊊

1is pressed, the foot-

well lights (if so equipped), step lights (if so

equipped), map lights and rear personal

lights will automatically turn on and stay on

for a period of time when:

∙ The doors are unlocked by the Intelli-

gent Key, a key or the request switch (if

so equipped) while all doors are closed

and the ignition switch is in the OFF

position.

∙ When individually pushed.

When the OFF switch 䊊

2is pushed, the in-

terior lights do not illuminate even when

pushed. When the DOOR/OFF switch is

pressed and the ON switch is pressed, all of

the lights will come on.

NOTE:

The footwell lights and step lights illumi-

nate when the driver and passenger

doors are open regardless of the interior

light switch position. These lights will

turn off automatically after a period of

time while doors are open to prevent the

battery from becoming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

CONSOLE LIGHT

The console light will turn on whenever the

parking lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be ad-

justed with the illumination brightness

control.

LIC2302 LIC2303

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Instruments and controls 2-71

MAP LIGHTS

Press the button to turn the map lights on.

To turn them off, press the button again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped)

To turn the rear personal lights on, push the

switch. To turn them off, push the switch

again.

ROOM LIGHT (if so equipped)

The room light on the overhead trim has a

three-position switch. To operate, push the

switch to the desired position.

䊊

1ON: The light is illuminated, regardless

of door position.

䊊

2DOOR: The light illuminates when a

door or the liftgate is opened. The light

turns off when the door or liftgate is

closed.

䊊

3OFF: The light does not illuminate.

LIC2304

Rear personal lights

LIC1083 SIC2063A

2-72 Instruments and controls

The lights will turn off automatically after a

period of time while doors are open to pre-

vent the battery from becoming dis-

charged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

The light illuminates when the rear hatch is

opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the

light will turn off.

The light also illuminates with other interior

lights when the interior light switch is in the

DOOR position. For additional information,

refer to “Interior lights” in this section.

The lights will turn off automatically after a

period of time while doors are open to pre-

vent the battery from becoming dis-

charged.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver pro-

vides a convenient way to consolidate the

functions of up to three individual hand-

held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

∙ Will operate most radio frequency de-

vices such as garage doors, gates,

home and office lighting, entry door

locks and security systems.

∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the

vehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis-

connected, HomeLink® will retain all

programming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver is programmed, retain the original

transmitter for future programming pro-

cedures (Example: new vehicle pur-

chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the

programmed HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver buttons should be erased for

security purposes. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Programming

HomeLink®” in this section.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT (if

so equipped)

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-73

WARNING

∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and re-

verse features as required by federal

safety standards. (These standards

became effective for opener models

manufactured after April 1, 1982). A

garage door opener which cannot de-

tect an object in the path of a closing

garage door and then automatically

stop and reverse, does not meet cur-

rent federal safety standards. Using a

garage door opener without these

features increases the risk of serious

injury or death.

∙ During the programming procedure

your garage door or security gate will

open and close (if the transmitter is

within range). Make sure that people

or objects are clear of the garage door,

gate, etc. that you are programming.

∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be

turned off while programming the

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Do

not breathe exhaust gases; they con-

tain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-

gerous. It can cause unconsciousness

or death.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink®

buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion when programming HomeLink®. It is

also recommended that a new battery

be placed in the hand-held transmitter

of the device being programmed to

HomeLink® for quicker programming

and accurate transmission of the radio

frequency.

1. Position the end of your hand-held

transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from

the HomeLink® surface, keeping the

HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

1in view.

LIC2365

2-74 Instruments and controls

2. Using both hands, simultaneously

press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button and hand-held transmitter but-

ton. DO NOT release until the

HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

1flashes

slowly and then rapidly. When the indi-

cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons

may be released. (The rapid flashing

indicates successful programming.)

NOTE:

Some devices may require you to replace

Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted

in “Programming HomeLink® for Cana-

dian customers and gate openers” in this

section.

3. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink® button and observe the in-

dicator light.

∙ If the indicator light 䊊

1is

solid/continuous, programming is

complete and your device should

activate when the HomeLink® button

is pressed and released.

∙ If the indicator light 䊊

1blinks rapidly

for 2 seconds and then turns to a

solid/continuous light, continue

with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code de-

vice. A second person may make the

following steps easier. Use a ladder or

other device. Do not stand on your

vehicle to perform the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage

door opener motor in the garage, lo-

cate the “learn” or “smart” button (the

name and color of the button may vary

by manufacturer but it is usually lo-

cated near where the hanging an-

tenna wire is attached to the unit). If

there is difficulty locating the button,

reference the garage door opener’s

manual.

5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”

button.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press

and hold the trained HomeLink® but-

ton for 2 seconds and release. Repeat

the “press/hold/release” sequence up

to three times to complete the training

process. HomeLink® should now acti-

vate your rolling code equipped device.

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink®

buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site

at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515.

LIC2366

Instruments and controls 2-75

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE

OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)

after several seconds of transmission –

which may not be long enough for

HomeLink® to pick up the signal during

training. Similar to this Canadian law, some

U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim-

eout” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-

culties training a gate operator or garage

door opener by using the “Training” proce-

dures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”

Step 2 with the following:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door

opener, etc., unplug the device during

the “cycling” process to prevent possible

damage to the garage door opener com-

ponents.

1. For additional information, refer to “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” step 1 in this

section.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously

press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button and the hand-held transmitter

button. During training, your hand-held

transmitter may automatically stop

transmitting. Continue to press and

hold the desired HomeLink® button

while you press and re-press (“cycle”)

your hand-held transmitter every

2 seconds until the frequency signal

has been learned. The HomeLink® indi-

cator light will flash slowly and then

rapidly after several seconds upon

successful training. DO NOT release un-

til the HomeLink® indicator light flashes

slowly and then rapidly. When the indi-

cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons

may be released. The rapid flashing in-

dicates successful training.

Proceed with “Programming

HomeLink®” step 3 to complete.

If the device was unplugged during the

programming procedure, remember

to plug it back in when programming is

completed.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after it

is programmed, can be used to activate the

programmed device. To operate, simply

press and release the appropriate pro-

grammed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

button. The amber indicator light will illumi-

nate while the signal is being transmitted.

For convenience, the hand-held transmit-

ter of the device may also be used at any

time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-

DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the

hand-held transmitter information:

∙ replace the hand-held transmitter bat-

teries with new batteries.

∙ position the hand-held transmitter with

its battery area facing away from the

HomeLink® surface.

∙ press and hold both the HomeLink®

and hand-held transmitter buttons

without interruption.

∙ position the hand-held transmitter 1 -

3 in (26 - 76 mm) away from the

HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit-

ter in that position for up to 15 seconds.

If HomeLink® is not programmed within

that time, try holding the transmitter in

another position – keeping the indicator

light in view at all times.

2-76 Instruments and controls

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink®

buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

The following procedure clears the pro-

grammed information from both buttons.

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How-

ever, individual buttons can be repro-

grammed. For additional information, refer

to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink®

button” in this section.

To clear all programming:

1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink® buttons until the indicator

light begins to flash in approximately

10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than

20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the programming

mode and can be programmed at any

time beginning with “Programming

HomeLink®” - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINK® BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver button, complete the following:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash

after 20 seconds. Without releasing the

HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact

HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or

1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico).

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but-

ton has now been reprogrammed. The new

device can be activated by pressing the

HomeLink® button that was just pro-

grammed. This procedure will not affect any

other programmed HomeLink® buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change

the codes of any non-rolling code device

that has been programmed into

HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of

each device or call the manufacturer or

dealer of those devices for additional infor-

mation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni-

versal Transceiver with your new trans-

mitter information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

Instruments and controls 2-77

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys.............................................3-2

Remote keyless entry (if so equipped) ........3-2

NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) .......3-3

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

keys..........................................3-4

Doors ...........................................3-5

Locking with key..............................3-6

Locking with inside lock knob.................3-6

Locking with power door lock switch .........3-7

Automatic door locks.........................3-7

Child safety rear door lock ....................3-7

Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped) . . . 3-8

How to use remote keyless entry

system .......................................3-9

NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) ..........3-11

Operating range............................. 3-13

Door locks/unlocks precaution ..............3-13

NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation ...........3-14

How to use the remote keyless entry

function ..................................... 3-17

Warning signals .............................3-21

Troubleshooting guide ......................3-22

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ...........3-24

Remote Engine Start operating range .......3-24

Remote starting the vehicle .................3-25

Extending engine run time ..................3-25

Canceling a Remote Engine Start............3-26

Conditions the Remote Engine Start will

notwork ....................................3-26

Hood ...........................................3-27

Liftgate.........................................3-28

Operating the manual liftgate

(if so equipped) ..............................3-28

Operating the power liftgate

(if so equipped) ..............................3-29

Motion-Activated Liftgate

(if so equipped) ..............................3-32

Liftgate release..............................3-34

Liftgate position setting .....................3-35

Fuel-filler door ..................................3-36

Opener operation ...........................3-36

Fuel-filler cap ................................3-36

Steering wheel .................................3-38

Manual operation ...........................3-39

Sun visors......................................3-39

Vanity mirrors ...............................3-40

Card holder (driver’s side only) ...............3-40

Mirrors .........................................3-40

Manual anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ..............................3-40

Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ..............................3-41

Outside mirrors .............................3-43

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) .....3-44

Memory storage function ...................3-44

Entry/exit function ..........................3-45

System operation ...........................3-46

1. Jackknife type key

2. Integrated door lock key fob with

transponder chip

3. Key number plate

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (if so

equipped)

CAUTION

Do not leave the ignition key inside the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep it in

a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the

vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

duplicates by using the key number.

NISSAN does not record key numbers so it

is very important to keep track of your key

number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all your keys. If you still have a key,

it can be duplicated without knowing the

key number.

Storing remote keyless entry

To lock or unlock the vehicle using the key

press the release button 䊊

1to unfold the

keyfromthefob.

When storing the key press the release but-

ton 䊊

1and push key 䊊

2to fold the key back

into fob slot 䊊

Never leave keys in vehicle.

LPD2197 LPD2192

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. Intelligent Key (two sets)

2. Mechanical key

3. Key number plate (one plate)

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so

equipped)

Your vehicle can only be driven with the

Intelligent Keys which are registered to

your vehicle’s Intelligent Key System com-

ponents and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System components.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. The

new keys must be registered prior to use

with the Intelligent Key System and NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle.

Since the registration process requires

erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key

components when registering new keys,

be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you

have to the NISSAN dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep it in

a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the

vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

duplicates by using the key number.

NISSAN does not record key numbers so it

is very important to keep track of your key

number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all keys and do not have one to

duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can

be duplicated without knowing the key

number.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelli-

gent Key:

∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli-

gent Key.

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2279

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD2052

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely

dry.

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 60°C (140°F).

∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with

a key holder that contains a magnet.

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment

and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that

Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may

prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-

gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor-

mation regarding the erasing procedure, it

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer.

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechani-

cal key.

To remove the mechanical key, release the

lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it

into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob

returns to the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock

the driver’s door.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key in-

stalled in the Intelligent Key slot.

For additional information, refer to “Doors”

in this section.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the

keys which are registered to the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System components

in your vehicle.

A mechanical key can be used for all the

locks.

Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex-

isting key can be duplicated without know-

ing the key number. As many as four

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys

can be used with one vehicle. You should

bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem keys that you have to a NISSAN dealer

for registration. This is because the regis-

tration process will erase the memory of all

SPA1951

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

key codes previously registered into the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After

the registration process, these compo-

nents will only recognize keys coded into

the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

during registration. Any key that is not

given to the dealer at the time of registra-

tion will no longer be able to start your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer system

key, which contains an electrical tran-

sponder, to come into contact with wa-

ter or salt water. This could affect sys-

tem function.

When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the doors cannot be

opened using the inside or outside door

handles. The doors must be unlocked to

open the doors.

WARNING

∙ Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat

belts, this provides greater safety in

the event of an accident by helping to

prevent persons from being thrown

from the vehicle. This also helps keep

children and others from unintention-

ally opening the doors, and will help

keep out intruders.

∙ Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows and/or inad-

vertent door lock activation, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others and/or pets un-

attended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and/or pets.

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

LOCKING WITH KEY

To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as

shown.

Manual

To lock a door, turn the key toward the front

of the vehicle 䊊

1. To unlock, turn the key

toward the rear 䊊

Power (if so equipped)

The power door lock system allows you to

lock or unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front 䊊

1of the

vehicle locks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear

䊊

2of the vehicle unlocks that door. From

that position, returning the key to neutral

䊊

3(where the key can only be removed and

inserted) and turning it toward the rear

again 䊊

4within 5 seconds unlocks all

doors.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the

inside lock knob to the lock position 䊊

then close the door.

To unlock the door without the key, move

the inside lock knob to the unlock position

䊊

Driver’s side

LPD2129

Driver’s side

LPD0461

Inside lock

SPA2726

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the

door lock switch (driver’s or front passen-

ger’s side) to the lock position 䊊

1. When

locking the door this way, be certain not to

leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push

the door lock switch (driver’s or front pas-

senger’s side) to the unlock position 䊊

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch is moved

to the lock position with any door open and

the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle, all

doors will unlock automatically and a

chime will sound after the door is closed.

This function helps to prevent the Intelli-

gent Key from being accidentally locked

inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

∙ All doors lock automatically when the

vehicle speed reaches 15 mph

(24 km/h).

∙ All doors unlock automatically when the

transmission is placed in the P (Park)

position or when the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF position.

NOTE:

The automatic door unlock function can

be changed using “Vehicle Settings” of

the vehicle information display. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Vehicle in-

formation display” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locks help prevent the rear

doors from being opened accidentally, es-

pecially when small children are in the ve-

hicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on

the edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the LOCK position,

the door can be opened only from the

outside.

LPD2093 LPD2374

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ The remote keyless entry key fob

transmits radio waves when the but-

tons are pressed. The FAA advises ra-

dio waves may affect aircraft naviga-

tion and communication systems. Do

not operate the remote keyless entry

key fob while on an airplane. Make

sure the buttons are not operated un-

intentionally when the unit is stored

for a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn

the interior lights on, and activate the panic

alarm by using the key fob from outside the

vehicle.

Be sure to remove the key from the ve-

hicle before locking the doors.

The key fob can operate at a distance of

approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.

The effective distance depends on the

conditions around the vehicle.

As many as four key fobs can be used with

one vehicle. For information concerning

the purchase and use of additional key

fobs, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

The key fob will not function when:

∙ The battery is discharged.

∙ The distance between the vehicle and

the key fob is over 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm will not activate when

the key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the key fob:

∙ Do not allow the key fob, which con-

tains electrical components, to come

into contact with water or salt water.

This could affect the system function.

∙ Do not drop the key fob.

∙ Do not strike the key fob sharply

against another object.

∙ Do not change or modify the key fob.

∙ Wetting may damage the key fob. If

the key fob gets wet, immediately

wipe until it is completely dry.

∙ Do not place the key fob for an ex-

tended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

∙ Do not attach the key fob with a key

holder that contains a magnet.

∙ Do not place the key fob near equip-

ment that produces a magnetic field,

such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-

ommends erasing the ID code of that

key fob. This will prevent the key fob

from unauthorized use to unlock the

vehicle. For information regarding the

erasing procedure, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Remove the ignition key.

2. Close all the doors.

3. Press the button on the key fob.

∙ All the doors will lock.

∙ The hazard indicator flashes twice and

the horn beeps once.

NOTE:

An auto-relock function will operate af-

ter a full or partial unlock, when no fur-

ther user action occurs. The relock will

operate approximately one minute after

full or partial unlock. The auto-relock

function is canceled when any door is

opened or the key is inserted into the

ignition.

Unlocking doors

∙ Press the button on the key fob to

unlock the driver’s door.

∙ The hazard indicator lights flash once.

∙ Press the button again within five

seconds to unlock all doors.

LPD2193 LPD2194

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-

ened, you may activate the panic alarm to

call attention by pressing and holding

the button on the key fob for longer

than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm will stay on for a period of

time.

The panic alarm stops when:

∙ It has run for a period of time.

∙ Any button is pressed on the key fob.

Using the interior lights

Press the button on the key fob once

to turn on the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior

lights” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

Answer back horn feature

If desired, the answer back horn feature

can be deactivated using the key fob.When

deactivated and the button is

pressed the hazard indicator flashes twice

and when the button is pressed, nei-

ther the hazard indicator nor the horn op-

erates.

LPD2195 LPD2196

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

If you change the answer back horn and

light flash feature with the key fob, the

vehicle information display screen will

show the current mode after the ignition

switch has been cycled from the OFF to

the ON position. The vehicle information

display screen can also be used to

change the answer back horn mode.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least two sec-

onds.

The hazard indicator lights will flash three

times to confirm that the answer back

horn feature has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least two sec-

onds once more.

The hazard indicator lights will flash once

and the horn will sound once to confirm

that the horn beep feature has been reac-

tivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does

not silence the horn if the alarm is trig-

gered.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pressed.

The FAA advises the radio waves may

affect aircraft navigation and com-

munication systems. Do not operate

the Intelligent Key while on an air-

plane. Make sure the buttons are not

operated unintentionally when the

unit is stored for a flight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all

the door locks using the remote control

function or pushing the request switch on

the vehicle without taking the key out from

a pocket or purse. The operating environ-

ment and/or conditions may affect the In-

telligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using

the Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

∙ Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when operating the vehicle.

∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicat-

ing with the vehicle as it receives radio

waves. The Intelligent Key system trans-

mits weak radio waves. Environmental

conditions may interfere with the opera-

tion of the Intelligent Key system under the

following operating conditions:

∙ When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted,

such as a TV tower, power station and

broadcasting station.

∙ When in possession of wireless equip-

ment, such as a cellular telephone,

transceiver, or a CB radio.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact

with or covered by metallic materials.

∙ When any type of radio wave remote

control is used nearby.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so

equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near

an electric appliance such as a personal

computer.

∙ When the vehicle is parked near a park-

ing meter.

In such cases, correct the operating condi-

tions before using the Intelligent Key func-

tion or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies de-

pending on the operating conditions, the

battery’s life is approximately two years. If

the battery is discharged, replace it with a

new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an

indicator illuminates in the vehicle informa-

tion display. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously re-

ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near

equipment which transmits strong radio

waves, such as signals from a TV and per-

sonal computer, the battery life may be-

come shorter.

For additional information, refer to “Battery

replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. For

information about the purchase and use of

additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelli-

gent Key:

∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli-

gent Key.

∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely

dry.

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with

a key holder that contains a magnet.

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment

and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that

Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may

prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-

gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor-

mation regarding the erasing procedure, it

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range from the request

switch 䊊

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or strong radio waves are present

near the operating location, the Intelligent

Key operating range becomes narrower,

and the Intelligent Key may not function

properly.

The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm)

from each request switch 䊊

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door

glass, handle or rear bumper, the request

switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the oper-

ating range, it is possible for anyone, even

someone who does not carry the Intelli-

gent Key, to push the request switch to

lock/unlock the doors.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS

PRECAUTION

∙ Do not push the door handle request

switch with the Intelligent Key held in

your hand as illustrated. The close dis-

tance to the door handle will cause the

Intelligent Key system to have difficulty

recognizing that the Intelligent Key is

outside the vehicle.

∙ After locking with the door handle re-

quest switch, verify the doors are se-

curely locked by testing them.

LPD2653 LPD2554

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from be-

ing left inside the vehicle, make sure you

carry the Intelligent Key with you and

then lock the doors.

∙ Do not pull the door handle before

pushing the door handle request

switch. The door will be unlocked but

will not open. Release the door handle

once and pull it again to open the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without

taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket

or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,

you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing

the door handle request switch within the

range of operation.

Locking doors

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion, place the ignition switch in the

LOCK position and make sure you carry

the Intelligent Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch

while carrying the Intelligent Key with

you.

4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.

LPD2181 LPD2509

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice

and the outside buzzer sounds twice,

unless the answer back feature is de-

activated, then only the hazard lights

will flash. For additional information, re-

fer to “Answer back horn feature” in this

section.

NOTE:

∙Request switches for all doors and

the liftgate can be deactivated when

the I-Key Door Lock setting is turned

off in the Vehicle Settings of the ve-

hicle information display. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this

manual.

∙Doors lock with the door handle re-

quest switch while the ignition switch

is not in the LOCK position.

∙Doors do not lock by pushing the door

handle request switch while any door

is open. However, doors lock with the

mechanical key even if any door is

open.

∙Doors do not lock with the door

handle request switch with the Intel-

ligent Key inside the vehicle and a

beep sounds to warn you. However,

when an Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle, doors can be locked with an-

other Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

∙ After locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure that the

doors have been securely locked by

operating the door handles or the rear

liftgate opener switch.

∙ When locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure to have the

Intelligent Key in your possession be-

fore operating the request switch to

prevent the Intelligent Key from being

left in the vehicle.

∙ The request switch is operational only

when the Intelligent Key has been de-

tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being

accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout

protection is equipped with the Intelligent

Key system.

When the driver’s side door is open, the

doors are locked, and then the Intelligent

Key is put inside the vehicle and all the

doors are closed; the lock will automati-

cally unlock and the door buzzer sounds.

LPD2183

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-

gent Key is in the same hand that is op-

erating the request switch to lock the

door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse,

pocket or your other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not func-

tion under the following conditions:

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the instrument panel.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the glove box or a storage bin.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the door pockets.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side or near metallic materials.

Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch.

3. The hazard warning lights flash once

and the outside buzzer sounds once,

unless the answer back feature is de-

activated, then only the hazard lights

will flash. For additional information, re-

fer to “Answer back horn feature” in this

section.

4. Push the door handle request switch

again within one minute to unlock all

doors.

For power liftgate opening:

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the power liftgate request switch

(if so equipped).

LPD2509 LPD2183

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

Request switches for all doors and lift-

gate can be deactivated when the I-Key

Door Lock setting is turned off in the Ve-

hicle Settings of the vehicle information

display. For additional information, refer

to “Vehicle information display” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking

the doors, that door may not be unlocked.

Returning the door handle to its original

position will unlock the door. If the door

does not unlock after returning the door

handle, push the door handle request

switch to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically un-

less one of the following operations is per-

formed within one minute after pushing

the request switch.

∙ Opening any door.

∙ Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for a pe-

riod of time when a door is unlocked and

the room light switch is in the DOOR posi-

tion.

The interior light can be turned off without

waiting by performing one of the following

operations:

∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition.

∙ Locking the doors with the remote con-

trol.

∙ Switching the room light switch to the

OFF position.

∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the

OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the

vehicle information display. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle in-

formation display” in the “Instruments

and controls” section.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE

KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can op-

erate all door locks using the remote key-

less function of the Intelligent Key. The re-

mote keyless function can operate at a

distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the ve-

hicle. The operating distance depends

upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not

function under the following conditions:

∙ When the Intelligent Key is not within the

operational range.

∙ When the doors or the rear liftgate are

open or not closed securely.

∙ When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intel-

ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in

the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the button on the Intelli-

gent Key.

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice

and the horn beeps once, unless the

answer back feature is deactivated,

then only the hazard lights will flash.

For additional information, refer to “An-

swer back horn feature” in this section.

5. All doors will be locked.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intel-

ligent Key, be sure that the doors have

been securely locked by operating the

door handles.

Unlocking doors

1. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key.

2. The driver’s door will unlock and the

hazard indicator lights flash once.

3. Press the button again within five

seconds, the hazard indicator lights

flash once and the remaining doors

unlock.

LPD2257 LPD2258

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

The unlocking operation can be changed

in Selective Unlock in the Vehicle Set-

tings of the vehicle information display.

For additional information, refer to “Ve-

hicle information display” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this

manual.

All doors will be locked automatically un-

less one of the following operations is per-

formed within one minute after pressing

the button:

∙ Opening any doors.

∙ Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light illuminates for a period of

time when a door is unlocked and the

room light switch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting

by performing one of the following opera-

tions:

∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition.

∙ Locking the doors with the Intelligent

Key.

∙ Switching the room light switch to the

OFF position.

∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the

OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the

vehicle information display. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle in-

formation display” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

Releasing the rear liftgate (if so

equipped)

The rear liftgate can be opened and closed

by performing the following:

∙ Press the button (if so equipped)

for longer than 0.5 seconds to open the

rear liftgate.

∙ Press the button (if so equipped)

again for longer than 0.5 seconds to

close the rear liftgate.

WPD0414

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

When the button (if so equipped) is

pressed during the open or close process

the liftgate will stop. When pressed again,

the liftgate will reverse and go in the oppo-

site direction.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-

ened, you may activate the panic alarm to

call attention by pressing and holding

the button on the Intelligent Key for

longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on

for a period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

∙ It has run for a period of time, or

∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent

Key.

∙ The request switch on the driver or pas-

senger door is pushed and the Intelli-

gent Key is in range of the door handle.

Using the interior lights

Press the button on the key fob once

to turn on the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior

lights” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

WPD0415

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Answer back horn feature

If desired, the answer back horn feature

can be deactivated using the Intelligent

Key. When it is deactivated and the

button is pressed, the hazard indicator

lights flash twice. When the button is

pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights

nor the horn operates.

NOTE:

If you change the answer back horn and

light flash feature with the Intelligent

Key, the vehicle information display

screen will show the current mode after

the ignition switch has been cycled from

the OFF to the ON position. The vehicle

information display screen can also be

used to change the answer back horn

mode.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard indicator lights will flash three

times to confirm that the answer back

horn feature has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds

once more.

The hazard indicator lights will flash once

and the horn will sound once to confirm

that the horn beep feature has been reac-

tivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does

not silence the horn if the alarm is trig-

gered.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly by erroneous operation of

the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the

vehicle from being stolen, a chime or

buzzer sounds from inside and outside the

vehicle and a warning is displayed in the

instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning

is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle

and the Intelligent Key.

For additional information, refer to the

“Troubleshooting guide” in this section and

“Vehicle information display” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

LPD2259

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that

are programmed for the vehicle. If another

Intelligent Key is in range or inside the ve-

hicle, the vehicle system may respond dif-

ferently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When stopping the engine

The red Shift to Park warning appears

on the display and the inside warning

chime sounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

When shifting the shift lever to the P

(Park) position

The Push ignition to OFF warning ap-

pears on the display.

The ignition switch is in the ON

position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

When opening the driver’s door to get

out of the vehicle

The Door Open warning appears on

the display.

The ignition switch is in the ON

position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

When closing the door after getting

out of the vehicle

The No Key Detected warning appears

on the display, the outside chime

sounds three times and the inside

warning chime sounds for approxi-

mately three seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ON

position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The red Shift to Park warning appears

on the display and the inside side

chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion and the shift lever is not in the P

(Park) position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-

sition and place the ignition switch in

the OFF position.

When closing the door with the inside

lock knob turned to the locked

position.

The outside chime sounds for approxi-

mately three seconds and all the

doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle re-

quest switch or the button on

the Intelligent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approxi-

mately three seconds. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch to

start the engine

The Intelligent Key battery indicator

appears on the display. The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one.

For additional information, refer to

“Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

The yellow Key ID Incorrect warning

appears on the display. The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the ignition switch The Key System Error warning ap-

pears on the display.

It warns of a malfunction with the In-

telligent Key system.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

The button will be on the NISSAN In-

telligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote En-

gine Start. This feature allows the engine to

start from outside the vehicle.

The following features may be affected

when Remote Engine Start is used:

∙ Vehicles with a manual climate control

system will default to the last used

heating or cooling mode.

∙ Vehicles with an automatic climate

control system may default to either

heating or cooling mode, depending on

outside and cabin temperatures. For

additional information, refer to “Remote

Engine Start Intelligent Climate Control”

in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone

and voice recognition systems” section

of this manual.

Laws in some local communities may re-

strict the use of remote starters. For ex-

ample, some laws require a person using

Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in

view. Check local regulations for any re-

quirements.

Other conditions may affect the function of

the Remote Engine Start feature. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Conditions the

Remote Engine Start will not work” in this

section.

Other conditions can affect the perfor-

mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in this section.

REMOTE ENGINE START

OPERATING RANGE

WARNING

To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and or its systems, including en-

trapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the assistance

of others or pets unattended in your ve-

hicle. Additionally, the temperature in-

side a closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to cause a

significant risk of injury or death to

people and pets.

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2293

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD2272

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so

equipped)

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or other strong radio wave

sources are present near the operating

location, the Intelligent Key operating

range becomes narrower, and the Intel-

ligent Key may not function properly.

The Remote Engine Start function can only

be used when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range from the vehicle.

The Remote Engine Start operating range

is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the ve-

hicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE

To use the remote engine start feature to start

the engine system perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the button to lock all

doors.

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold

the button until the turn signal

lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If

the vehicle is not within view press and

hold the button for at least 2 sec-

onds.

The following events will occur when the

engine starts:

∙ The parking lights will turn on and re-

main on as long as the engine is run-

ning.

∙ The doors will be locked and the climate

control system may come on.

∙ The engine will continue to run for

10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend

the time for an additional 10 minutes.

For additional information, refer to “Ex-

tending engine run time” in this section.

Depress and hold the brake then push the

push-button ignition switch to the ON po-

sition before driving. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME

The Remote Engine Start feature can be

extended one time by performing the

steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle”

in this section. Run time will be calculated

as follows:

∙ The first 10 minute run time will start

when the Remote Engine Start function

is performed.

∙ The second 10 minutes will start imme-

diately when the Remote Engine Start

function is performed again. For ex-

ample, if the engine has been running

for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are

added, the engine will run for a total of

15 minutes.

∙ Extending engine run time will count to-

wards the two Remote Engine Start

limit.

A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts,

or a single Remote Engine Start with an

extension, are allowed between ignition

cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled

to the ON position and then back to the

OFF position before the Remote Engine

Start procedure can be used again.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE

START

To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform

one of the following:

∙ Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle

and press until the parking lights

turn off.

∙ Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

∙ Cycle the ignition switch ON and then

OFF.

∙ The extended engine run time has ex-

pired.

∙ The first 10 minute timer has expired.

∙ The engine hood has been opened.

∙ The shift lever is moved out of park.

∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry

into the vehicle.

∙ The ignition switch is pushed without

an Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

∙ The ignition switch is pushed with an

Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the

brake pedal is not depressed.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE

START WILL NOT WORK

The Remote Engine Start will not operate if

any of the following conditions are present:

∙ “Remote Start” is turned off in “Vehicle

Settings” of the vehicle information dis-

play.

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

∙ The hood is not securely closed.

∙ The hazard warning lights are on.

∙ The engine is still running. The engine

must be completely stopped. Wait at

least 6 seconds if the engine goes from

running to off. This is not applicable

when extending engine run time.

∙ The button is not pressed and

held for at least 2 seconds.

∙ The button is not pressed and

held within 5 seconds of pressing the

lock button.

∙ The brake is pressed.

∙ The doors are not closed and locked.

∙ The liftgate is open.

∙ The Intelligent Key warning message

appears in the vehicle information dis-

play.

∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry

into the vehicle.

∙ Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single

Remote Engine Start with an extension,

have already been used.

∙ The vehicle is not in P (Park).

∙ There is a detected registered key al-

ready inside of the vehicle.

∙ The Remote Engine Start function has

been switched to the OFF position in

Vehicle Settings of the vehicle informa-

tion display. For additional information,

refer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

The Remote Engine Start may display a

warning or indicator in the vehicle informa-

tion display. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊

located below the instrument panel

until the hood springs up slightly.

2. Locate the lever 䊊

2in between the

hood and grille and push the lever side-

ways with your fingertips.

3. Raise the hood 䊊

4. Remove the support rod 䊊

4and insert

it into the slot 䊊

Hold the coated parts 䊊

Awhen removing

or resetting the support rod. Avoid direct

contact with the metal parts, as they

may be hot immediately after the engine

has been stopped.

When closing the hood, return the support

rod to its original position, lower the hood

to approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the

latch and release it. This allows proper en-

gagement of the hood latch.

WARNING

∙ Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.

Failure to do so could cause the hood

to fly open and result in an accident.

∙ If you see steam or smoke coming

from the engine compartment, to

avoid injury do not open the hood.

LPD2679

HOOD

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

WARNING

∙ Always be sure the liftgate has been

closed securely to prevent it from

opening while driving.

∙ Do not drive with the liftgate open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For

additional information, refer to “Ex-

haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadver-

tent door lock activation, do not leave

children, people who require the as-

sistance of others or pets unattended

in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-

perature inside a closed vehicle on a

warm day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk of

injury or death to people and pets.

∙ Always be sure that hands and feet

are clear of the door frame to avoid

injury while closing the liftgate.

CAUTION

Do not use accessory carriers that at-

tach to the hatch. Doing so will cause

damage to the vehicle.

OPERATING THE MANUAL

LIFTGATE (if so equipped)

The power door lock system allows you to

lock or unlock all doors including the lift-

gate simultaneously.

To open the liftgate, push the liftgate

opener switch 䊊

Aand pull up on the

handle.

To close, lower and push the liftgate down

securely.

LPD2655

LIFTGATE

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE

(if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-

fore closing the liftgate.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadver-

tent door lock activation, do not leave

children, people who require the as-

sistance of others or pets unattended

in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-

perature inside a closed vehicle on a

warm day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk of

injury or death to people and pets.

NOTE:

To open, close or reverse the power lift-

gate, the shift lever must be in P (Park).

Also, the power liftgate will not operate if

battery voltage is low.

Power Open:

The power liftgate automatically moves

from the fully closed position to the fully

open position in approximately five – eight

seconds. The power open feature can be

activated by the button on the key fob, the

instrument panel switch or the liftgate

open switch. A chime sounds to indicate

the power open sequence has been

started.

Instrument panel switch

LPD2212

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

∙ When the vehicle is locked, the liftgate

can be opened with the instrument

panel switch or key fob.

∙ The key fob button must be held for

0.5 second before the liftgate opens.

∙ The liftgate must be unlocked (or the

key fob must be within range) to open

with the liftgate open switch 䊊

∙ The liftgate open switch 䊊

Acan only be

used to open the liftgate if the MAIN

switch (located in Instrument Panel) is

in the ON position.

A warning chime will sound if the shift lever

is moved out of P (Park) during a power

open operation.

Power Close:

The power liftgate automatically moves

from the fully open position to the second-

ary position. When the liftgate reaches the

secondary position, the cinching motor en-

gages and pulls the liftgate to its primary

latch position. Power close takes approxi-

mately seven – ten seconds. The power

close feature can be activated by the but-

ton on the key fob, the instrument panel

switch or the liftgate close switch 䊊

B.A

chime sounds to indicate the power close

sequence has been started.

Liftgate opener switch

LPD2656 LPD2270

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ If the liftgate open switch 䊊

Ais acti-

vated while the cinching motor is en-

gaged, the cinching motor will disen-

gage and release the latch.

∙ The key fob button must be held for

0.5 second before the liftgate closes.

∙ The liftgate close switch 䊊

Bcan only be

used to close the liftgate if the power

liftgate main switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

Stop - Reverse:

During the open/close movement, the lift-

gate can be stopped, if the Intelligent Key,

instrument panel or liftgate switch (䊊

Aor

䊊

B) is pressed. The liftgate can be reversed

in the Intelligent Key, instrument panel or

liftgate switch (䊊

Aor 䊊

B) is pressed again.

Auto Reverse:

If an obstacle is detected during power

open or power close, a warning chime will

sound and the liftgate will reverse direction

and return to the full open or full close po-

sition. If a second obstacle is detected, the

liftgate motion will stop and the liftgate will

enter manual mode.

A pinch strip is mounted on each side of

the liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a

pinch strip during power close, the liftgate

will reverse direction and return to the full

open position.

NOTE:

If the pinch strip is damaged or removed,

the power close function will not oper-

ate.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the

liftgate.

Manual Mode:

If power operation is not available, the lift-

gate may be operated manually. Power op-

eration may not be available even if the

power liftgate main switch is in the ON po-

sition under the following conditions:

∙ Multiple obstacles have been detected

in a single power cycle

∙ Battery voltage is low

If the power liftgate open switch 䊊

Ais

pushed during power open or close, the

power operation will be canceled and the

liftgate can be operated manually.

LPD2655

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

To open the liftgate manually, push the lift-

gate open switch 䊊

Aand raise the liftgate.

To close, lower and push the liftgate down

securely.

MOTION-ACTIVATED LIFTGATE (if

so equipped)

The liftgate can be opened/closed using a

foot kicking motion when it is locked or

unlocked. Two sensors along the rear

bumper (center area) can detect a forward

kicking motion 䊊

B. The Intelligent Key must

be present within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate to

allow using the motion-activated feature

to open/close the liftgate.

NOTE:

Tow hitches are available as an acces-

sory for this vehicle. If a tow hitch is in-

stalled, the liftgate electronic control

unit (ECU) needs to be replaced with an

ECU programmed with towing logic for

the Motion-Activated Liftgate to func-

tion properly.

LPD2657

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

To achieve proper motion activation,

kick within the kicking zone 䊊

A2ft

(60 cm). Improper kicking either from

side to side 䊊

Cor at angles 䊊

Dwill not

open/close the liftgate.

CAUTION

Before performing the kicking motion,

steady your stance to prevent any loss

of balance. Also, while making the kick-

ing motion, take caution around hot ex-

haust system parts. Otherwise, there

may be danger of injury.

While positioned at the rear of the vehicle

(center) at arms’ length distance away, be-

gin making the forward kicking motion.

Kick the foot under the rear bumper then

immediately return the foot back to stand-

ing position. The kicking motion should be

straight, smooth and consistent. Your leg

does not need to touch the bumper sur-

face but be within 3/4 inch (2 cm) to

4 inches (10 cm) of the bumper surface.

After your kick motion is completed step

back to allow the liftgate to open/close.

The liftgate should begin moving within

1–2 seconds after the kick. This time is

needed to verify the Intelligent Key and to

Example of a proper kick

LPD2484

Proper kicking zone and method

LPD2485

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

validate the kick motion. Kicking again

within this time frame (1–2 seconds) could

cause the liftgate to reverse or stop.

WARNING

Prevent unintentional liftgate

opening/closing. There may be condi-

tions when opening/closing the liftgate

is not desired. Keep the Intelligent Key

out of the range of the liftgate (3 ft or

1 m), when washing or working around

the back of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Interference or malfunction can be

caused by parking in close proximity to

radio or satellite towers.

LIFTGATE RELEASE

WARNING

∙ Always be sure the liftgate has been

closed securely to prevent it from

opening while driving.

∙ Do not drive with the liftgate open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For

additional information, refer to “Ex-

haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

∙ To avoid personal injury, do not at-

tempt to activate the power liftgate if

one or both of the liftgate struts are

removed.

CAUTION

∙ If the power liftgate does not stay

open or if the liftgate unexpectedly

closes at any time while a continuous

warning chime sounds, do not oper-

ate the liftgate. There may be a pres-

sure loss in one or both of the liftgate

struts. It is recommended that you

have the liftgate inspected. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ Do not activate the power liftgate if

one or both of the liftgate struts are

removed. Damage to the liftgate or

power liftgate mechanisms may

occur.

∙ Keep the power liftgate main switch

(if so equipped) in the OFF position

when washing or working around the

back of the vehicle (with Intelligent

Key) to prevent inadvertent

opening/closing.

Improper kicking methods

LPD2486

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Liftgate release (manual and

power)

The liftgate release mechanism allows the

liftgate to be opened in the event of a dis-

charged battery.

To release the liftgate from the inside of the

vehicle, perform the following operations:

1. Fold the rear seats down. For additional

information, refer to “Folding the 3rd

row seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual.

2. Insert a suitable tool in the top access

opening hole. Move the release lever to

the right. The liftgate will be unlatched.

3. Push the liftgate up to open.

NOTE:

If you had to open the liftgate using this

lever, it is recommended that you have

your vehicle checked as soon as pos-

sible. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING

The liftgate can be set to open to a specific

height by performing the following:

1. Open the liftgate using the request

switch or the Intelligent Key.

2. Pull the liftgate down to the desired

position and hold the liftgate (the lift-

gate will have some resistance when

being manually adjusted).

3. While holding the liftgate in position,

push and hold the liftgate switch

located on the liftgate for approxi-

mately 5 seconds or until three beeps

are heard.

The liftgate will open to the selected posi-

tion setting. To change the position of the

liftgate, repeat Steps 1-3 for setting the po-

sition of the liftgate.

LPD2375

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

OPENER OPERATION

The fuel-filler door opener switch is located

on the instrument panel. To open, push the

fuel-filler opener switch.

To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seri-

ously injured if it is misused or mis-

handled. Always stop the engine and

do not smoke or allow open flames or

sparks near the vehicle when

refueling.

∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off

automatically. Continued refueling

may cause fuel overflow, resulting in

fuel spray and possibly a fire.

∙ Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has

a built-in safety valve needed for

proper operation of the fuel system

and emission control system. An in-

correct cap can result in a serious mal-

function and possible injury. It could

also cause the Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL) to come on.

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body

to attempt to start your vehicle.

∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable

fuel containers:

– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are

filling it.

– Use only approved portable fuel

containers for flammable liquid.

LPD2283

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For

additional information, refer to “Fuel

recommendation” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of

this manual.

∙ The Loose Fuel Cap warning message

will be displayed/warning will appear

if the fuel-filler cap is not properly

tightened. It may take a few driving

trips for the message to be displayed.

Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly after the Loose Fuel Cap

warning message is

displayed/warning appears may

cause the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) to illuminate.

∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light does

not turn off after a few driving trips,

have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock-

wise to remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder

䊊

1while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the

fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a

single click is heard.

LPD2186

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37

Loose Fuel Cap warning

The Loose Fuel Cap warning message ap-

pears in the vehicle information display

when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened

correctly after the vehicle has been refu-

eled. It may take a few driving trips for the

message to be displayed. To turn off the

warning message, perform the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as

soon as possible. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in this

section.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until a single

click is heard.

3. Press the OK button 䊊

Aon the steering

wheel for about one second to turn off

the Loose Fuel Cap warning message

䊊

Bafter tightening the fuel-filler cap.

WARNING

∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for

proper steering operation and com-

fort. The driver’s air bag inflates with

great force. If you are unrestrained,

leaning forward, sitting sideways or

out of position in any way, you are at

greater risk of injury or death in a

crash. You may also receive serious or

fatal injuries from the air bag if you

are up against it when it inflates. Al-

ways sit back against the seatback

and as far away as practical from the

steering wheel. Always use the seat

belts.

LPD2659

STEERING WHEEL

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MANUAL OPERATION

Tilt and telescopic operation

Pull the lock lever 䊊

1down:

∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down in

direction 䊊

2to the desired position.

∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward or

backward in direction 䊊

3to the desired

position.

Push the lock lever 䊊

1up firmly to lock the

steering wheel in place.

1. To block glare from the front, swing

down the sun visor 䊊

2. To block glare from the side, remove

the sun visor from the center mount

and swing the visor to the side 䊊

3. To extend the sun visor, slide 䊊

3in or

out as needed.

CAUTION

∙ Do not store the sun visor before re-

turning the extension to its original

position.

∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor

forcedly downward.

LPD2648

WPD0344

SUN VISORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39

VANITY MIRRORS

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun

visor down and flip open the mirror cover.

Some vanity mirrors will illuminate when

the mirror cover is open.

CARD HOLDER (driver’s side only)

To access the card holder, slide card in the

card holder. Do not view information while

operating the vehicle.

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW

MIRROR (if so equipped)

Use the night position 䊊

1to reduce glare

from the headlights of vehicles behind you

at night.

Use the day position 䊊

2when driving in

daylight hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view

clarity.

LPD2067 LPD2598 WPD0126

MIRRORS

3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it au-

tomatically dims during night time condi-

tions and according to the intensity of the

headlights of the vehicle following you. The

automatic anti-glare feature is activated

when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

The indicator light 䊊

2will illuminate when

the automatic anti-glare feature is operat-

ing.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sen-

sors 䊊

1or apply glass cleaner to the sen-

sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity

of the sensors, resulting in improper op-

eration.

The indicator light will illuminate when the

automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

press the button as described:

∙ To turn off the anti-glare feature, press

the button. The indicator light will

turn off.

∙ To turn on the anti-glare feature, press

the button again. The indicator

light will turn on.

The indicator light 䊊

2will illuminate when

the automatic anti-glare feature is operat-

ing.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature,

press the O button. The indicator light

will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature,

press the | button again. The indicator

light will turn on.

For information on HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver operation, refer to “HomeLink®

Universal Transceiver” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

Type A (if so equipped)

WPD0446

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD0469

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-41

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sen-

sors 䊊

1or apply glass cleaner to the sen-

sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity

of the sensors, resulting in improper op-

eration.

The indicator light 䊊

2will illuminate when

the automatic anti-glare feature is operat-

ing.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature,

press the button. The indicator light

will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature,

press the button again. The indicator

light will turn on.

To turn off the compass feature, press

the button. The compass will turn off.

To turn on the compass feature, press

the button again. The compass 䊊

will display.

For additional information on HomeLink®

Universal Transceiver operation, refer to

“HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

NOTE:

For additional information about the

compass 䊊

3and compass features, refer

to “Compass display” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this

manual.

Type C (if so equipped)

LPD2660

3-42 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror remote control will op-

erate only when the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

Move the small switch 䊊

1to select the left

or right mirror. Adjust each mirror to the

desired position using the large switch 䊊

Move the switch 䊊

1to the center (neutral)

position to prevent accidentally moving

the mirror.

WARNING

∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror

on the passenger side are closer than

they appear. Be careful when moving

to the right. Using only this mirror

could cause an accident. Use the in-

side mirror or glance over your shoul-

der to properly judge distances to

other objects.

∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-

ing. You could lose control of your ve-

hicle and cause an accident.

Manual folding outside mirrors

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to

fold it.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if so

equipped)

The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both

outside mirror surfaces downward to pro-

vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle

when the mirror control switch is in either

the L or R position.

The mirrors automatically return to their

original position when you shift out of R

(Reverse).

LPD2452 LPD2084

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-43

The outside mirror surfaces will return to

their original position when one of the fol-

lowing conditions has occurred:

∙ The shift lever is moved to any position

other than R (Reverse).

∙ The outside mirror control switch is set

to the neutral or center position.

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

NOTE:

If the outside mirror control switch is in

the “center” position, the mirror surface

will NOT turn downward when the shift

lever is moved to R (Reverse).

For additional information, refer to “Auto-

matic drive positioner” in this section.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

Some outside mirrors can be heated to

defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved vis-

ibility. For additional information, refer to

“Rear window and outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

The automatic drive positioner system has

two features:

∙ Memory storage function

∙ Entry/exit function

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat and out-

side mirrors can be stored in the automatic

drive positioner memory. Follow these pro-

cedures to use the memory system.

1. Place the ignition in the ON or OFF po-

sition (the vehicle should be stopped

while setting the memory).

LPD2531

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so

equipped)

3-44 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

2. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside

mirrors to the desired positions by

manually operating each adjusting

switch. For additional information, refer

to “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual and “Out-

side mirrors” in this section.

3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-

onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2).

4. The indicator light for the pushed

memory switch will come on and stay

on for approximately 5 seconds.

5. The chime will sound if the memory

has been stored.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is stored in the

same memory switch, the previous

memory position will be overwritten by

the new stored position.

Confirming memory storage

Push the SET switch.

∙ If a memory position has not been

stored in the switch (1 or 2) the indicator

light for the respective switch will come

ON for approximately 0.5 seconds.

∙ If a memory position has been stored in

the switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light

for the respective switch will stay ON for

approximately 5 seconds.

Linking a key fob to a stored

memory position

Each key fob can be linked to a stored

memory position (memory switch 1 or 2)

with the following procedure.

1. Follow steps 1-3 in the “Memory storage

function” section for storing the

memory position.

2. The indicator light for the pushed

memory switch will come on. While the

indicator light is on for 5 seconds, press

the button on the key fob. The

indicator light of the linked memory

switch will blink. After the indicator light

goes off, the key fob is linked to that

memory setting.

Once it is linked, when ignition switch is

placed in the OFF position, pressing

the button on the key fob will move

the driver’s seat and outside mirrors to the

linked memory switch position.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is stored in the

linked memory switch, then the key fob

will link the new position and overwrites

the previous position.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s

seat will automatically move when the shift

lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows

the driver to get into and out of the driver’s

seat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward:

∙ When the driver’s door is opened with

the ignition switch placed in the OFF

position.

∙ When the ignition switch is changed

from ON to OFF with the driver’s door

open.

The driver’s seat will return to the previous

position:

∙ When the ignition switch is turned to ON

while the shift lever is in the P (Park)

position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-45

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or

canceled through “Vehicle Settings” in the

vehicle information display by performing

the following:

∙ Switch the “Exit Seat Slide” from ON to

OFF. For additional information, refer to

“Vehicle Settings” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will

not work or will stop operating under the

following conditions:

∙ When the vehicle speed is above 0 mph

(0 km/h) or 4 mph (7km/h) for some

limited functions such as linking a key

fob to the meter when the power

source is turned on from off or during

the exit function.

∙ When any of the memory switches are

pushed while the automatic drive posi-

tioner is operating.

∙ When the adjusting switch for the driv-

er’s seat and steering column is turned

on while the automatic drive positioner

is operating.

∙ When the seat has already been moved

to the memorized position.

∙ When no seat position is stored in the

memory switch.

∙ When the shift lever is moved from P

(Park) to any other position.

3-46 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and

voice recognition systems

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual................4-2

RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ...............4-3

RearView Monitor system operation ..........4-4

How to read the displayed lines...............4-5

Difference between predicted and

actual distances..............................4-5

How to park with predicted course

lines ..........................................4-7

Adjusting the screen .........................4-8

How to turn on and off predicted

course lines ..................................4-9

RearView Monitor system limitations .........4-9

System maintenance........................4-10

Intelligent Around View Monitor

(if so equipped) ..................................4-11

Intelligent Around View Monitor system

operation....................................4-12

Difference between predicted and

actual distances.............................4-16

How to park with predicted course

lines .........................................4-18

How to switch the display ...................4-19

Adjusting the screen ........................4-20

Intelligent Around View Monitor system

limitations...................................4-20

System maintenance........................4-22

Moving Object Detection (MOD)

(if so equipped) .................................4-23

MOD system operation ......................4-24

Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) .....4-26

MOD system limitations .....................4-26

System maintenance........................4-27

Vents...........................................4-28

Heater and air conditioner (manual)

(if so equipped) .................................4-29

Controls .....................................4-30

Heater operation ............................4-30

Air conditioner operation ....................4-32

Air flow charts ...............................4-33

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)

(if so equipped) .................................4-37

Automatic operation ........................4-38

Manual operation ...........................4-39

Operating tips ...............................4-40

Servicing air conditioner ........................4-41

USB/iPod® Charging Port .......................4-42

Antenna........................................4-42

Car phone or CB radio ..........................4-42

Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner’s

Manual that includes the following infor-

mation.

∙ NissanConnect® Services

∙ Navigation system (if so equipped)

∙ Audio system

∙ Apple CarPlay

∙ Android Auto

∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system

∙ Viewing information

∙ Other settings

∙ Voice recognition

∙ General system information

NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S

MANUAL

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. CAMERA button

LHA4475

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so

equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Rear-

View Monitor system could result in se-

rious injury or death.

∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience

feature and is not a substitute for

proper backing. Always turn and look

out the windows and check mirrors to

be sure that it is safe to move before

operating the vehicle. Always back up

slowly.

∙ The system is designed as an aid to

the driver in showing large stationary

objects directly behind the vehicle, to

help avoid damaging the vehicle.

∙ The distance guide line and the ve-

hicle width line should be used as a

reference only when the vehicle is on a

level paved surface. The distance

viewed on the monitor is for reference

only and may be different than the

actual distance between the vehicle

and displayed objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of

the camera.

The RearView Monitor system automati-

cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when

the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)

position. While in R (Reverse), pressing the

CAMERA button will cycle through guide-

line options. The radio can still be heard

while the RearView Monitor is active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-

tor system uses a camera located just

above the vehicle’s license plate 䊊

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-

sition to operate the RearView Monitor.

LHA3694

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle

width and distances to objects with refer-

ence to the vehicle body line 䊊

Aare dis-

played on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

∙ Red line 䊊

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

∙ Yellow line 䊊

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

∙ Green line 䊊

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

∙ Green line 䊊

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing

up.

Predicted course lines 䊊

Indicate the predicted course when back-

ing up. The predicted course lines will be

displayed on the monitor when the shift

lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the

steering wheel is turned. The predicted

course lines will move depending on how

much the steering wheel is turned and will

not be displayed while the steering wheel is

in the straight-ahead position.

The vehicle width guide lines and the width

of the predicted course lines are wider than

the actual width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their loca-

tions on the ground are for approximate

reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill

surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-

ally located at distances different from

those displayed in the monitor relative to

the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects

as you are backing up, or park and exit the

vehicle to view the positioning of objects

behind the vehicle.

LHA1196

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

further than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown farther than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

closer than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up near a projecting

object

The predicted course lines 䊊

Ado not touch

the object in the display. However, the ve-

hicle may hit the object if it projects over

the actual backing up course.

LHA3695 LHA3696 LHA1201

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the

position 䊊

Bin the display. However, the po-

sition 䊊

Cis actually at the same distance as

the position 䊊

A. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position 䊊

if the object projects over the actual back-

ing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES

WARNING

∙ If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predicted course line and the ac-

tual course line.

∙ If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted

course lines may be displayed incor-

rectly. If this occurs, please perform

the following procedures:

– Turn the steering wheel from lock

to lock while the engine is running.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road

for more than 5 minutes.

∙ When the steering wheel is turned

with the ignition switch in the ACC po-

sition, the predicted course lines may

be displayed incorrectly.

1. Visually check that the parking space is

safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed

on the screen 䊊

Awhen the shift lever is

moved to the R (Reverse) position.

LHA3697 LHA1197

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting

the steering wheel so that the pre-

dicted course lines 䊊

Benter the park-

ing space 䊊

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make

the vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Dparallel

to the parking space 䊊

Cwhile referring

to the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the

P (Park) position and apply the parking

brake.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. While on the main menu screen, touch

the Settings key.

2. Use the arrow to tab to the next screen

and touch the Camera key.

3. Touch the Display Settings key.

4. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”,

“Color”, or “Black Level” key.

5. Adjust the item by touching the + or –

key on the touch-screen display.

LHA1198

LHA3522

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings

of the RearView Monitor while the ve-

hicle is moving. Make sure the parking

brake is firmly applied.

HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF

PREDICTED COURSE LINES

To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course

lines while in the P (Park) position:

1. Touch the Settings key.

2. Touch the Camera key.

3. Touch the Predicted Course Lines key

to turn the feature ON or OFF.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The system cannot completely elimi-

nate blind spots and may not show

every object.

∙ Underneath the bumper and the cor-

ner areas of the bumper cannot be

viewed on the RearView Monitor be-

cause of its monitoring range limita-

tion. The system will not show small

objects below the bumper, and may

not show objects close to the bumper

or on the ground.

∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-

tor differ from actual distance be-

cause a wide-angle lens is used.

∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will

appear visually opposite compared to

when viewed in the rearview and out-

side mirrors.

∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.

The lines are highly affected by the

number of occupants, fuel level, ve-

hicle position, road conditions and

road grade.

∙ Make sure that the liftgate is securely

closed when backing up.

∙ Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is in-

stalled above the license plate.

∙ When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing

water condensation on the lens, a

malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-

sion instrument. Otherwise, it may

malfunction or cause damage result-

ing in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and

do not represent a system malfunction:

∙ When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not clearly

display objects.

∙ When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on

the screen. This is due to strong re-

flected light from the bumper.

∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-

cent light.

∙ The colors of objects on the RearView

Monitor may differ somewhat from the

actual color of objects.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

∙ Objects on the monitor may not be

clear in a dark environment.

∙ There may be a delay when switching

between views.

∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the

camera, the RearView Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the cam-

era.

∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

∙ Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the

camera 䊊

1, the RearView Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera

by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-

ing it with a dry cloth.

LHA3694

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. CAMERA button

LHA4475

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW

MONITOR (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for the proper use of the In-

telligent Around View Monitor system

could result in serious injury or death

∙ The Intelligent Around View Monitor is

a convenience feature and is not a

substitute for proper vehicle opera-

tion because it has areas where ob-

jects cannot be viewed. The four cor-

ners of the vehicle in particular, are

areas where objects do not always

appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rear

views. Always check your surround-

ings to be sure that it is safe to move

before operating the vehicle. Always

operate the vehicle slowly.

∙ The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other

maneuvers.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of

the camera.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor sys-

tem is designed as an aid to the driver in

situations such as slot parking or parallel

parking.

The monitor displays various views of the

position of the vehicle in a split screen for-

mat. Not all views are available at all times.

Available views:

∙ Front View

An approximately 150–degree view of

the front of the vehicle.

∙ Rear View

An approximately 150–degree view of

the rear of the vehicle.

∙ Bird’s-Eye View

The surrounding views of the vehicle

from above.

∙ Front-Side View

The view around and ahead of the front

passenger’s side wheel.

∙ Rear-Wide View

An approximately 180–degree view of

the rear of the vehicle.

To display the multiple views, the Intelligent

Around View Monitor system uses cam-

eras located in the front grille, on the vehi-

cle’s outside mirrors and one just above

the vehicle’s license plate 䊊

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW

MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-

sition or press the CAMERA button to oper-

ate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.

LHA3700

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The screen displayed on the Intelligent

Around View Monitor will automatically re-

turn to the previous screen 3 minutes after

the CAMERA button has been pressed with

the shift lever in a position other than the R

(Reverse) position.

Available views

WARNING

∙ The distance guide lines and the ve-

hicle width lines should be used as a

reference only when the vehicle is on a

paved, level surface. The apparent

distance viewed on the monitor may

be different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and displayed

objects.

∙ Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-

eye view as a reference. The lines and

the bird’s-eye view are greatly af-

fected by the number of occupants,

cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road

condition and road grade.

∙ If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

and the bird’s-eye view may be dis-

played incorrectly.

∙ When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-

jects viewed in the monitor are fur-

ther than they appear. When driving

the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed

in the monitor are closer than they

appear.

∙ Objects in the rear view will appear

visually opposite compared to when

viewed in the monitor and outside

mirrors.

∙ Use the mirrors or actually look to

properly judge distances to other

objects.

∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predicted course lines and the ac-

tual course line.

∙ The vehicle width and predicted

course lines are wider than the actual

width and course.

∙ The displayed lines will appear

slightly off to the right, because the

rearview camera is not installed in the

rear center of the vehicle.

Front and rear view

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate

vehicle width and distance to objects with

reference to the vehicle body line 䊊

Aare

displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body:

∙ Red line 䊊

1: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

∙ Yellow line 䊊

2: approximately 3 ft (1 m)

∙ Green line 䊊

3: approximately 7 ft (2 m)

∙ Green line 䊊

4: approximately 10 ft (3 m)

Front view

SAA1840

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the approximate vehicle width

when backing up.

Predicted course lines 䊊

Indicate the predicted course when oper-

ating the vehicle. The predicted course

lines will be displayed on the monitor when

the steering wheel is turned. The predicted

course lines will move depending on how

much the steering wheel is turned and will

not be displayed while the steering wheel is

in the straight-ahead position.

The front view will not be displayed when

the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the front

view and the steering wheel turns about

90 degrees or less from the straight-

ahead position, both the right and left

predicted course lines 䊊

6are displayed.

When the steering wheel turns about 90

degrees or more, a line is displayed only

on the opposite side of the turn.

Bird’s-eye view

The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead

view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the

vehicle position and the predicted course

to a parking space.

The vehicle icon 䊊

1shows the position of

the vehicle. Note that the apparent dis-

tance between objects viewed in the bird’s-

eye view may differ somewhat from the

actual distance to the vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover

䊊

2are indicated in black.

Rear view

SAA1896

Front view

LHA4534

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The non-viewable area 䊊

2is highlighted in

yellow for several seconds after the bird’s-

eye view is displayed. It will be shown only

the first time after the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

In addition, the non-viewable corners are

displayed in red and blink for the first 3 sec-

onds 䊊

3to remind the driver to be cau-

tious.

Predictive course lines 䊊

4indicate the pre-

dictive course when operating the vehicle.

The predictive course lines will be displayed

on the monitor when the steering wheel is

turned. The predictive course lines will

move depending on how much the steer-

ing wheel is turned and will not be dis-

played while the steering wheel is in the

neutral position.

When the monitor displays the front view

and the steering wheel turns about 90 de-

grees or less from the neutral position, the

two green predictive course lines are

shown in front of the vehicle.

When the steering wheel turns about 90

degrees or more, one green predictive

course line is shown in front of the vehicle

and the other predictive course line is

shown at the side of the vehicle.

When the monitor displays the rear view,

the predictive course lines are shown at

the back of the vehicle.

WARNING

∙ Objects in the bird’s-eye view will ap-

pear further than the actual distance.

∙ Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,

may be misaligned or not displayed at

the seam of the views.

∙ Objects that are above the camera

cannot be displayed.

∙ The view of the bird’s-eye view may be

misaligned when the camera position

alters.

∙ A line on the ground may be mis-

aligned and is not seen as being

straight at the seam of the views. The

misalignment will increase as the line

proceeds away from the vehicle.

Rear view

LHA4535

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

Front-side view

Guiding lines

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate

width and the front end of the vehicle are

displayed on the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line 䊊

1shows the front

part of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line 䊊

2shows the ap-

proximate vehicle width including the out-

side mirrors.

The extensions 䊊

3of both the front 䊊

1and

side 䊊

2lines are shown with a green dotted

line.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their loca-

tions on the ground are for approximate

reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill

surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-

ally located at distances different from

those displayed in the monitor relative to

the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects

as you are backing up, or park and exit the

vehicle to view the positioning of objects

behind the vehicle.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

further than it appears on the monitor.

LHA2652

LHA3695

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill,

the distance guide lines and the vehicle

width guide lines are shown farther than

the actual distance. Note that any object

on the hill is closer than it appears on the

monitor.

Backing up near a projecting

object

The predicted course lines 䊊

Ado not touch

the object in the display. However, the ve-

hicle may hit the object if it projects over

the actual backing up course.

LHA3696 LHA1201

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the

position 䊊

Bin the display. However, the po-

sition 䊊

Cis actually at the same distance as

the position 䊊

A. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position 䊊

if the object projects over the actual back-

ing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES

WARNING

∙ If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predicted course line and the ac-

tual course line.

∙ If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted

course lines may be displayed incor-

rectly. If this occurs, please perform

the following procedures:

– Turn the steering wheel from lock

to lock while the engine is running.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road

for more than 5 minutes.

∙ When the steering wheel is turned

with the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition, the predicted course lines may

be displayed incorrectly.

1. Visually check that the parking space is

safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed

on the screen 䊊

Awhen the shift lever is

moved to the R (Reverse) position.

LHA3697 LHA1197

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting

the steering wheel so that the pre-

dicted course lines 䊊

Benter the park-

ing space 䊊

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make

the vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Dparallel

to the parking space 䊊

Cwhile referring

to the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the

P (Park) position and apply the parking

brake.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

press the CAMERA button or move the shift

lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate

the Intelligent Around View Monitor.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor dis-

plays different split screen views depend-

ing on the position of the shift lever. Press

the CAMERA button to switch between the

available views.

If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position,

the available views are:

∙ Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen

∙ Rear view/front-side view split screen

∙ Rear-wide view

If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the

available views are:

∙ Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen

∙ Front view/front-side view split screen

If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position,

the only available view is front view/front-

side view split screen.

The display will switch from the Intelligent

Around View Monitor screen when:

∙ The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position

and the vehicle speed increases above

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)

∙ A different screen is selected.

LHA1198

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. While on the main menu screen, touch

the Settings key.

2. Use the arrow to tab to the next screen

and touch the Camera key.

3. Touch the Display Settings key.

4. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”,

“Color”, or “Black Level” key.

5. Adjust the item by touching the + or –

key on the touch-screen display.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings

of the Intelligent Around View Monitor

while the vehicle is moving. Make sure

the parking brake is firmly applied.

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW

MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

LHA3522

LHA3750

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for Intelligent Around View Monitor.

Failure to operate the vehicle in accor-

dance with these system limitations

could result in serious injury or death.

∙ Do not use the Intelligent Around View

Monitor with the outside mirrors in

the stored position, and make sure

that the liftgate is securely closed

when operating the vehicle using the

Intelligent Around View Monitor.

∙ The apparent distance between ob-

jects viewed on the Intelligent Around

View Monitor differs from the actual

distance.

∙ The cameras are installed on the front

grille, the outside mirrors and above

the rear license plate. Do not put any-

thing on the vehicle that covers the

cameras.

∙ When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the cameras. Otherwise, wa-

ter may enter the camera unit causing

water condensation on the lens, a

malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

∙ Do not strike the cameras. They are

precision instruments. Doing so could

cause a malfunction or cause damage

resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

There are some areas where the system

will not show objects and the system does

not warn of moving objects. When in the

front or rear view display, an object below

the bumper or on the ground may not be

viewed 䊊

1. When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall

object near the seam 䊊

2of the camera

viewing areas will not appear in the moni-

tor.

The following are operating limitations and

do not represent a system malfunction:

∙ There may be a delay when switching

between views.

∙ When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not display

objects clearly.

∙ When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-

cent light.

∙ The colors of objects on the Intelligent

Around View Monitor may differ some-

what from the actual color of objects.

∙ Objects on the Intelligent Around View

Monitor may not be clear and the color

of the object may differ in a dark envi-

ronment.

∙ There may be differences in sharpness

between each camera view of the

bird’s-eye view.

∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that

has been dampened with a diluted mild

cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry

cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

System temporarily unavailable

When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,

there are abnormal conditions in the Intel-

ligent Around View Monitor. This will not

hinder normal driving operation but the

system should be inspected. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the

screen, the camera image may be receiv-

ing temporary electronic disturbances

from surrounding devices. This will not hin-

der normal driving operation but the sys-

tem should be inspected if it occurs fre-

quently. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

∙ Do not damage the cameras as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of

the cameras 䊊

1, the Intelligent Around View

Monitor may not display objects clearly.

Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA3591 LHA3592 LHA3700

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. CAMERA button

LHA4475

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)

(if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Moving

Object Detection (MOD) system could

result in serious injury or death

∙ The MOD system is not a substitute

for proper vehicle operation and is not

designed to prevent contact with ob-

jects surrounding the vehicle. When

maneuvering, always use the outside

mirrors and rearview mirror and turn

and check the surroundings to ensure

it is safe to maneuver.

∙ The system is deactivated at speeds

above 5 mph (8 km/h). It is reactivated

at lower speeds.

∙ The MOD system is not designed to

detect surrounding stationary

objects.

The MOD system can inform the driver of

moving objects near the vehicle when

backing out of garages, maneuvering in

parking lots and in other such instances.

The MOD system detects moving objects

by using image processing technology on

the image shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION

The MOD system will turn on automatically

under the following conditions:

∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position.

∙ When the CAMERA button is pressed to

activate the camera view on the display.

∙ When vehicle speed decreases below

approximately 6mph (10 km/h) and the

camera screen is displayed.

The MOD system operates in the following

conditions when the camera view is dis-

played:

∙ When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position and the vehicle is

stopped, the MOD system detects mov-

ing objects in the bird’s-eye view. The

MOD system will not operate if the out-

side mirrors are moving in or out, in the

stowed position, or if either front door is

opened.

Front and bird’s-eye views

LHA4190

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)

position and the vehicle speed is below

approximately 6mph (10 km/h), the

MOD system detects moving objects in

the front view.

∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position and the vehicle speed is below

approximately 6mph (10 km/h), the

MOD system detects moving objects in

the rear view. The MOD system will not

operate if the liftgate is open.

The MOD system does not detect moving

objects in the front-side view. The MOD

icon is not displayed on the screen when in

this view.

When the MOD system detects moving ob-

jects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard

when in front or rear view and a yellow

frame will be displayed on the view where

the objects are detected. While the MOD

system continues to detect moving ob-

jects, the yellow frame continues to be dis-

played.

NOTE:

While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is

beeping, the MOD system does not chime.

In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame 䊊

1is

displayed on each camera image (front,

rear, right, left) depending on where mov-

ing objects are detected.

The yellow frame 䊊

2is displayed on each

view in the front view and rear view modes.

A blue MOD icon 䊊

3is displayed in the view

where the MOD system is operative. A gray

MOD icon is displayed in the view where the

MOD system is not operative.

Rear and bird’s-eye views

LHA4191

Rear and front-side views

LHA4193

Rear-wide view

LHA4533

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD

icon 䊊

3is not displayed.

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if so

equipped)

Some vehicles include the option to allow

the MOD system to be turned on or off.

To turn the MOD system on or off:

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel.

2. Using the buttons, select “Driver

Assistance” and press the OK button.

3. Select “Parking Aids”.

4. Toggle ON or OFF “Moving Object” us-

ing the OK button.

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle

in accordance with these system limita-

tions could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ Do not use the MOD system when

towing a trailer. The system may not

function properly.

∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume or open vehicle win-

dow) will interfere with the chime

sound, and it may not be heard.

∙ The MOD system performance will be

limited according to environmental

conditions and surrounding objects

such as:

– When there is low contrast be-

tween background and the moving

objects.

– When there is a blinking source of

light.

– When strong light such as another

vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is

present.

– When camera orientation is not in

its usual position, such as when a

mirror is folded.

– When there is dirt, water drops or

snow on the camera lens.

– When the position of the moving

objects in the display is not

changed.

∙ The MOD system might detect flowing

water droplets on the camera lens,

white smoke from the muffler, mov-

ing shadows, etc.

∙ The MOD system may not function

properly depending on the speed, di-

rection, distance or shape of the mov-

ing objects.

∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the

parts where the camera is installed,

leaving it misaligned or bent, the

sensing zone may be altered and the

MOD system may not detect objects

properly.

∙ When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not dis-

play objects clearly. This is not a

malfunction.

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

The blue MOD icon will change to orange

if one of the following has occurred:

∙ When the system is malfunctioning.

∙ When the component temperature

reaches a high level (icon will blink).

∙ When the Rear View camera has de-

tected a blockage (icon will blink).

If the icon light continues to illuminate

orange, have the MOD system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

∙ Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of

the cameras 䊊

1, the MOD system may not

operate properly. Clean the camera by wip-

ing with a cloth dampened with a diluted

mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a

dry cloth.

LHA3700

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent

slides.

Open or close the vents by using the dial.

Move the dial toward the to open the

vents or toward the to close them.

Side

LHA4301

Center

LHA4302

Rear

LHA1134

VENTS

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Fan speed control dial / A/C (air

conditioner) button

2. Air flow control buttons

3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C

button

4. Air recirculation button

5. Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch

6. Front windshield defrost button

WARNING

∙ The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the inte-

rior air to become stale and the win-

dows to fog up.

NOTE:

∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air conditioner

unit. Odor can enter the passenger

compartment through the vents.

LHA2243

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(manual) (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

∙ When parking, set the heater and air

conditioner controls to turn off air recir-

culation to allow fresh air into the pas-

senger compartment. This should help

reduce odors inside the vehicle.

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial allows you to ad-

just the fan speed for the outlet air flow. To

turn the fan off, turn the fan control

dial to the OFF position.

Air flow control buttons

The air flow control buttons allow you to

select the air flow outlets.

MAX

A/C

— Air flows mainly from cen-

ter and side vents with

maximum cooling

and turns on.

— Air flows mainly from cen-

ter and side vents.

— Air flows mainly from cen-

ter and side vents and foot

outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot

outlets and partly from

defroster.

— Air flows mainly from de-

froster outlets and foot

outlets.

— Air flows mainly from de-

froster outlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to

adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To

lower the temperature, turn the dial to the

left. To increase the temperature, turn the

dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

On position (Indicator light on):

Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the ON position

when:

∙ driving on a dusty road.

∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering

passenger compartment.

∙ for maximum cooling when using the

air conditioner.

Off position (Indicator light off):

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment and distributed through the

selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air

conditioner operation.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control

dial to the desired position and press

the button to turn on the air condi-

tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press

the button again.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch

For additional information, refer to “Rear

window and outside mirror (if so equipped)

defroster switch” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to

the foot outlets. Some air also flows from

the defrost outlets and the side vent out-

lets.

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Press the button to change to

fresh air intake mode. The indica-

tor light will turn off for normal heating.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side

and center vents.

1. Press the button to change to

fresh air intake mode. The indica-

tor light will turn off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost

outlets to defrost/defog the windows.

1. Press the defroster button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the

windows, turn the fan control dial to the

highest setting and the temperature

control to the full HOT position.

∙ When the position is selected, the

air conditioner automatically turns on if

the outside temperature is more than

36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air

which helps defog the windshield.

The indicator automatically turns

off, allowing outside air to be drawn into

the passenger compartment to further

improve the defogging performance.

The recirculation mode cannot be acti-

vated in the position.

Bi-level heating

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to

the side and center vents and to the front

and rear floor outlets.

1. Press the button to change to

fresh air intake mode. The will

turn off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the de-

sired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs

the windshield.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

∙ When the position is selected, the

air conditioner automatically turns on if

the outside temperature is more than

36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air

which helps defog the windshield.

The indicator automatically turns

off, allowing outside air to be drawn into

the passenger compartment to further

improve the defogging performance.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades

and air inlet in front of the windshield.

This improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the fan control

dial to the desired position, and press

the button to activate the air condi-

tioner. When the air conditioner is on, cool-

ing and dehumidifying functions are

added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify

the air.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

3. Press the button.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

∙ For quick cooling, press the MAX A/C

button. When the MAX A/C button is

pressed, it will activate the mode.

The amount of air coming through the

vents is the highest it can go when in

MAX A/C mode regardless of the posi-

tion of the fan control dial.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify

the air.

1. Press the button to the OFF posi-

tion.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Press the A/C button. The indicator

light comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows

and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the front defrost button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the de-

sired position.

∙ When the or are selected,

the air conditioner automatically turns

on if the outside temperature is more

than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air

which helps defog the windshield.

The mode automatically turns off,

allowing outside air to be drawn into the

passenger compartment to further im-

prove the defogging performance.

∙ The air conditioner is always on in

or mode, regardless of whether

the indicator light is on or off.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Operating tips

∙ Keep the windows and moonroof (if so

equipped) closed while the air condi-

tioner is in operation.

∙ After parking in the sun, drive for two or

three minutes with the windows open

to vent hot air from the passenger

compartment. Then, close the win-

dows. This allows the air conditioner to

cool the interior more quickly.

∙The air conditioning system should

be operated for approximately

10 minutes at least once a month.

This helps prevent damage to the

system due to lack of lubrication.

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from

the ventilators in hot, humid conditions

as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not

indicate a malfunction.

∙If the engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates engine coolant tem-

perature over the normal range, turn

the air conditioner off. For additional

information, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

∙ If the engine coolant temperature be-

comes too high, will be activated

and the indicator light will come on au-

tomatically.

∙ When the ignition is OFF, button charac-

ters will not illuminate.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The following charts show the button and

dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK

heating, cooling or defrosting. The air re-

circulation indicator should always be in

the OFF position for heating and defrost-

ing.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

LHA4364 LHA4365

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4366 LHA4367

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

LHA4509

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Front defroster button

2. Temperature control dial (driver’s

side) / ON-OFF button

3. MODE (manual air flow control)

button

4. Display screen

5. A/C (air conditioner) button

6. Temperature control dial (passen-

ger’s side)/DUAL (passenger’s side

temperature control) button

7. Rear window and outside

mirror (if so equipped) defroster

switch

8. Fresh air intake button

9. AUTO (automatic mode) button

10. Fan speed control buttons

11. Air recirculation button

WARNING

∙ The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the inte-

rior air to become stale and the win-

dows to fog up.

LHA2875

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(automatic) (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

NOTE:

∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air conditioner

unit. Odor can enter the passenger

compartment through the vents.

∙ When parking, set the heater and air

conditioner controls to turn off air recir-

culation to allow fresh air into the pas-

senger compartment. This should help

reduce odors inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Heating (A/C OFF)

The air conditioner does not activate.When

you need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

∙ The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained auto-

matically. Air flow distribution and fan

speed are also controlled automatically.

∙ Do not set the temperature lower than

the outside air temperature. Otherwise,

the system may not work properly.

∙ Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or

defogging

1. Press the front defroster button

on. The indicator light on the button will

come on.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set

the maximum temperature to aid in

defrosting or defogging.

∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside

of the windows, use the fan speed con-

trol dial to set the fan speed to maxi-

mum.

∙ As soon as possible after the wind-

shield is clean, press the AUTO button to

return to the automatic mode.

∙ When the front defroster button is

pressed, the air conditioner will auto-

matically be turned on at outside tem-

peratures above 36°F (2°C). The air recir-

culate mode automatically turns off,

allowing outside air to be drawn into the

passenger compartment to further im-

prove the defogging performance.

When the air recirculate mode auto-

matically turns off, the air fresh mode

will automatically turn on.

Cooling and/or dehumidified

heating (AUTO)

This mode may be used all year round as

the system automatically works to keep a

constant temperature. Air flow distribution,

air intake control and fan speed are also

controlled automatically.

1. Press the AUTO button on. The indica-

tor on the button will illuminate.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to

the left or right to set the desired tem-

perature.

∙ The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained auto-

matically. Air flow distribution, air intake

control and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from

the vents in hot, humid conditions as

the air is cooled rapidly. This does not

indicate a malfunction.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

3. You can individually set driver’s and

front passenger’s side temperature us-

ing each temperature control dial.

When the DUAL button is pressed or

passenger’s side temperature dial is

turned, the DUAL indicator will come

on. To turn off the passenger’s side

temperature control, press the DUAL

button.

Remote Engine Start with

Intelligent Climate Control (if so

equipped)

Vehicles equipped with automatic climate

controls and Remote Engine Start function

may go into automatic heating or cooling

mode when Remote Engine Start is acti-

vated depending on outside and cabin

temperatures. During this period, the cli-

mate control display and buttons will be

inoperable until the ignition switch is

turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrost-

ing mode, the rear window defroster and

heated steering wheel (if so equipped) may

be activated automatically.

Voice Recognition logic (if so

equipped)

When the climate control system is on, the

fan speed may be automatically lowered

so that commands are more easily recog-

nized. Fan speed can be adjusted using

the fan speed control buttons, if de-

sired.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Press the fan speed control buttons

to manually control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to return to auto-

matic control of the fan speed.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to

adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To

lower the temperature, turn the dial to the

left. To increase the temperature, turn the

dial to the right.

Air recirculation

Press the air recirculation button to

recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.

The indicator light on the button will

come on.

The air recirculation cannot be activated

when the air conditioner is in the

front defrosting mode.

When the outside temperature exceeds

70°F (21°C), the air conditioning system may

default to air recirculation mode automati-

cally to reduce overall power consumption.

To exit air recirculation mode, deselect the

air recirculation button (indicator will turn

off) to enter fresh air mode.

Fresh air intake

Press the fresh air intake button to

draw outside air into the passenger com-

partment.

Automatic intake air control

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be

controlled automatically. When the outside

temperature exceeds 70°F (21°C), the air

conditioning system may default to air re-

circulation mode automatically to reduce

overall power consumption. To exit air re-

circulation mode, deselect the air recircula-

tion button (indicator will turn off) to enter

fresh air mode.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

To manually control the intake air, press

the air recirculation button

or fresh air intake button. To return to

the automatic control mode if

the fresh air indicator is illuminated,

press and hold the fresh air intake

button for about 2 seconds. The fresh air

indicator and air recirculation indicator

lights will flash twice, and then the intake air

will be controlled automatically. To return

to the automatic control mode if

the air recirculation icon is illumi-

nated, press and hold the air recircu-

lation button for about 2 seconds.

The air recirculation indicator

and fresh air intake indicator lights

will flash twice and the intake air will be

controlled automatically.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, press the fan control

buttons to the desired position and press

the button to turn on the air condi-

tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press

the button again.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Air flow control

Pressing the MODE button manually con-

trols air flow and selects the air outlet:

— Air flows mainly from center

and side vents.

— Air flows mainly from center

and side vents and foot

outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot

outlets and partly from

defroster.

— Air flows mainly from de-

froster and foot outlets.

To turn system off

Press the ON-OFF button.

Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch

For additional information, refer to “Rear

window and outside mirror (if so equipped)

defroster switch” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

OPERATING TIPS

The sunload sensor, located on the top and

center of the instrument panel, helps the

system maintain a constant temperature.

Do not put anything on or around this sen-

sor.

LHA2949

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ When the climate system is in auto-

matic operation and the engine coolant

temperature and outside air tempera-

ture are low, the air flow outlet may de-

fault to defroster mode for a maximum

of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a

malfunction. After the engine coolant

temperature warms up, the air flow out-

let will return to foot mode and opera-

tion will continue normally.

∙ When the outside and interior cabin

temperatures are moderate to high, the

intake setting may default to turn off air

recirculation to allow fresh air into the

passenger compartment. You may no-

tice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level

mode, or side demist vent outlets for a

maximum of 15 seconds. This may oc-

cur when previous climate setting was

system off. This is not a malfunction.

After the initial warm air is expelled, the

intake will return to automatic control,

air flow outlet will return to previous set-

tings, and operation will continue nor-

mally. To exit, press any climate control

button.

∙ Keep the moonroof (if so equipped)

closed while the air conditioner is in op-

eration.

∙ If you feel that the air flow mode you

have selected and the outlets the air is

coming out do not match, select

the mode.

∙ When you change the air flow mode,

you may feel air flow from the feet vents

for just a moment. This is not a mal-

function.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-

signed with the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the

earth’s ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant

is required when servicing your NISSAN air

conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or

lubricants will cause severe damage to

your air conditioner system. For additional

information, refer to “Air conditioner sys-

tem refrigerant and oil recommendations”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer to service your “environmentally

friendly” air conditioner system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-

frigerant under high pressure. To avoid

personal injury, any air conditioner ser-

vice should be done only by an experi-

enced technician with proper

equipment.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

There is a USB/iPod® charging port located

in the center console. This port will charge

compatible devices.

NOTE:

Only the USB connection port located

below the instrument panel will allow

operation of the USB/iPod devices

through the audio system.

The vehicle is equipped with a shark fin

antenna and an antenna pattern is printed

inside the rear window.

CAUTION

∙ Do not place metalized film near the

rear window glass or attach any metal

parts to it. This may cause poor recep-

tion or noise.

∙ When cleaning the inside of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window antenna.

Lightly wipe along the antenna with a

dampened soft cloth.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car

phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe

the following precautions; otherwise, the

new equipment may adversely affect the

engine control system and other electronic

parts.

WARNING

∙ A cellular phone should not be used

for any purpose while driving so full

attention may be given to vehicle op-

eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit

the use of cellular phones while

driving.

∙ If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-

lar phone operational mode is highly

recommended. Exercise extreme cau-

tion at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while talking

on the phone, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

LHA4476

USB/iPod® CHARGING PORT ANTENNA CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION

∙ Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control

modules.

∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic con-

trol system harnesses. Do not route

the antenna wire next to any harness.

∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave

ratio as recommended by the

manufacturer.

∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

∙ For additional information, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ..........5-4

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..............5-4

Three-way catalyst ...........................5-5

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)........................................5-5

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions ..................................5-9

Avoiding collision and rollover ...............5-10

Off-roadrecovery ...........................5-10

Rapid air pressure loss ......................5-10

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...........5-11

Driving safety precautions ...................5-12

Ignition switch (if so equipped)..................5-14

Continuously Variable Transmission .........5-14

Key positions ................................5-14

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .........5-15

Push-Button Ignition Switch (if so equipped) ....5-15

Operating range.............................5-16

Push-button ignition switch positions .......5-17

Emergency engine shut off ..................5-17

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery

discharge (if so equipped) ...................5-18

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .........5-18

Before starting the engine......................5-19

Starting the engine (models without NISSAN

Intelligent Key® system) ........................5-19

Starting the engine (models with NISSAN

Intelligent Key® system) ........................5-20

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ........5-21

Driving the vehicle ..............................5-21

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) ........................................5-21

Parking brake ..................................5-27

Pedal type ...................................5-27

Switch type (models with electronic

parking brake system).......................5-27

Automatic brake hold (if so equipped) ..........5-30

How to activate/deactivate the

automatic brake hold function ..............5-31

How to use the automatic brake hold

function .....................................5-32

SPORT mode switch............................5-33

ECO mode switch ..............................5-33

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

(if so equipped) .................................5-34

LDW system operation ......................5-35

How to enable/disable the LDW system .....5-36

LDW system limitations......................5-37

System temporarily unavailable .............5-38

System malfunction .........................5-38

System maintenance........................5-38

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)

(if so equipped) .................................5-39

I-LI system operation ........................5-40

How to enable/disable the I-LI system.......5-42

I-LI system limitations .......................5-42

System temporarily unavailable .............5-43

System malfunction .........................5-44

System maintenance........................5-45

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) .......................5-45

BSW system operation ......................5-47

How to enable/disable the BSW system .....5-49

BSW system limitations......................5-49

BSW driving situations .......................5-50

System temporarily unavailable .............5-54

System maintenance........................5-55

RearCrossTrafficAlert(RCTA) ..................5-56

RCTA system operation......................5-57

How to enable/disable the RCTA

system ......................................5-59

RCTA system limitations .....................5-60

System temporarily unavailable .............5-62

System maintenance........................5-63

Cruise control (if so equipped) ..................5-64

Precautions on cruise control................5-64

Cruise control operations....................5-65

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles

without ProPILOT™ Assist) (if so equipped) ......5-66

How to select the cruise control mode ......5-68

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode .......................................5-68

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode operation .............................5-70

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode switches..............................5-71

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode limitations ............................5-78

System temporarily unavailable .............5-82

System maintenance........................5-84

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode................................5-85

ProPILOT™ Assist (if so equipped) ...............5-90

ProPILOT™ Assist system operation .........5-92

Turning the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode on......................5-95

Operating ProPILOT™ Assist .................5-96

How to enable/disable the Steering

Assist ......................................5-100

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

(for vehicles with ProPILOT™ Assist) .........5-101

Steering Assist ..............................5-111

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode...............................5-118

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

(if so equipped) ................................5-122

AEB system operation......................5-123

Turning the AEB system on/off .............5-125

AEB system limitations .....................5-125

System temporarily unavailable ............5-127

System malfunction ........................5-127

System maintenance.......................5-127

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with

Pedestrian Detection (if so equipped) ..........5-129

AEB with Pedestrian Detection system

operation...................................5-130

Turning the AEB with Pedestrian

Detection system ON/OFF .................5-132

AEB with Pedestrian Detection system

limitations..................................5-133

System temporarily unavailable ............5-135

System malfunction ........................5-136

System maintenance.......................5-136

Break-in schedule .............................5-138

Fuel efficient driving tips .......................5-138

Increasing fuel economy ......................5-140

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if so equipped) ..........5-140

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Lock Switch

Operations .................................5-141

Parking/parking on hills .......................5-143

Power steering ................................5-144

Brake system..................................5-145

Brake precautions ..........................5-145

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .............5-146

Brake assist ................................5-147

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ........5-147

Brake force distribution.....................5-149

Chassis Control ...............................5-150

Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC)...............5-150

Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) ............... 5-151

Active Ride Control (ARC) ...................5-152

Hill start assist system.........................5-153

Cold weather driving ..........................5-154

Freeing a frozen door lock ..................5-154

Antifreeze ..................................5-154

Battery.....................................5-154

Draining of coolant water...................5-155

Tire equipment .............................5-155

Special winter equipment ..................5-155

Driving on snow or ice ......................5-155

Parking brake ..............................5-156

WARNING

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ To avoid raising the center of gravity

excessively, do not exceed the rated

capacity of the roof rack (if so

equipped) and evenly distribute the

load.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-

gerous. It can cause unconsciousness

or death.

∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all

windows fully open, and have the ve-

hicle inspected immediately.

∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

∙ Do not park the vehicle with the en-

gine running for any extended length

of time.

∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,

doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)

closed while driving, otherwise ex-

haust gases could be drawn into the

passenger compartment. If you must

drive with one of these open, follow

these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dial to

high to circulate the air.

∙ If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer

through the seal on the liftgate or the

body, follow the manufacturer’s rec-

ommendation to prevent carbon

monoxide entry into the vehicle.

∙ The exhaust system and body should

be inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passenger

compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system,

underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND

DRIVING

5-4 Starting and driving

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission con-

trol device installed in the exhaust system.

Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst

are burned at high temperatures to help

reduce pollutants.

WARNING

∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, ani-

mals or flammable materials away

from the exhaust system

components.

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability

to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause over rich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep

driving if the engine misfires, or if no-

ticeable loss of performance or other

unusual operating conditions are de-

tected. Have the vehicle inspected

promptly. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, damag-

ing the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not race the engine while warming

it up.

∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to

start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as pos-

sible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-

tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is

the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-

rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation

has not reached the level to trigger illumi-

nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

Starting and driving 5-5

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously illu-

minated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as

the malfunction exists. When the malfunc-

tion indicator is illuminated, the system

may not be able to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions

may occur for a variety of reasons, includ-

ing the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-

erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Additional information:

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

does not monitor the tire pressure of

the spare tire.

∙ The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may

not detect a sudden drop in tire pres-

sure (for example, a flat tire while driv-

ing).

∙ The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-

flated to the recommended pressure,

the vehicle must be driven at speeds

above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure

warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge

to check the tire pressure.

∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn-

ing appears each time the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position as

long as the low tire pressure warning

light remains illuminated.

∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn-

ing appears in the vehicle information

display when the low tire pressure

warning light is illuminated and low tire

pressure is detected. The “Tire Pressure

Low - Add Air” warning turns off when

the low tire pressure warning light turns

off.

∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn-

ing does not appear if the low tire pres-

sure warning light illuminates to indi-

cate a TPMS malfunction.

∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending

on the heat caused by the vehicle’s op-

eration and the outside temperature.

Do not reduce the tire pressure after

driving because the tire pressure rises

after driving. Low outside temperature

can lower the temperature of the air

inside the tire which can cause a lower

tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. If the warning light illumi-

nates, check the tire pressure for all four

tires.

∙ The Tire and Loading Information label

is located in the driver’s door opening.

∙ You can also check the pressure of all

tires (except the spare tire) on the ve-

hicle information display screen. The or-

der of the tire pressure figures dis-

played on the screen corresponds with

the actual order of the tire position.

5-6 Starting and driving

For additional information, refer to “Low tire

pressure warning light” in the “Instruments

and controls” section and “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may per-

manently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light off. If you have a flat

tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon

as possible. (For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of

emergency” section for changing a

flat tire.)

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, when a

spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-

cated, the TPMS will not function and

the low tire pressure warning light will

flash for approximately 1 minute. The

light will remain on after 1 minute.

Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS

system reset as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

Starting and driving 5-7

CAUTION

∙ The TPMS may not function properly

when the wheels are equipped with

tire chains or the wheels are buried in

snow.

∙ Do not place metalized film or any

metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win-

dows. This may cause poor reception

of the signals from the tire pressure

sensors, and the TPMS will not func-

tion properly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem-

porarily interfere with the operation of the

TPMS and cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate.

Some examples are:

∙ Facilities or electric devices using simi-

lar radio frequencies are near the ve-

hicle.

∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequen-

cies is being used in or near the vehicle.

∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or

a DC/AC converter is being used in or

near the vehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light may

illuminate in the following cases:

∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel

and tire without TPMS.

∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the

ID has not been registered.

∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by

NISSAN.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert

When adding air to an under-inflated tire,

the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides

visual and audible signals outside the ve-

hicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec-

ommended COLD tire pressure.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the

shift lever in the P (Park) position.

3. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition. Do not start the engine.

5-8 Starting and driving

Operation

1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica-

tors will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure is

reached, the horn beeps once and the

hazard indicators stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.

∙ If the tire is over-inflated more than

approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn

beeps and the hazard indicators

flash three times. To correct the pres-

sure, push the core of the valve stem

on the tire briefly to release pressure.

When the pressure reaches the des-

ignated pressure, the horn beeps

once.

∙ If the hazard indicator does not flash

within approximately 15 seconds af-

ter starting to inflate the tire, it indi-

cates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is

not operating.

∙ The TPMS will not activate the Easy-

Fill Tire Alert under the following con-

ditions:

– If there is interference from an exter-

nal device or transmitter.

– The air pressure from the inflation

device is not sufficient to inflate the

tire.

– There is a malfunction in the TPMS

system.

– There is a malfunction in the horn or

hazard indicators.

– The identification code of the tire

pressure sensor is not registered to

the system.

– The battery of the tire pressure sen-

sor is low.

∙ If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not op-

erate due to TPMS interference, move

the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward

or forward and try again.

If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a

tire pressure gauge.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantly

higher rollover rate than other types of

vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than

passenger cars to make them capable of

performing in a variety of on-pavement

and off-road applications. This gives them

a higher center of gravity than ordinary ve-

hicles. An advantage of higher ground

clearance is a better view of the road, allow-

ing you to anticipate problems. However,

they are not designed for cornering at the

same speeds as conventional 2-wheel

drive vehicles any more than low-slung

sports cars are designed to perform satis-

factorily under off-road conditions. If at all

possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds.

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may result in

loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a roll-

over crash, an unbelted person is signifi-

cantly more likely to die than a person

wearing a seat belt.

For additional information, refer to “Driving

safety precautions” in this section.

Starting and driving 5-9

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss

of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.

Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive

speed, high speed cornering, or sudden

steering maneuvers, because these driving

practices could cause you to lose control of

your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,

particularly if the loss of control causes

the vehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving

when tired. Never drive when under the in-

fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-

scription or over-the-counter drugs which

may cause drowsiness). Always wear your

seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual, and also in-

struct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,

an unbelted or improperly belted person

is significantly more likely to be injured

or killed than a person properly wearing

a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side

wheels may unintentionally leave the road

surface. If this occurs, maintain control of

the vehicle by following the procedure be-

low. Please note that this procedure is only

a general guide. The vehicle must be driven

as appropriate based on the conditions of

the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the

vehicle to follow the road while vehicle

speed is reduced. Do not attempt to

drive the vehicle back onto the road

surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn

the steering wheel until both tires re-

turn to the road surface. When all tires

are on the road surface, steer the ve-

hicle to stay in the appropriate driving

lane.

∙ If you decide that it is not safe to re-

turn the vehicle to the road surface

based on vehicle, road or traffic con-

ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a

stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can

occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged

due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air

pressure loss can also be caused by driving

on under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-

dling and stability of the vehicle, especially

at highway speeds.

5-10 Starting and driving

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by

maintaining the correct air pressure and

visually inspecting the tires for wear and

damage. For additional information, refer

to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses

air pressure or “blows-out” while driving,

maintain control of the vehicle by following

the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The ve-

hicle must be driven as appropriate based

on the conditions of the vehicle, road and

traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pres-

sure. Losing control of the vehicle may

cause a collision and result in personal

injury.

∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls

in the direction of the flat tire.

∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe

location off the road and away from

traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-

ally stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers

and contact a roadside emergency

service to change the tire. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing a

flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alco-

hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream

reduces coordination, delays reaction

time and impairs judgement. Driving

after drinking alcohol increases the

likelihood of being involved in an acci-

dent injuring yourself and others. Addi-

tionally, if you are injured in an accident,

alcohol can increase the severity of the

injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How-

ever, you must choose not to drive under

the influence of alcohol. Every year thou-

sands of people are injured or killed in

alcohol-related collisions. Although the lo-

cal laws vary on what is considered to be

legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol

affects all people differently and most

people underestimate the effects of alco-

hol.

Starting and driving 5-11

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!

That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,

prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t

drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is

impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other

physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal

and off-road use. However, avoid driving in

deep water or mud as your NISSAN is

mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a

conventional off-road vehicle.

Remember that 2-wheel drive models are

less capable than All-Wheel Drive (AWD)

models for rough road driving and extrica-

tion when stuck in deep snow or mud, or

the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

∙ Spinning the front wheels on slippery

surfaces may cause the AWD warning

message to display and the AWD sys-

tem to automatically switch from the

AWD to the 2WD mode. This could re-

duce the traction. Be especially care-

ful when towing a trailer. (AWD

models)

∙ Drive carefully when off the road and

avoid dangerous areas. Every person

who drives or rides in this vehicle

should be seated with their seat belt

fastened. This will keep you and your

passengers in position when driving

over rough terrain.

∙ Do not drive across steep slopes. In-

stead drive either straight up or

straight down the slopes. Off-road ve-

hicles can tip over sideways much

more easily than they can forward or

backward.

∙ Many hills are too steep for any ve-

hicle. If you drive up them, you may

stall. If you drive down them, you may

not be able to control your speed. If

you drive across them, you may roll

over.

∙ Do not shift gears while driving on

downhill grades as this could cause

loss of control of the vehicle.

∙ Stay alert when driving to the top of a

hill. At the top there could be a drop-

off or other hazard that could cause

an accident.

∙ If your engine stalls or you cannot

make it to the top of a steep hill, never

attempt to turn around. Your vehicle

could tip or roll over. Always back

straight down in the R (Reverse) gear

and apply brakes to control your

speed.

∙ Heavy braking going down a hill could

cause your brakes to overheat and

fade, resulting in loss of control and

an accident. Apply brakes lightly and

use a low gear to control your speed.

∙ Unsecured cargo can be thrown

around when driving over rough ter-

rain. Properly secure all cargo so it will

not be thrown forward and cause in-

jury to you or your passengers.

∙ To avoid raising the center of gravity

excessively, do not exceed the rated

capacity of the roof rack (if so

equipped) and evenly distribute the

load.

∙ Secure heavy loads in the cargo area

as far forward and as low as possible.

Do not equip the vehicle with tires

larger than specified in this manual.

This could cause your vehicle to roll

over.

5-12 Starting and driving

∙ Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel when driving off-road.

The steering wheel could move sud-

denly and injure your hands. Instead

drive with your fingers and thumbs on

the outside of the rim.

∙ Before operating the vehicle, ensure

that the driver and all passengers

have their seat belts fastened.

∙ Always drive with the floor mats in

place as the floor may become hot.

∙ Lower your speed when encountering

strong crosswinds. With a higher cen-

ter of gravity, your NISSAN is more af-

fected by strong side winds. Slower

speeds ensure better vehicle control.

∙ Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires, even with AWD

engaged.

∙ For AWD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result

in drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result

in serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

∙ Do not attempt to test an AWD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-

mometer (such as the dynamometers

used by some states for emissions

testing), or similar equipment even if

the other two wheels are raised off the

ground. Make sure you inform test fa-

cility personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with AWD before it is placed

on a dynamometer. Using the wrong

test equipment may result in drive-

train damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in seri-

ous vehicle damage or personal

injury.

∙ When a wheel is off the ground due to

an unlevel surface, do not spin the

wheel excessively.

∙ Accelerating quickly, sharp steering

maneuvers or sudden braking may

cause loss of control.

∙ If at all possible, avoid sharp turning

maneuvers, particularly at high

speeds. Your NISSAN vehicle has a

higher center of gravity than a pas-

senger car. The vehicle is not de-

signed for cornering at the same

speeds as passenger cars.

∙ Failure to operate this vehicle cor-

rectly could result in loss of control

and/or a rollover accident.

∙ Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction (bias, bias-

belted, or radial), and tread pattern on

all four wheels. Install tire chains on

the front wheels when driving on slip-

pery roads and drive carefully.

∙ Be sure to check the brakes immedi-

ately after driving in mud or water. For

additional information, refer to “Brake

precautions” in this section.

∙ Avoid parking your vehicle on steep

hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it

rolls forward, backward or sideways,

you could be injured.

∙ Whenever you drive off-road through

sand, mud or water as deep as the

wheel hub, more frequent mainte-

nance may be required. For additional

information, refer to “Maintenance

under severe operating conditions” in

the “Maintenance and schedules” sec-

tion of this manual.

Starting and driving 5-13

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the

LOCK position while driving. The steer-

ing wheel will lock (for models with a

steering lock mechanism). This may

cause the driver to lose control of the

vehicle and could result in serious ve-

hicle damage or personal injury.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION

The ignition lock is designed so that the

ignition switch cannot be turned to the

LOCK position until the shift lever is moved

to the P (Park) position.

∙ When moving the ignition switch to the

LOCK position, make sure the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position.

∙ When removing the key from the igni-

tion switch, make sure the shift lever is

in the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be turned

to the LOCK position:

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion.

2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the

ON direction.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK

position.

4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the

ignition switch.

If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK

position, the shift lever cannot be moved

from the P (Park) position.

The shift lever can be moved if the igni-

tion switch is placed in the ON position

and the foot brake pedal is depressed.

KEY POSITIONS

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

Off position (1)

This position activates electrical accesso-

ries such as the radio when the engine is

not running.

ON: Normal operating position (2)

This position turns on the ignition system

and the electrical accessories.

LIC2717

IGNITION SWITCH (if so equipped)

5-14 Starting and driving

START: (3)

This position starts the engine. As soon as

the engine has started, release the key. It

automatically returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of the registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered

key (for example, when interference is

caused by another registered key, an auto-

mated toll road device or automatic pay-

ment device on the key ring), restart the

engine using the following procedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position, and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the

device (which may have caused the in-

terference) separate from the regis-

tered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN

recommends placing the registered key on

a separate key ring to avoid interference

from other devices.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button igni-

tion switch while driving the vehicle ex-

cept in an emergency. (The engine will

stop when the ignition switch is pushed

three consecutive times in quick suc-

cession or the ignition switch is pushed

and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the

engine stops while the vehicle is being

driven, this could lead to a crash and

serious injury.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (if

so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-15

When the ignition switch is pushed without

depressing the brake pedal, the ignition

switch will illuminate.

Push the ignition switch center:

∙ Once to change to ON.

∙ Two times to change to OFF.

The ignition switch will automatically re-

turn to the LOCK position when any door is

either opened or closed with the switch in

the OFF position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the

ignition switch position cannot be

switched to OFF until the shift lever is

moved to the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed

toward the OFF position, proceed as fol-

lows:

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion.

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition

switch position will change to the ON

position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the

OFF position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in

the ON position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,

the push-button ignition switch cannot

be moved from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for opera-

tion are displayed on the vehicle informa-

tion display. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost

discharged or strong radio waves are pres-

ent near the operating location, the Intelli-

gent Key system’s operating range be-

comes narrower and may not function

properly.

LSD2184 LSD2020

5-16 Starting and driving

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even some-

one who does not carry the Intelligent Key,

to push the ignition switch to start the en-

gine.

The operating range of the engine start

function is inside of the vehicle 䊊

∙ The luggage area is not included in the

operating range, but the Intelligent Key

may function.

∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on the

instrument panel, inside the glove box,

storage bin or door pocket, the Intelli-

gent Key may not function.

∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near the

door or window outside the vehicle, the

Intelligent Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position):

The ignition switch can only be locked in

this position.

The ignition switch will lock when any door

is opened or closed with the ignition

switched off.

ON (Normal operating position):

This position turns on the ignition system

and electrical accessories.

ON has a battery saver feature that will

place the ignition switch in the OFF posi-

tion, if the vehicle is not running, after some

time under the following conditions:

∙ All doors are closed.

∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).

The battery saver feature will be canceled if

any of the following occur:

∙ Any door is opened.

∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P

(Park) position.

∙ The ignition switch changes position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the igni-

tion switch in the ON position when the

engine is not running for an extended

period. This can discharge the battery.

OFF:

The ignition switch is in the OFF position

when the engine is turned off using the

ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on

the ignition switch.

AUTO ACC:

With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the

Intelligent Key with you and the ignition

switch placed from the ON position to the

OFF position, the radio can still be used for

a period of time, or until the driver’s door is

opened.

After a period of time, functions such as

radio, navigation, and Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System may be restarted by

pressing the POWER button/VOLUME con-

trol knob or the key fob unlock button. For

additional information, refer to the “Monitor,

climate, audio, phone and voice recogni-

tion systems” section of this manual.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency

situation while driving, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

∙ Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch three consecutive times in less

than 1.5 seconds, or

∙ Push and hold the push-button ignition

switch for more than 2 seconds.

Starting and driving 5-17

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

BATTERY DISCHARGE (if so

equipped)

If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key®

is discharged, or environmental conditions

interfere with the Intelligent Key operation,

start the engine according to the following

procedure:

1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) posi-

tion.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

Touch the ignition switch with the Intelli-

gent Key as illustrated. (A chime will

sound.)

After step 3 is performed, when the

ignition switch is pushed without de-

pressing the brake pedal, the ignition

switch position will change to the ON

position.

4. Push the ignition switch while depress-

ing the brake pedal within 10 seconds

after the chime sounds. The engine will

start.

NOTE:

∙When the ignition switch is pushed to

the ON position or the engine is

started by the above procedure, the

Intelligent Key battery discharge in-

dicator appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display even when the Intelli-

gent Key is inside the vehicle. This is

not a malfunction. To turn off the In-

telligent Key battery discharge indi-

cator, touch the ignition switch with

the Intelligent Key again.

∙If the Intelligent Key battery dis-

charge indicator appears, replace the

battery as soon as possible. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Battery

replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of the registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered

key (for example, when interference is

caused by another registered key, an auto-

mated toll road device or automatic pay-

ment device on the key ring), restart the

engine using the following procedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position, and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the

device (which may have caused the in-

terference) separate from the regis-

tered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN

recommends placing the registered key on

a separate key ring to avoid interference

from other devices.

SSD0860

5-18 Starting and driving

∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,

coolant, brake fluid, and windshield-

washer fluid as frequently as possible,

or at least whenever you refuel.

∙ Check that all windows and lights are

clean.

∙ Visually inspect tires for their appear-

ance and condition. Also check tires for

proper inflation.

∙ Check that all doors are closed.

∙ Position seat and adjust head

restraints/headrests.

∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-

gers to do likewise.

∙ Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position. For additional information,

refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights

and audible reminders” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this

manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N

(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift lever cannot be moved out

of P (Park) and into any of the other

gear positions if the ignition key is

turned to the OFF position or if the

key is removed from the ignition

switch.

The starter is designed not to oper-

ate if the shift lever is in any of the

driving positions.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off

the accelerator pedal by turning the

ignition key to the START position. Re-

lease the key when the engine starts. If

the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat

the above procedure.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when re-

starting, depress the accelerator

pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the

floor) and hold it and then crank the

engine. Release the key and the ac-

celerator pedal when the engine

starts.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start be-

cause it is flooded, depress the accel-

erator pedal all the way to the floor

and hold it. Crank the engine for 5 to

6 seconds. After cranking the engine,

release the accelerator pedal. Crank

the engine with your foot off the ac-

celerator pedal by turning the igni-

tion key to the START position. Re-

lease the key when the engine starts.

If the engine starts, but fails to run,

repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more

than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine

does not start, turn the key off and wait

10 seconds before cranking again, oth-

erwise the starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least

30 seconds after starting. Do not race

the engine while warming it up. Drive at

a moderate speed for a short distance

first, especially in cold weather.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE (models

without NISSAN Intelligent Key®

system)

Starting and driving 5-19

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. The vehicle is not driven regularly

and/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need

to be charged to maintain battery

health.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N

(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The starter is designed not to oper-

ate if the shift lever is in any of the

driving positions.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-

sition. Depress the brake pedal and

push the ignition switch to start the

engine.

To start the engine immediately, push

and release the ignition switch while

depressing the brake pedal with the

ignition switch in any position.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when re-

starting, depress the accelerator

pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the

floor) and while holding, crank the en-

gine. Release the accelerator pedal

when the engine starts.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start be-

cause it is flooded, depress the accel-

erator pedal all the way to the floor

and hold it. Push the ignition switch

to the ON position to start cranking

the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop

cranking by pushing the ignition

switch to the LOCK position. After

cranking the engine, release the ac-

celerator pedal. Crank the engine

with your foot off the accelerator

pedal by depressing the brake pedal

and pushing the ignition switch to

start the engine. If the engine starts,

but fails to run, repeat the above pro-

cedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more

than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine

does not start, push the ignition switch

to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds

before cranking again, otherwise the

starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up:

Allow the engine to idle for at least

30 seconds after starting. Do not race

the engine while warming it up. Drive at

a moderate speed for a short distance

first, especially in cold weather. In cold

weather, keep the engine running for a

minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before

shutting it off. Starting and stopping

the engine over a short period of time

may make the vehicle more difficult to

start.

STARTING THE ENGINE (models with

NISSAN Intelligent Key® system)

5-20 Starting and driving

5. To stop the engine, place the shift lever

in the P (Park) position and push the

ignition switch to the OFF position.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. The vehicle is not driven regularly

and/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need

to be charged to maintain battery

health.

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so

equipped)

Vehicles started with the Remote Engine

Start require the ignition switch to be

placed in the ON position before the shift

lever can be moved from the P (Park) posi-

tion. To place the ignition switch in the ON

position, follow these steps:

1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on

you.

2. Apply the brake.

3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON

position.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT)

WARNING

∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or M

(Manual shift mode). Always depress

the brake pedal until shifting is com-

pleted. Failure to do so could cause

you to lose control and have an

accident.

∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident

or damage the transmission.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

Starting and driving 5-21

CAUTION

∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade,do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose.

∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while driv-

ing. Coasting with the transmission in

the N (Neutral) position may cause se-

rious damage to the transmission.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically

controlled to produce maximum power

and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures

for this transmission are shown on the fol-

lowing pages. Follow these procedures for

maximum vehicle performance and driv-

ing enjoyment.

Engine power may be automatically re-

duced to protect the CVT if the engine

speed increases quickly when driving on

slippery roads or while being tested on

some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress

the foot brake pedal before moving the

shift lever out of the P (Park) position.

This Continuously Variable Transmis-

sion is designed so that the foot

brake pedal must be depressed be-

fore shifting from P (Park) to any driv-

ing position while the ignition switch

is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out

of the P (Park) position and into any

of the other positions if the ignition

switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF

position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed

and move the shift lever to a driving

position.

3. Release the parking brake and foot

brake pedal, and then gradually start

the vehicle in motion.

WARNING

∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or M

(Manual shift mode). Always depress

the brake pedal until shifting is com-

pleted. Failure to do so could cause

you to lose control and have an

accident.

∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident

or damage the transmission.

5-22 Starting and driving

CAUTION

∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade,do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose.

∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while driv-

ing. Coasting with the transmission in

the N (Neutral) position may cause se-

rious damage to the transmission.

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the

brake pedal, press the shift lever button

and move the shift lever from the P (Park)

position to any of the desired shift posi-

tions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift lever

is in any position while the engine is not

running. Failure to do so could cause

the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll

away and result in serious personal in-

jury or property damage.

CAUTION

Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position

only when the vehicle is completely

stopped.

P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use

the P (Park) position only when the ve-

hicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when

the vehicle is parked or when starting the

engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped. The brake pedal must be de-

pressed and the shift lever button

pressed in to move the shift lever from N

(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).

Apply the parking brake. When parking on a

hill, apply the parking brake first, then move

the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use

the R (Reverse) position only when the

vehicle is completely stopped.

LSD2691

Starting and driving 5-23

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.

Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)

position. The brake pedal must be de-

pressed and the shift lever button

pressed in to move the shift lever from P

(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to

R (Reverse).

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-

gaged. The engine can be started in this

position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and

restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is

moving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forward

driving.

Manual shift mode

When the shift lever is in the manual shift

gate, the transmission is ready for the

manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be

selected manually by moving the shift le-

ver up or down. To cancel manual shift

mode, return the shift lever to the D (Drive)

position. The transmission returns to auto-

matic driving mode.

When the shift lever is shifted from D (Drive)

to the manual shift gate with the vehicle

stopped or while driving, the transmission

enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges

can be selected manually. In the manual

shift mode, the shift range is displayed on

the position indicator in the meter. When

moving the shift lever to the manual shift

gate, the position indicator displays 1 (1st)

up to 7 (7th) depending on vehicle speed.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as

follows:

1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5⇔6⇔7

7 (7th)

Use this position for all normal forward

driving at highway speeds.

6 (6th) and 5 (5th)

Use this position when driving up long

slopes, or for engine braking when driving

down long slopes.

4 (4th), 3 (3rd) and 2 (2nd)

Use these positions for hill climbing or en-

gine braking on downhill grades.

1 (1st)

Use this position when climbing steep hills

slowly or when driving slowly, or for maxi-

mum engine braking on steep downhill

grades.

∙ Remember not to drive at high speeds

for extended periods of time in lower

than 7th gear. This reduces fuel

economy.

When shifting up

Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts

to higher range.)

When shifting down

Move the shift lever to the ⫺(down) side.

(Shifts to lower range.)

∙ The transmission will automatically

downshift the gears. (For example, if you

select the 3rd range, the transmission

will shift down between the 3rd and 1st

gears.)

∙ Moving the shift lever rapidly to the

same side twice will shift the ranges in

succession.

5-24 Starting and driving

When canceling the manual shift mode

Return the shift lever to the D (Drive) posi-

tion to return the transmission to the nor-

mal driving mode.

∙In the manual shift mode, the trans-

mission may not shift to the selected

gear. This helps maintain driving per-

formance and reduces the chance of

vehicle damage or loss of control.

∙When this situation occurs, the Con-

tinuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

position indicator light will blink and

the chime will sound.

∙In the manual shift mode, the trans-

mission may shift up automatically to

a higher range than selected if the

engine speed is too high. When the

vehicle speed decreases, the trans-

mission automatically shifts down

and shifts to 1st gear before the ve-

hicle comes to a stop.

∙ CVT operation is limited to automatic

drive mode when CVT fluid tempera-

ture is extremely low even if manual

shift mode is selected. This is not a mal-

function. When CVT fluid warms up,

manual mode can be selected.

∙ When the CVT fluid temperature is high,

the shift range may upshift in lower

rpm than usual. This is not a malfunc-

tion.

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged,

the shift lever may not be moved from the

P (Park) position even with the brake pedal

depressed and the shift lever button

pressed. To move the shift lever, perform

the following procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover us-

ing a suitable tool.

LSD2756

Starting and driving 5-25

4. Push down the shift lock release using

a suitable tool.

5. Press the shift lever button and move

the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position

while holding down the shift lock re-

lease. The vehicle may be moved to the

desired location. Replace the removed

shift lock release cover after the opera-

tion. If the shift lever cannot be moved

out of the P (Park) position, have the

Continuously Variable Transmission

system checked as soon as possible. It

is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

If the shift lever cannot be moved from

the P (Park) position while the engine is

running and the brake pedal is de-

pressed, the stop lights may not work.

Malfunctioning stop lights could cause

an accident injuring yourself and

others.

Accelerator downshift

— in D (Drive) position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the

accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts

the transmission down into a lower gear,

depending on the vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection

mode

This transmission has a high fluid tem-

perature protection mode. If the fluid tem-

perature becomes too high (for example,

when climbing steep grades in high tem-

peratures with heavy loads, such as when

towing a trailer), engine power and, under

some conditions, vehicle speed will be de-

creased automatically to reduce the

chance of transmission damage. Vehicle

speed can be controlled with the accelera-

tor pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed

may be limited.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, the

Continuously Variable Transmission will

not be shifted into the selected driving po-

sition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme

conditions, such as excessive wheel

spinning and subsequent hard braking,

the fail-safe system may be activated.

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

may come on to indicate the fail-safe

mode is activated. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual. This will oc-

cur even if all electrical circuits are func-

tioning properly. In this case, place the

ignition switch in the OFF position and

wait for 10 seconds. Then place the igni-

tion switch back in the ON position. The

vehicle should return to its normal oper-

ating condition. If it does not return to its

normal operating condition, have the

transmission checked and repaired, if

necessary. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature pro-

tection mode or fail-safe operation oc-

curs, vehicle speed may be gradually re-

duced.The reduced speed may be lower

than other traffic, which could increase

the chance of a collision. Be especially

careful when driving. If necessary, pull

to the side of the road at a safe place

and allow the transmission to return to

normal operation, or have it repaired if

necessary.

5-26 Starting and driving

WARNING

∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

∙ Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of

the parking brake. When parking, be

sure the parking brake is fully

engaged.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

PEDAL TYPE

To engage: Firmly depress the parking

brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-

sition.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal

and it will release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn-

ing light goes out.

SWITCH TYPE (models with

electronic parking brake system)

The electronic parking brake can be ap-

plied or released automatically or by oper-

ating the parking brake switch.

Automatic operation

The electronic parking brake will apply au-

tomatically if the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position when the brake force is

maintained by the automatic brake hold

function.

LSD0158 LSD2828

PARKING BRAKE

Starting and driving 5-27

The electronic parking brake is automati-

cally released as soon as the vehicle starts

and the accelerator pedal is depressed.

The driver’s seat belt needs to be fastened.

WARNING

∙ The electronic parking brake will not

be automatically applied when the

engine is stopped without using the

ignition switch (for example, by en-

gine stalling). Without the vehicle sta-

tionary, the electronic parking brake

will not be automatically applied even

if the engine is turned off with the ig-

nition switch.

∙ Before leaving the vehicle, move the

shift lever to the P (Park) position and

check that the electronic parking

brake warning light is illuminated to

confirm that the electronic parking

brake is applied. The electronic park-

ing brake warning light will remain on

for a period of time after the driver’s

door is locked.

CAUTION

When parking in an area where the out-

side temperature is below 32°F (0°C), do

not apply the parking brake to prevent

it from freezing.

For safe parking, place the shift lever in

the P (Park) position and securely block

the wheels.

NOTE:

∙To keep the electronic parking brake

released after the engine is turned

off, place the ignition switch in the

OFF position, depress the brake pedal

and push down the parking brake

switch before opening the driver’s

door.

∙If a malfunction occurs in the elec-

tronic parking brake system (for ex-

ample, due to battery discharge), it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer.

∙If the shift lever is moved to the P

(Park) position when the brake force

is maintained by the automatic brake

hold function, the electronic parking

brake will apply automatically.

∙If the driver’s seatbelt is unfastened

when the brake force is maintained

by the automatic brake hold function,

the electronic parking brake will ap-

ply automatically.

∙If the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position when the brake force is

maintained by the automatic brake

hold function, the electronic parking

brake will apply automatically.

Manual operation

The electronic parking brake will not be au-

tomatically applied if the engine is stopped

without using the ignition switch (for ex-

ample, by engine stalling). In such a case, you

have to apply the parking brake manually.

To apply: Pull the switch up 䊊

1. The indica-

tor light 䊊

Awill illuminate.

To release: With the ignition switch in the

ON position, depress the brake pedal and

push the switch down 䊊

2. The indicator

light 䊊

Awill turn off.

Before driving, check that the electronic

parking brake warning light goes out.

For additional information, refer to “Warn-

ing light, indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

5-28 Starting and driving

NOTE:

∙A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is

driven without releasing the parking

brake. For additional information, re-

fer to “Warning light, indicator lights

and audible reminders” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this

manual.

∙While the electronic parking brake is

applied or released, an operating

sound is heard from the lower side of

the rear seat. This is normal and does

not indicate a malfunction.

∙When the electronic parking brake is

frequently applied and released in a

short period of time, the parking

brake may not operate in order to

prevent the parking brake system

from overheating. If this occurs, oper-

ate the electronic parking brake

switch again after waiting approxi-

mately 1 minute.

∙If the electronic parking brake must

be applied while driving in an emer-

gency, pull up and hold the parking

brake switch. When you release the

parking brake switch, the parking

brake will be released.

∙While pulling up the electronic park-

ing brake switch during driving, the

parking brake is applied and a chime

sounds. The electronic parking brake

warning light in the meter and in the

parking brake switch illuminates.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

The electronic parking brake warning

light in the meter and in the parking

brake switch turns off when the park-

ing brake is released.

∙When pulling the electronic parking

brake switch up with the ignition

switch in the OFF or ACC position, the

parking brake switch indicator light

will continue to illuminate for a short

period of time.

When towing a trailer

Depending on the weight of the vehicle and

trailer and the steepness of the slope, there

may be a tendency for the vehicle to move

backwards when starting from a standstill.

When this occurs, you can use the parking

brake switch in the same way as a conven-

tional lever type parking brake.

Before starting on sloping roads when

towing a trailer, be sure to read the follow-

ing to prevent the vehicle from moving

backward unintentionally:

∙ Release the parking brake switch as

soon as the engine is delivering enough

torque to the wheels.

Starting and driving 5-29

The automatic brake hold function main-

tains the braking force without the driver

having to depress the brake pedal when

the vehicle is stopped at a traffic light or

intersection. As soon as the driver de-

presses the accelerator pedal again, the

automatic brake hold function is deacti-

vated and the braking force is released.The

operating status of the automatic brake

hold can be displayed on the vehicle infor-

mation display.

WARNING

∙ The automatic brake hold function is

not designed to hold the vehicle on a

steep hill or slippery road. Never use

the automatic brake hold when the

vehicle is stopped on a steep hill or

slippery road. Failure to do so may

cause the vehicle to move.

∙ When the automatic brake hold func-

tion is activated but fails to maintain

the vehicle at a standstill, depress the

brake pedal to stop the vehicle. If the

vehicle unexpectedly moves due to

outside conditions, the chime may

sound and automatic brake hold

warning may illuminate in the vehicle

information display.

∙ Be sure to deactivate the automatic

brake hold function when using a car

wash or towing your vehicle.

∙ Make sure to place the shift lever in

the P (Park) position and apply the

parking brake when parking your ve-

hicle, riding on or off the vehicle, or

loading luggage. Failure to do so

could cause the vehicle to move or roll

away unexpectedly and result in seri-

ous personal injury or property

damage.

CAUTION

∙ If any of the following conditions oc-

cur, the automatic brake hold function

may not function. Have the system

checked promptly. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

– A warning message appears in the

vehicle information display.

– The indicator light on the auto-

matic brake hold switch does not

illuminate when the switch is

pushed.

∙ The automatic brake hold function

will not be activated if the Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) warning light,

electronic parking brake warning

light or master warning light illumi-

nate and the chassis control system

fault message appears in the vehicle

information display.

∙ To maintain the braking force to keep

the vehicle to a standstill, a noise may

be heard. This is not a malfunction.

AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD (if so

equipped)

5-30 Starting and driving

HOW TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE

THE AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD

FUNCTION

For additional information on activating

and deactivating the automatic brake hold

function, refer to the instructions outlined

in this section.

How to activate the automatic

brake hold function

With the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion, push the automatic brake hold

switch

䊊

. The indicator light on the au-

tomatic brake hold switch

䊊

illuminates.

2. When the automatic brake hold func-

tion goes into standby, the automatic

brake hold indicator (white) illuminates.

To use the automatic brake hold function,

the following conditions need to be met:

∙ The driver’s seat belt is fastened.

∙

The electronic parking brake is released.

∙

The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position.

∙ The vehicle is not parked on a steep hill

NOTE:

The automatic brake hold function re-

tains the current settings even if the en-

gine is restarted.

How to deactivate the automatic

brake hold function

While the automatic brake hold function is

activated, push the automatic brake hold

switch to turn off the automatic brake hold

indicator light and deactivate the auto-

matic brake hold function. To deactivate

the automatic brake hold function while

the brake force has been maintained by

the automatic brake hold function, depress

the brake pedal and push the automatic

brake hold switch.

CAUTION

Make sure to firmly depress and hold

the brake pedal when turning off the

automatic brake hold function while

the brake force is applied. When the au-

tomatic brake hold function is deacti-

vated, the brake force will be released.

This could cause the vehicle to move or

roll away unexpectedly and result in an

accident.

LSD2830

Starting and driving 5-31

HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC

BRAKE HOLD FUNCTION

For additional information on using the au-

tomatic brake hold function, refer to the

instructions outlined in this section.

To maintain braking force

automatically

With the automatic brake hold function ac-

tivated and the automatic brake hold indi-

cator (white) illuminated on the meter, de-

press the braking pedal to stop the vehicle.

The brake force is automatically applied

without your foot depressed on the brake

pedal. While the brake hold is maintained,

the automatic brake hold indicator (green)

illuminates on the meter.

To start the vehicle from a

standstill

With the shift lever not in the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position, depress the accelerator

pedal while the brake force is maintained.

The brake force will automatically be re-

leased to restart the vehicle.

The automatic brake hold indicator (white)

on the meter illuminates and the auto-

matic brake hold returns to standby.

Parking

When the shift lever is in the P (Park) posi-

tion with the brake force maintained by the

automatic brake hold function, the parking

brake will automatically be applied and the

brake force of the automatic brake hold will

be released. The automatic brake hold in-

dicator turns off. When the parking brake is

applied with the brake force maintained by

the automatic brake hold function, the

brake force of the automatic brake hold will

be released. The automatic brake hold in-

dicator turns off.

NOTE:

∙Under the following conditions, the

parking brake will automatically be

applied and the brake force of the au-

tomatic brake hold will be released:

–The braking force is applied by the

automatic brake hold function for

3 minutes or longer

–The driver’s seat belt is unfastened

–The ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position

–If a malfunction occurs in the au-

tomatic brake hold function

∙When the vehicle stops, but the brake

force is not automatically applied, de-

press the brake pedal firmly until the

automatic brake hold indicator

(green) illuminates.

Automatic brake hold function

display

The automatic brake hold function status

can be checked in the “Chassis Control”

mode in the vehicle information display.

For additional information, refer to “Chassis

Control” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

5-32 Starting and driving

The SPORT mode switch adjusts the en-

gine and transmission points to enhance

performance. Push the SPORT mode

switch on the instrument panel to activate.

The SPORT mode indicator light appears in

the meter.

NOTE:

In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may

be reduced.

The ECO mode helps to enhance the fuel

economy by controlling the throttle sensi-

tivity and transmission points.

To turn on the ECO mode, push the ECO

mode switch. The ECO mode indicator light

(on the meter) will remain lit while the

mode is active.

To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO

mode switch again. The ECO mode indica-

tor light (on the meter) will turn off.

The ECO mode cannot be turned off while

the accelerator pedal is depressed, even if

the ECO mode switch is pushed to OFF.

Release the accelerator pedal to turn off

the ECO mode.

The ECO mode will turn off automatically if

a malfunction occurs in the system.

Turn off the ECO mode or depress the ac-

celerator pedal fully when:

∙ Driving with a heavy load of passengers

or cargo in the vehicle

∙ Driving on a steep uphill slope

∙ ECO mode may affect air conditioner

performance

NOTE:

Selecting this drive mode will not neces-

sarily improve fuel economy as many

driving factors influence its effective-

ness.

LIC2417 LIC2416

SPORT MODE SWITCH ECO MODE SWITCH

Starting and driving 5-33

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the LDW

system could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ This system is only a warning device

to inform the driver of a potential un-

intended lane departure. It will not

steer the vehicle or prevent loss of

control. It is the driver’s responsibility

to stay alert, drive safely, keep the ve-

hicle in the traveling lane, and be in

control of the vehicle at all times.

The LDW system will operate when the ve-

hicle is driven at speeds of approximately

37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only

when the lane markings are clearly visible

on the road.

The LDW system monitors the lane mark-

ers on the traveling lane using the camera

unit 䊊

Alocated above the inside mirror.

The LDW system warns the driver with a

warning light and chime that the vehicle is

beginning to leave the driving lane. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “LDW system

operation” in this section.

LSD2795

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) (if

so equipped)

5-34 Starting and driving

LDW SYSTEM OPERATION

The LDW system provides a lane departure

warning function when the vehicle is driven

at speeds of approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) and above and the lane mark-

ings are clear. When the vehicle ap-

proaches either the left or the right side of

the traveling lane, a warning chime will

sound and the LDW indicator light on the

instrument panel will blink to alert the

driver.

The warning function will stop when the

vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

LSD2675

Starting and driving 5-35

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

LDW SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the LDW system.

1. Press the button until “Settings”

displays in the vehicle information dis-

play. Use the button to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK

button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK

button.

3. To set the LDW system to on or off, use

the buttons to navigate in the

menu and use the OK button to select

or change an item:

∙ Select “Lane” and press the OK but-

ton.

– To turn on the warning system, use

the OK button to check the box for

“Warning.”

LSD2783

5-36 Starting and driving

LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the LDW system. Failure to follow the

warnings and instructions for proper

use of the LDW system could result in

serious injury or death.

∙ The system will not operate at speeds

below approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane

markers.

∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

∙ Do not use the LDW system under the

following conditions as it may not

function properly:

– During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.).

– When driving on slippery roads,

such as on ice or snow.

– When driving on winding or un-

even roads.

– When there is a lane closure due to

road repairs.

– When driving in a makeshift or

temporary lane.

– When driving on roads where the

lane width is too narrow.

– When driving without normal tire

conditions (for example, tire wear,

low tire pressure, installation of

spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard

wheels).

– When the vehicle is equipped with

non-original brake parts or sus-

pension parts.

– When you are towing a trailer or

other vehicle.

∙ The system may not function prop-

erly under the following conditions:

– On roads where there are multiple

parallel lane markers; lane mark-

ers that are faded or not painted

clearly; yellow painted lane mark-

ers; non-standard lane markers; or

lane markers covered with water,

dirt, snow, etc.

– On roads where the discontinued

lane markers are still detectable.

– On roads where there are sharp

curves.

–

On roads where there are sharply

contrasting objects, such as shad-

ows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams

or lines remaining after road re-

pairs. (The LDW system could detect

these items as lane markers.)

– On roads where the traveling lane

merges or separates.

– When the vehicle’s traveling direc-

tion does not align with the lane

marker.

– When traveling close to the vehicle

in front of you, which obstructs the

lane camera unit detection range.

– When rain, snow, dirt or an object

adheres to the windshield in front

of the lane camera unit.

– When the headlights are not bright

due to dirt on the lens or if the aim-

ing is not adjusted properly.

– When strong light enters the lane

camera unit. (For example, the light

directly shines on the front of the

vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)

– When a sudden change in bright-

ness occurs. (For example, when

the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel

or under a bridge.)

Starting and driving 5-37

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight

under high temperature conditions (over

approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then

started, the LDW system may be deacti-

vated automatically and the following

message will appear in the vehicle infor-

mation display: “Unavailable: High Cabin

Temp.”

When the interior temperature is reduced,

the LDW system will resume operating au-

tomatically.

The LDW system is not designed to warn

under the following conditions:

∙ When you operate the lane change sig-

nal and change traveling lanes in the

direction of the signal. (The LDW system

will become operable again approxi-

mately 2 seconds after the lane change

signal is turned off.)

∙ When the vehicle speed lowers to less

than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).

After the above conditions have finished

and the necessary operating conditions

are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the LDW system malfunctions, it will can-

cel automatically and “Malfunction: See

Owner’s Manual” will appear in the vehicle

information display. If “Malfunction: See

Owner’s Manual” appears in the vehicle in-

formation display, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop the vehicle. Place the

shift lever in the P (Park) position and the

ignition switch in the OFF position and re-

start the engine/motor. If “Malfunction: See

Owner’s Manual” continues to appear in

the vehicle information display, have the

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The lane camera unit 䊊

1for the LDW sys-

tem is located above the inside mirror. To

keep the proper operation of the LDW sys-

tem and prevent a system malfunction, be

sure to observe the following:

∙ Always keep the windshield clean.

∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the camera unit.

LSD2712

5-38 Starting and driving

∙ Do not place reflective materials, such

as white paper or a mirror, on the instru-

ment panel. The reflection of sunlight

may adversely affect the camera unit’s

capability of detecting the lane mark-

ers.

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas

around the camera unit. Do not touch

the camera lens or remove the screw

located on the camera unit. If the cam-

era unit is damaged due to an accident,

it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the I-LI sys-

tem could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The I-LI system will not steer the ve-

hicle or prevent loss of control. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert,

drive safely, keep the vehicle in the

traveling lane, and be in control of the

vehicle at all times.

∙ The I-LI system is primarily intended

for use on well-developed freeways or

highways. It may not detect the lane

markers in certain road, weather, or

driving conditions.

The I-LI system must be turned on with the

dynamic driver assistance switch (for ve-

hicles without ProPILOT™ Assist) or the

Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with

ProPILOT™ Assist) every time the ignition is

placed in the ON position.

The I-LI system will operate when the ve-

hicle is driven at speeds of approximately

37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only

when the lane markings are clearly visible

on the road.

The I-LI system warns the driver when the

vehicle has left the center of the traveling

lane with a warning light and chime. The

system helps assist the driver to return the

vehicle to the center of the traveling lane by

applying the brakes to the left or right

wheels individually (for a short period of

time).

The I-LI system monitors the lane markers

on the traveling lane using the camera unit

䊊

Alocated above the inside mirror.

LSD2795

INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION

(I-LI) (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-39

䊊

1Dynamic driver assistance switch (for

vehicles without ProPILOT™

Assist)/Steering Assist switch (for ve-

hicles with ProPILOT™ Assist)

䊊

2Lane Departure Warning

(LDW)/Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-

LI) indicator

䊊

3Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) indi-

cator (if so equipped)

I-LI SYSTEM OPERATION

The I-LI system operates above approxi-

mately 37 mph (60 km/h). When the vehicle

approaches either the left or the right side

of the traveling lane, a warning chime will

sound and the I-LI indicator light (orange)

on the instrument panel will blink to alert

the driver. Then, the I-LI system will auto-

matically apply the brakes for a short pe-

riod of time to help assist the driver to re-

turn the vehicle to the center of the

traveling lane.

To turn on the I-LI system, push the dy-

namic driver assistance switch (for ve-

hicles without ProPILOT™ Assist) or the

Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with

ProPILOT™ Assist) on the instrument panel

after starting the engine/motor. The I-LI

indicator light on the instrument panel will

LSD2980

5-40 Starting and driving

illuminate. Push the dynamic driver assis-

tance switch or the Steering Assist switch

again to turn off the I-LI system. The I-LI

indicator light will turn off.

LSD2783

Starting and driving 5-41

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-LI

SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the I-LI system.

1. Press the button until “Settings”

displays in the vehicle information dis-

play. Use the button to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK

button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK

button.

3. To set the I-LI system to on or off, use

the buttons to navigate in the

menu and use the OK button to select

or change an item:

∙

Select “Lane” and press the OK button.

– To turn on the warning system, use

the OK button to check the box for

“Warning.”

NOTE:

Turning on the ProPILOT™ Assist system

(if so equipped) will turn on the I-LI sys-

tem at the same time. For additional in-

formation, refer to “ProPILOT™ Assist” in

this section.

I-LI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the I-LI system. Failure to follow the

warnings and instructions for proper

use of the I-LI system could result in

serious injury or death.

∙ The I-LI system may activate if you

change lanes without first activating

your turn signal or, for example, if a

construction zone directs traffic to

cross an existing lane marker. If this

occurs you may need to apply correc-

tive steering to complete your lane

change.

∙ Because the I-LI may not activate un-

der the road, weather, and lane

marker conditions described in this

section, it may not activate every time

your vehicle begins to leave its lane

and you will need to apply corrective

steering.

∙ When the I-LI system is operating,

avoid excessive or sudden steering

maneuvers. Otherwise, you could lose

control of the vehicle.

∙ The I-LI system will not operate at

speeds below approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane

markers.

∙ Do not use the I-LI system under the

following conditions as it may not

function properly:

– During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.).

– When driving on slippery roads,

such as on ice or snow.

– When driving on winding or un-

even roads.

– When there is a lane closure due to

road repairs.

5-42 Starting and driving

– When driving in a makeshift or

temporary lane.

– When driving on roads where the

lane width is too narrow.

– When driving without normal tire

conditions (for example, tire wear,

low tire pressure, installation of

spare tire, tire chains, non-

standard wheels).

– When the vehicle is equipped with

nonoriginal brake parts or suspen-

sion parts.

– When you are towing a trailer or

other vehicle.

– On roads where there are multiple

parallel lane markers; lane mark-

ers that are faded or not painted

clearly; yellow painted lane mark-

ers; non-standard lane markers; or

lane markers covered with water,

dirt, snow, etc.

– On roads where discontinued lane

markers are still detectable.

– On roads where there are sharp

curves.

– On roads where there are sharply

contrasting objects, such as shad-

ows, snow, water, wheel ruts,

seams or lines remaining after

road repairs. (The I-LI system could

detect these items as lane

markers.)

– On roads where the traveling lane

merges or separates.

– When the vehicle’s traveling direc-

tion does not align with the lane

marker.

– When traveling close to the vehicle

in front of you, which obstructs the

lane camera unit detection range.

– When rain, snow or dirt adheres to

the windshield in front of the lane

camera unit.

– When the headlights are not bright

due to dirt on the lens or if the aim-

ing is not adjusted properly.

– When strong light enters the lane

camera unit. (For example, the light

directly shines on the front of the

vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)

– When a sudden change in bright-

ness occurs. (For example, when

the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel

or under a bridge.)

∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

While the I-LI system is operating, you may

hear a sound of brake operation. This is

normal and indicates that the I-LI system is

operating properly.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

Condition A:

The warning and assist functions of the I-LI

system are not designed to work under the

following conditions:

∙ When you operate the lane change sig-

nal and change the traveling lanes in

the direction of the signal. (The I-LI sys-

tem will be deactivated for approxi-

mately 2 seconds after the lane change

signal is turned off.)

∙ When the vehicle speed lowers to less

than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-43

After the above conditions have finished

and the necessary operating conditions

are satisfied, the warning and assist func-

tions will resume.

Condition B:

The assist function of the I-LI system is not

designed to work under the following con-

ditions (warning is still functional):

∙ When the brake pedal is depressed.

∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far

as necessary for the vehicle to change

lanes.

∙ When the vehicle is accelerated during

I-LI system operation.

∙ When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

approach warning occurs.

∙ When the hazard warning flashers are

operated.

∙ When driving on a curve at high speed.

After the above conditions have finished

and the necessary operating conditions

are satisfied, the I-LI system application of

the brakes will resume.

Condition C:

If the following messages appear in the

vehicle information display, a chime will

sound and the I-LI system will be turned off

automatically.

∙ “Unavailable: Road is slippery”:

When the VDC system (except Traction

Control System [TCS] function) or ABS

operates.

∙ “Unavailable: VDC OFF”:

When the VDC system is turned off.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

turn off the I-LI system. Push the dynamic

driver assistance switch (for vehicles with-

out ProPILOT™ Assist) or the Steering Assist

switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT™ Assist)

again to turn the I-LI system back on.

Temporary disabled status at high tem-

perature:

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight

under high temperature conditions (over

approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then the

I-LI system is turned on, the I-LI system

may be deactivated automatically and the

following message will appear on the ve-

hicle information display: “Unavailable: High

Cabin Temp.” When the interior tempera-

ture is reduced, the system will resume op-

erating automatically.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the I-LI system malfunctions, it will cancel

automatically. The I-LI system warning light

(orange) will illuminate in the display.

If the I-LI system warning light (orange) illu-

minates in the display, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn the

engine/motor off and restart the

engine/motor. If the I-LI system warning

light (orange) continues to illuminate, have

the I-LI system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

5-44 Starting and driving

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The lane camera unit 䊊

1for the I-LI system

is located above the inside mirror. To keep

the proper operation of the I-LI system and

prevent a system malfunction, be sure to

observe the following:

∙ Always keep the windshield clean.

∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the camera unit.

∙ Do not place reflective materials, such

as white paper or a mirror, on the instru-

ment panel. The reflection of sunlight

may adversely affect the camera unit’s

capability of detecting the lane mark-

ers.

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas

around the camera unit. Do not touch

the camera lens or remove the screw

located on the camera unit. If the cam-

era unit is damaged due to an accident,

it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the BSW

system could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The BSW system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is

not designed to prevent contact with

vehicles or objects. When changing

lanes, always use the side and rear

mirrors and turn and look in the direc-

tion your vehicle will move to ensure it

is safe to change lanes. Never rely

solely on the BSW system.

The BSW system helps alert the driver of

other vehicles in adjacent lanes when

changing lanes.

LSD2712

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)

Starting and driving 5-45

The BSW system uses radar sensors 䊊

installed near the rear bumper to detect

other vehicles in an adjacent lane.

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on

either side of your vehicle within the detec-

tion zone shown as illustrated. This detec-

tion zone starts from the outside mirror of

your vehicle and extends approximately

10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and

approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

LSD2439

Detection zone

SSD1030

5-46 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

The BSW system operates above approxi-

mately 20 mph (32 km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the

detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indica-

tor light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is

then activated, the system chimes (twice),

the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes,

and the BSW/RCTA indicator illuminates

(yellow) in the vehicle information display.

The side BSW/RCTA indicator light contin-

ues to flash until the detected vehicle

leaves the detection zone.

The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illumi-

nates for a few seconds when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position.

The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indi-

cator light is adjusted automatically de-

pending on the brightness of the ambient

light.

If a vehicle comes into the detection zone

after the driver activates the turn signal,

then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light

flashes and no chime sounds. For addi-

tional information, refer to “BSW driving

situations” in this section.

LSD2734

Starting and driving 5-47

The BSW system automatically turns on

every time the engine/motor is started, as

long as it is activated using the settings

menu on the vehicle information display.

LSD2678

5-48 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

BSW SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the BSW system.

1. Press the button until “Settings”

displays in the vehicle information dis-

play. Use the button to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK

button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK

button.

3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK

button.

– To turn on the warning system, use

the OK button to check the box for

“Warning.”

NOTE:

When enabling/disabling the system,

the system will retain current settings

even if the engine is restarted.

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the BSW system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The BSW system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions.

∙ The radar sensors may not be able to

detect and activate BSW when certain

objects are present such as:

– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.

– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low

height vehicles, or high ground

clearance vehicles.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Vehicles remaining in the detec-

tion zone when you accelerate

from a stop.

– A vehicle merging into an adjacent

lane at a speed approximately the

same as your vehicle.

– A vehicle approaching rapidly from

behind.

– A vehicle which your vehicle over-

takes rapidly.

– A vehicle that passes through the

detection zone quickly.

– When overtaking several vehicles

in a row, the vehicles after the first

vehicle may not be detected if they

are traveling close together.

∙ The radar sensor’s detection zone is

designed based on a standard lane

width. When driving in a wider lane,

the radar sensors may not detect ve-

hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv-

ing in a narrow lane, the radar sensors

may detect vehicles driving two lanes

away.

∙ The radar sensors are designed to ig-

nore most stationary objects; how-

ever, objects such as guardrails, walls,

foliage and parked vehicles may oc-

casionally be detected. This is a nor-

mal operation condition.

∙ The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

Starting and driving 5-49

– Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the

vehicle

∙ Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install accesso-

ries or apply additional paint near the

radar sensors. These conditions may

reduce the ability of the radar to de-

tect other vehicles.

∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume, open vehicle window)

will interfere with the chime sound,

and it may not be heard.

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator on

Indicator off

Indicator

flashing

Another vehicle approaching

from behind

Illustration 1: The side indicator light illumi-

nates if a vehicle enters the detection zone

from behind in an adjacent lane.

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

LSD2299

5-50 Starting and driving

Illustration 2: If the driver activates the

turn signal when another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

∙The radar sensors may not detect ve-

hicles which are approaching rapidly

from behind.

∙If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the

other vehicle is detected.

Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 3: The side indicator light illu-

minates if you overtake a vehicle and that

vehicle stays in the detection zone for ap-

proximately 2 seconds.

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind

LSD2300

Illustration3–Overtaking another ve-

hicle

LSD2302

Starting and driving 5-51

Illustration 4: If the driver activates the

turn signal while another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

∙When overtaking several vehicles in a

row, the vehicles after the first vehicle

may not be detected if they are trav-

eling close together.

∙The radar sensors may not detect

slower moving vehicles if they are

passed quickly.

∙If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the

other vehicle is detected. .

Entering from the side

Illustration 5: The side indicator light illu-

minates if a vehicle enters the detection

zone from either side.

Illustration4–Overtaking another ve-

hicle

LSD2303

Illustration 5 – Entering from the side

LSD2305

5-52 Starting and driving

Illustration 6: If the driver activates the

turn signal while another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

∙If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the

other vehicle is detected.

∙The radar sensors may not detect a

vehicle which is traveling at about the

same speed as your vehicle when it

enters the detection zone.

Illustration 6 – Entering from the side

LSD2308

Starting and driving 5-53

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the sys-

tem will be deactivated automatically. The

“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message

will appear in the vehicle information dis-

play.

The system is not available until the condi-

tions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi-

tion may also be caused by objects such as

ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sen-

sors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system (if so equipped) will also

stop working.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the system will resume automatically.

LSD2735

5-54 Starting and driving

Malfunction

If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn

off automatically. The system malfunction

warning message will appear in the vehicle

information display.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system will also stop working.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-

gine off and restart the engine. If the mes-

sage continues to appear, have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors 䊊

1for the BSW and

RCTA systems are located near the rear

bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-

dar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-

structing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing

the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar-

ent material), install accessories or apply

additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the radar sensors. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around

the radar sensors is damaged due to a

collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC : OAYSRR3B

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment

LSD2439

Starting and driving 5-55

For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the RCTA

system could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The RCTA system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is

not designed to prevent contact with

vehicles or objects. When backing out

of a parking space, always use the

side and rear mirrors and turn and

look in the direction your vehicle will

move. Never rely solely on the RCTA

system.

The RCTA system will assist you when

backing out from a parking space. When

the vehicle is in reverse, the system is de-

signed to detect other vehicles approach-

ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If the

system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)

5-56 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION

The RCTA system can help alert the driver

of an approaching vehicle when the driver

is backing out of a parking space.

When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and

the vehicle speed is less than approxi-

mately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is

operational.

If the radar detects an approaching vehicle

from either side, the system chimes (once)

and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light

flashes on the side the vehicle is approach-

ing from.

LSD2734

Starting and driving 5-57

The RCTA system uses radar sensors 䊊

installed on both sides near the rear bum-

per to detect an approaching vehicle.

The radar sensors 䊊

1can detect an ap-

proaching vehicle from up to approxi-

mately 66 ft (20 m) away.

LSD2216 LSD2439

5-58 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

RCTA SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the RCTA system.

1. Press the button until “Settings”

displays in the vehicle information dis-

play. Use the button to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK

button.

2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK

button.

3. Select “Cross Traffic” and use the OK

button to enable or disable the system.

NOTE:

When enabling/disabling the system,

the system setting will be retained even

if the engine is restarted.

LSD2768

Starting and driving 5-59

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the RCTA system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ Always check surroundings and turn

to check what is behind you before

backing up. The radar sensors detect

approaching (moving) vehicles. The

radar sensors cannot detect every

object such as:

– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,

animals or child-operated toy

vehicles

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds

greater than approximately

19 mph (30 km/h)

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds

lower than approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h)

∙ The radar sensors may not detect ap-

proaching vehicles in certain

situations:

– Illustration a: When a vehicle

parked next to you obstructs the

beam of the radar sensor.

LSD2173

5-60 Starting and driving

– Illustration b: When the vehicle is

parked in an angled parking space.

– Illustration c: When the vehicle is

parked on inclined ground.

– Illustration d: When an approach-

ing vehicle turns into your vehicle’s

parking lot aisle.

– Illustration e: When the angle

formed by your vehicle and ap-

proaching vehicle is small.

∙ The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

–

Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle

∙ Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install accesso-

ries or apply additional paint near the

radar sensors. These conditions may

reduce the ability of the radar to de-

tect other vehicles.

∙ Excessive noise (e.g. audio system

volume, open vehicle window) will in-

terfere with the chime sound, and it

may not be heard.

NOTE:

In the case of several vehicles approach-

ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo-

site direction (Illustration 2), a chime may

not be sounded by the RCTA system af-

ter the first vehicle passes the sensors.

Illustration 1

LSD2043

Illustration 2

LSD2044

Starting and driving 5-61

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the sys-

tem will be deactivated automatically. The

“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message

will appear in the vehicle information dis-

play.

The systems are not available until the

conditions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-

structing the radar sensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system will also stop working.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the system will resume automatically.

LSD2735

5-62 Starting and driving

Malfunction

When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will

turn off automatically. The system mal-

function warning message will appear in

the vehicle information display.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system (if so equipped) will also

stop working.

Action to take

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-

gine off and restart the engine. If the mes-

sage continues to appear, have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors 䊊

1for the BSW and

RCTA systems are located near the rear

bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-

dar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-

structing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing

the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar-

ent material), install accessories or apply

additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the radar sensors. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around

the radar sensors is damaged due to a

collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC : OAYSRR3B

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment

For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

LSD2439

Starting and driving 5-63

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

1. CANCEL switch

2. RES/+ switch

3. SET/- switch

4. Cruise control switch

∙ If the cruise control system malfunc-

tions, it cancels automatically. The

indicator light in the vehicle information

display then blinks to warn the driver.

∙ If the indicator light blinks, turn the

cruise control switch off and have the

system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ The indicator light may blink

when the cruise control switch is turned

on while pushing the RES/+, SET/-, or

CANCEL switch. To properly set the

cruise control system, use the following

procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driv-

ing under the following conditions:

∙ When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies

in speed.

∙ On winding or hilly roads.

∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

∙ In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

LSD2722

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

5-64 Starting and driving

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed

between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-

out keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

cruise control switch on. The indica-

tor light in the vehicle information display

will illuminate.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push the SET/-

switch and release it. Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains

the set speed.

∙To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ-

ously set speed.

∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed when going up or down steep

hills. If this happens, drive without the

cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods:

∙ Push the CANCEL switch.

∙ Tap the brake pedal.

∙ Push the cruise control switch off.

The indicator light in the vehicle

information display goes out.

The cruise control is automatically can-

celed if:

∙ You depress the brake pedal while

pushing the RES/+ or SET/- switch. The

preset speed is deleted from memory.

∙ The vehicle slows down more than

8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.

∙ You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push and release the SET/- switch.

∙ Push and hold the RES/+ switch. When

the vehicle attains the speed you desire,

release the switch.

∙ Push and release the RES/+ switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed

increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the SET/- switch and release it.

∙ Push and hold the SET/- switch. Release

the switch when the vehicle slows to

the desired speed.

∙ Push and release the SET/- switch. Each

time you do this, the set speed de-

creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the RES/+ switch. The vehicle re-

turns to the last set cruising speed when

the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

To turn off the cruise control, use one of

the following three methods:

∙ Push the CANCEL switch.

∙ Tap the brake pedal.

∙ Push the cruise control switch off.

The indicator light in the vehicle

information display goes out.

Starting and driving 5-65

䊊

AICC switch

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the ICC sys-

tem could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The ICC system is only an aid to assist

the driver and is not a collision warn-

ing or avoidance device. It is the driv-

er’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely, and be in control of the vehicle

at all times.

∙ Always observe posted speed limits

and do not set the speed over them.

∙ Always drive carefully and attentively

when using the ICC system. Read and

understand the Owner’s Manual thor-

oughly before using the ICC system.

To avoid serious injury or death, do

not rely on the system to prevent ac-

cidents or to control the vehicle’s

speed in emergency situations. Do

not use the ICC system except in ap-

propriate road and traffic conditions.

LSD2728

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)

(for vehicles without ProPILOT™

Assist) (if so equipped)

5-66 Starting and driving

∙ In the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, a warning chime

will not sound to warn you if you are

too close to the vehicle ahead. Pay

special attention to the distance be-

tween your vehicle and the vehicle

ahead of you or a collision could occur.

NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with ProPILOT As-

sist, refer to “ProPILOT™ Assist” in this

section.

The ICC system maintains a selected dis-

tance from the vehicle in front of you within

the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to

144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set

speed can be selected by the driver be-

tween 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h).

The vehicle travels at a set speed when the

road ahead is clear.

The ICC system can be set to one of two

cruise control modes:

∙Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode: For maintaining a selected dis-

tance between your vehicle and the ve-

hicle in front of you up to the preset

speed

∙Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode: For cruising at a preset

speed

Push the ICC switch 䊊

Ato choose the

cruise control mode between the vehicle-

to-vehicle distance control mode and the

conventional (fixed speed) cruise control

mode.

Once a control mode is activated, it cannot

be changed to the other cruise control

mode. To change the mode, push the ICC

switch 䊊

Aonce to turn the system off. Then

push the ICC switch 䊊

Aagain to turn the

system back on and select the desired

cruise control mode.

Always confirm the setting in the ICC sys-

tem display.

For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode, refer to “Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode” in this section.

For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode, refer to “Conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode” in this section.

Starting and driving 5-67

HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE

CONTROL MODE

Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode: To choose the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

䊊

1, quickly push and release the ICC switch

䊊

Selecting the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode: To choose the con-

ventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode

䊊

2, push and hold the ICC switch 䊊

Afor

longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For

additional information, refer to “Conven-

tional (fixed speed) cruise control mode” in

this section.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode, the ICC system automatically main-

tains a selected distance from the vehicle

traveling in front of you according to that

vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at

the set speed when the road ahead is clear.

The ICC system is intended to enhance the

operation of the vehicle when following a

vehicle traveling in the same lane and di-

rection.

LSD2727 LSD2731

5-68 Starting and driving

If the radar sensor 䊊

Bdetects a slower

moving vehicle ahead, the system will re-

duce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle

follows the vehicle in front at the selected

distance.

The system automatically controls the

throttle and applies the brakes (up to ap-

proximately 40% of vehicle braking power)

if necessary.

The detection range of the sensor is ap-

proximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

LSD2679

Starting and driving 5-69

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE OPERATION

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode is designed to maintain a selected

distance from the vehicle in front of you

and can reduce the speed to match a

slower vehicle ahead. The system will de-

celerate the vehicle as necessary and if the

vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle

decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC

system can only apply up to 40% of the

vehicle’s total braking power.

This system should only be used when traf-

fic conditions allow vehicle speeds to re-

main fairly constant or when vehicle

speeds change gradually. If a vehicle

moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a

vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates,

the distance between vehicles may be-

come closer because the ICC system can-

not decelerate the vehicle quickly enough.

If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a

warning chime and blink the system dis-

play to notify the driver to take necessary

action.

The system will cancel and a warning

chime will sound if the speed is below ap-

proximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle

is not detected ahead. The system will also

disengage when the vehicle goes above

the maximum set speed.

For additional information, refer to “Ap-

proach warning” in this section.

The following items are controlled in the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:

∙ When there are no vehicles traveling

ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode maintains the speed set

by the driver. The set speed range is

between approximately 20 and 90 mph

(32 and 144 km/h).

∙ When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,

the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode adjusts the speed to maintain

the distance, selected by the driver,

from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle

ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle de-

celerates to a standstill within the limi-

tations of the system. The system will

cancel once it judges a standstill with a

warning chime.

∙ When the vehicle traveling ahead has

moved out from its lane of travel, the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode accelerates and maintains ve-

hicle speed up to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle

speed or warn you when you approach

stationary and slow moving vehicles. You

must pay attention to vehicle operation to

maintain proper distance from vehicles

ahead when approaching toll gates or traf-

fic congestion.

5-70 Starting and driving

When driving on the freeway at a set speed

and approaching a slower traveling vehicle

ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed

to maintain the distance, selected by the

driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle

ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway,

the ICC system will accelerate and main-

tain the speed up to the set speed. Pay

attention to the driving operation to main-

tain control of the vehicle as it accelerates

to the set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed on winding or hilly roads. If this oc-

curs, you will have to manually control the

vehicle speed.

Normally when controlling the distance to

a vehicle ahead, this system automatically

accelerates or decelerates your vehicle ac-

cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead.

Depress the accelerator to properly accel-

erate your vehicle when acceleration is re-

quired for a lane change. Depress the brake

pedal when deceleration is required to

maintain a safe distance to the vehicle

ahead due to its sudden braking or if a

vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when us-

ing the ICC system.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE SWITCHES

The system is operated by the ICC switch

and four control switches, all mounted on

the steering wheel.

1. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without eras-

ing the set speed.

2. RES/+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases

speed incrementally.

SSD0254 LSD2680

Starting and driving 5-71

3. SET/- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces

speed incrementally.

4. DISTANCE switch:

Changes the vehicle’s following dis-

tance:

∙ Long

∙ Middle

∙ Short

5. ICC switch:

Master switch to activate the system.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode display and

indicators

The display is located between the speed-

ometer and tachometer.

1. This indicator indicates the ICC system

status depending on a color:

∙ICC system ON indicator (gray): Indi-

cates that the ICC switch is on.

∙ICC system SET indicator (green):

Indicates that the cruising speed is

set.

∙ICC system warning (yellow): Indi-

cates that there is a malfunction in

the ICC system.

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is dis-

played in km/h.

3. Set distance indicator:

Displays the selected distance be-

tween vehicles set with the distance

switch.

4. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle

in front of you.

LSD2718

5-72 Starting and driving

Operating vehicle-to-vehicle

distance control mode

To turn on the cruise control, quickly push

and release the ICC switch 䊊

A. The ICC sys-

tem ON indicator (gray), set distance indi-

cator and set vehicle speed indicator 䊊

come on in a standby state for setting.

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push the SET/–

switch 䊊

Cand release it. The ICC system set

indicator (green), vehicle ahead detection

indicator, set distance indicator and set ve-

hicle speed indicator 䊊

Bwill come on. Take

your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your

vehicle will maintain the set speed.

When the SET/– switch is pushed under the

following conditions, the system cannot be

set and the ICC indicators will blink for ap-

proximately 2 seconds:

∙ When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)

and a vehicle ahead is not detected

∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

or Manual mode

∙ When the parking brake is applied

∙ When the brakes are operated by the

driver

LSD2681 LSD2682 LSD2743

Starting and driving 5-73

When the SET/– switch is pushed under the

following conditions, the system cannot be

set.

A warning chime will sound and a message

will pop up:

∙ When the VDC system is off (To use the

ICC system, turn on the VDC system.

Push the ICC switch to turn off the ICC

system and reset the ICC switch by

pushing the ICC switch again.)

For additional information about the

VDC system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” in this section.

∙ When ABS or VDC is operating

∙ When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC

system, make sure the wheels are no

longer slipping.)

䊊

1System set display with vehicle ahead

䊊

2System set display without vehicle

ahead

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed

based on the road conditions. The ICC sys-

tem maintains the set vehicle speed, simi-

lar to standard cruise control, as long as no

vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The

ICC system displays the set speed.

Vehicle detected ahead

When a vehicle is detected in the lane

ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve-

hicle by controlling the throttle and apply-

ing the brakes to match the speed of a

slower vehicle ahead. The system then

controls the vehicle speed based on the

speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the

driver selected distance.

NOTE:

∙The stoplights of the vehicle come on

when braking is performed by the ICC

system.

∙When the brake operates, a noise may

be heard. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the ve-

hicle ahead detection indicator comes on.

The ICC system will also display the set

speed and selected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected

When a vehicle is no longer detected

ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-

ates your vehicle to resume the previously

set vehicle speed. The ICC system then

maintains the set speed.

LSD2719

5-74 Starting and driving

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the

vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.

If a vehicle ahead appears during accelera-

tion to the set vehicle speed or any time the

ICC system is in operation, the system con-

trols the distance to that vehicle.

When a vehicle is no longer detected under

approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the sys-

tem will be canceled.

When passing another vehicle, the set

speed indicator 䊊

Bwill flash when the ve-

hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The ve-

hicle detect indicator will turn off when the

area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the

pedal is released, the vehicle will return to

the previously set speed.

Even though your vehicle speed is set in the

ICC system, you can depress the accelera-

tor pedal when it is necessary to accelerate

your vehicle rapidly.

How to change the set vehicle

speed

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following methods:

∙ Push the CANCEL switch. The set ve-

hicle speed indicator will go out.

∙ Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle

speed indicator will go out.

∙ Turn the ICC switch off. The ICC indica-

tors will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use

one of the following methods:

∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push and release the SET/– switch.

∙ Push and hold the RES/+ switch. The set

vehicle speed will increase by approxi-

mately 5 mph (5 km/h).

∙ Push, then quickly release the RES/+

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will increase by approximately

1 mph (1 km/h).

LSD2720

Starting and driving 5-75

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following methods:

∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the SET/– switch and release it.

∙ Push and hold the SET/– switch. The set

vehicle speed will decrease by approxi-

mately 5 mph (5 km/h).

∙ Push, then quickly release the SET/–

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will decrease by approximately

1 mph (1 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the RES/+ switch. The vehicle will

resume the last set cruising speed when

the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h).

How to change the set distance

to the vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be

selected at any time depending on the traf-

fic conditions.

Each time the distance switch 䊊

Ais

pushed, the set distance will change to

long, middle, short and back to long again,

in that sequence.

Distance Approximate distance at

60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]

1. Long 200 (60)

2. Middle 150 (45)

3. Short 100 (30)

∙ The distance to the vehicle ahead will

change according to the vehicle speed.

The higher the vehicle speed, the longer

the distance.

∙ If the engine is stopped, the set distance

becomes “long.” (Each time the engine

is started, the initial setting becomes

“long.”)

LSD2683 LSD2752

5-76 Starting and driving

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle

ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve-

hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the sys-

tem warns the driver with the chime and

ICC system display. Decelerate by depress-

ing the brake pedal to maintain a safe ve-

hicle distance if:

∙ The chime sounds.

∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator

blinks.

The warning chime may not sound in

some cases when there is a short distance

between vehicles. Some examples are:

∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the

same speed and the distance between

vehicles is not changing.

∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling

faster and the distance between ve-

hicles is increasing.

∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.

The warning chime will not sound when:

∙ The vehicle approaches other vehicles

that are parked or moving slowly.

∙ The accelerator pedal is depressed,

overriding the system.

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound

and the system display may blink when

the ICC sensor detects objects on the

side of the vehicle or on the side of the

road. This may cause the ICC system to

decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The

ICC sensor may detect these objects

when the vehicle is driven on winding

roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when

entering or exiting a curve. In these

cases you will have to manually control

the proper distance ahead of your ve-

hicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected

by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or

driving position in the lane) or traffic or ve-

hicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is

being driven with some damage).

Automatic cancellation

A chime sounds under the following condi-

tions and the control is automatically can-

celed:

∙ When the vehicle ahead is not detected

and your vehicle is traveling below the

speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)

∙ When the system judges the vehicle is

at a standstill

∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

position or Manual mode

∙ When the parking brake system is ap-

plied

∙ When the VDC system is turned off

∙ When ABS or VDC operates

∙ When distance measurement be-

comes impaired due to adhesion of dirt

or obstruction to the sensor

∙ When a wheel slips

∙ When the radar signal is temporarily in-

terrupted

Starting and driving 5-77

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the ICC system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The ICC system is primarily intended

for use on straight, dry, open roads

with light traffic. It is not advisable to

use the ICC system in city traffic or

congested areas.

∙ The ICC system will not adapt auto-

matically to road conditions. This sys-

tem should be used in evenly flowing

traffic. Do not use the system on roads

with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in

heavy rain or in fog.

∙ As there is a performance limit to the

distance control function, never rely

solely on the ICC system. This system

does not correct careless, inattentive

or absentminded driving, or over-

come poor visibility in rain, fog, or

other bad weather. Decelerate the ve-

hicle speed by depressing the brake

pedal, depending on the distance to

the vehicle ahead and the surround-

ing circumstances in order to main-

tain a safe distance between vehicles.

∙ If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,

the vehicle decelerates to a standstill

within the limitations of the system.

The system will cancel once it judges

that the vehicle has come to a stand-

still and sound a warning chime. To

prevent the vehicle from moving, the

driver must depress the brake pedal.

∙ Always pay attention to the operation

of the vehicle and be ready to manu-

ally control the proper following dis-

tance. The ICC system may not be able

to maintain the selected distance be-

tween vehicles (following distance) or

selected vehicle speed under some

circumstances.

∙ The system may not detect the ve-

hicle in front of you in certain road or

weather conditions. To avoid acci-

dents, never use the ICC system under

the following conditions:

– On roads where the traffic is heavy

or there are sharp curves

– On slippery road surfaces such as

on ice or snow, etc.

– During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.)

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to

the bumper around the distance

sensor

– On steep downhill roads (the ve-

hicle may go beyond the set ve-

hicle speed and frequent braking

may result in overheating the

brakes)

– On repeated uphill and downhill

roads

– When traffic conditions make it dif-

ficult to keep a proper distance be-

tween vehicles because of fre-

quent acceleration or deceleration

5-78 Starting and driving

– Interference by other radar

sources

∙ Do not use the ICC system if you are

towing a trailer. The system may not

detect a vehicle ahead.

∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a

vehicle or object can unexpectedly

come into the sensor detection zone

and cause automatic braking. Always

stay alert and avoid using the ICC sys-

tem where not recommended in this

warning section.

The radar sensor will not detect the follow-

ing objects:

∙ Stationary and slow moving vehicles

∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

∙ Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel

lane

The sensor generally detects the signals

returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore,

if the sensor cannot detect the reflection

from the vehicle ahead, the ICC system

may not maintain the selected distance.

The following are some conditions in which

the sensor cannot properly detect a ve-

hicle ahead and the system may not oper-

ate properly:

∙ When snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.

∙ When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.

∙ When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of

your vehicle.

The ICC system is designed to automati-

cally check the sensor’s operation within

the limitations of the system.

When the sensor is covered with dirt or is

obstructed, the system will automatically

be canceled. If the sensor is covered with

ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag,

etc., the ICC system may not detect them.

In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle

distance control mode may not cancel and

may not be able to maintain the selected

following distance from the vehicle ahead.

Be sure to check and clean the sensor

regularly.

The detection zone of the radar sensor is

limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the de-

tection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance detection mode to maintain the se-

lected distance from the vehicle ahead.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the

detection zone due to its position within

the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may

not be detected in the same lane ahead if

they are traveling offset from the centerline

of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the

lane ahead may not be detected until the

vehicle has completely moved into the

lane.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn

you by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime. The driver may

have to manually control the proper dis-

tance away from vehicle traveling ahead.

Starting and driving 5-79

SSD0252

5-80 Starting and driving

When driving on some roads, such as wind-

ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads

which are under construction, the radar

sensor may detect vehicles in a different

lane, or may temporarily not detect a ve-

hicle traveling ahead. This may cause the

radar system to decelerate or accelerate

the vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be af-

fected by vehicle operation (steering ma-

neuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.)

or vehicle condition.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn

you by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime unexpectedly. You

will have to manually control the proper

distance away from the vehicle traveling

ahead.

SSD0253

Starting and driving 5-81

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

The following are conditions in which the

ICC system may be temporarily unavail-

able. In these instances, the ICC system

may not cancel and may not be able to

maintain the selected following distance

from the vehicle ahead.

Condition A

Under the following conditions, the ICC system

is automatically canceled. A chime will sound

and the system will not be able to be set:

∙ When the VDC system is turned off

∙ When the VDC or ABS operates

∙ When a vehicle ahead is not detected

and your vehicle is traveling below the

speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)

∙ When the system judges the vehicle is

at a standstill

∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

or Manual mode

∙ When the parking brake is applied

∙ When a wheel slips

∙ When the radar signal is temporarily in-

terrupted

LSD2832

5-82 Starting and driving

Action to take

When the conditions listed above are no

longer present, turn the system off using

the ICC switch. Turn the ICC system back on

to use the system.

Condition B

When the radar sensor area of the front

bumper is covered with dirt or is ob-

structed, the ICC system will automatically

be canceled.

The chime will sound and the “Unavailable:

Front Radar Obstruction” warning mes-

sage will appear in the vehicle information

display.

When driving on roads with limited road

structures (for example, long bridges, des-

erts, snow fields, driving next to long walls),

the system may illuminate the system

warning light (orange) and display the “Un-

available: Front Radar Obstruction” mes-

sage.

Action to take

If the warning message appears, stop the

vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever

in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine

off. When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted, clean the sensor area of the

front bumper and restart the engine. If the

“Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction”

warning message continues to be dis-

played, have the system checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

Condition C

When the ICC system is not operating

properly, a chime sounds and the ICC sys-

tem warning light (orange) will come on.

LSD2685

Starting and driving 5-83

Action to take

If the warning light comes on, park the ve-

hicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,

restart the engine, resume driving and set

the ICC system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or

the indicator stays on, it may indicate

that the system is malfunctioning. Al-

though the vehicle is still drivable under

normal conditions, have the vehicle

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor for the ICC system 䊊

Ais located

on the front of the vehicle.

To keep the ICC system operating properly,

be sure to observe the following:

∙ Always keep the sensor area clean.

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor.

∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the sensor. This could cause failure

or malfunction.

∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the

sensor area (brush guard, etc.) This

could cause failure or malfunction.

∙ Do not alter, remove, or paint the front

bumper. Before customizing or restor-

ing the front bumper, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

LSD2833 LSD2690

5-84 Starting and driving

For Canada

Model: ARS4–B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and with Industry Canada licence-

exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-

ject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-

eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation

est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv-

antes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Infor-

mation:

This equipment complies with FCC radia-

tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-

trolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of 30 cm

between the radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located or

operating in conjunction with any other an-

tenna or transmitter.

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies

pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet

équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec

un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la

source de rayonnement et votre corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed)

CRUISE CONTROL MODE

This mode allows driving at a speed be-

tween 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) with-

out keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

WARNING

∙ In the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, a warning chime

does not sound to warn you if you are

too close to the vehicle ahead, as nei-

ther the presence of the vehicle ahead

nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is

detected.

∙ Pay special attention to the distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle

ahead of you or a collision could occur.

∙ Always confirm the setting in the ICC

system display.

∙ Do not use the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode when

driving under the following

conditions:

– When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed

Starting and driving 5-85

– In heavy traffic or in traffic that var-

ies in speed

– On winding or hilly roads

– On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.)

– In very windy areas

∙ Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control switches

1. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without eras-

ing the set speed

2. RES/+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed

incrementally

3. SET/- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces

speed incrementally

4. ICC switch:

Master switch to activate the system

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode display and

indicators

The display is located in the vehicle infor-

mation display.

1. Cruise indicator:

This indicator indicates the condition of

the ICC system depending on a color.

∙ Cruise control ON indicator (gray): In-

dicates that the ICC switch is on

∙ Cruise control SET indicator (green):

Indicates that the cruising speed is

set

LSD2723 LSD2724

5-86 Starting and driving

∙ Cruise control warning (yellow): Indi-

cates that there is a malfunction in

the ICC system

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:

This indicator indicates the set vehicle

speed. For Canadian models, the

speed is displayed in km/h.

Operating conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, push and hold the ICC

switch 䊊

Afor longer than about 1.5 sec-

onds.

When pushing ICC switch on, the conven-

tional (fixed speed) cruise control mode

display and indicators 䊊

Bare displayed in

the vehicle information display. After you

hold ICC switch on for longer than about

1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns

off. The cruise indicator appears. You can

now set your desired cruising speed. Push-

ing the ICC switch again will turn the sys-

tem completely off. When the ignition

switch is placed in the OFF position, the

system is also automatically turned off.

To use the ICC system again, quickly push

and release the ICC switch (vehicle-to ve-

hicle distance control mode) or push and

hold it (conventional cruise control mode)

again to turn it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging cruise

control, make sure to turn the ICC switch

off when not using the ICC system.

LSD2725

Starting and driving 5-87

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push the SET/-

䊊

Cswitch and release it. (The color of the

cruise indicator changes to green and set

vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take

your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your

vehicle will maintain the set speed.

∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle will return to the pre-

viously set speed.

∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed when going up or down steep

hills. If this happens, manually maintain

vehicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the

following methods:

1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle

speed indicator will turn off.

2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed

indicator will turn off.

3. Turn the ICC switch off. Both the cruise

indicator and vehicle speed indicator

will turn off.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push and release the SET/- switch.

2. Push and hold the SET/+ switch. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

release the switch.

3. Push, then quickly release the SET/+

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will increase by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the SET/- switch and release it.

2. Push and hold the SET/- switch. Re-

lease the switch when the vehicle

slows down to the desired speed.

3. Push, then quickly release the SET/-

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will decrease by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the SET/+ switch. The vehicle will re-

sume the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

LSD2726

5-88 Starting and driving

System temporarily unavailable

A chime sounds under the following condi-

tions and the control is automatically can-

celed:

∙ When the vehicle slows down more

than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set

speed

∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

or manual shift mode

∙ When the parking brake is applied

∙ When the VDC operates (including the

traction control system)

∙ When a wheel slips

When the system is not operating properly,

the chime sounds and the color of the

cruise indicator will change to orange.

Action to take

If the color of the cruise indicator changes

to orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place

and place the shift lever in the P (Park) po-

sition. Turn the engine off, restart the en-

gine, resume driving, and then perform the

setting again.

LSD2684

Starting and driving 5-89

If it is not possible to set or the indicator

stays on, it may indicate that the system

is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle

is still driveable under normal condi-

tions, have the vehicle checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the ProPI-

LOT Assist system could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ ProPILOT Assist is not a self-driving

system. Within the limits of its capa-

bilities, as described in this manual, it

helps the driver with certain driving

activities.

∙ The ProPILOT Assist system is not a

replacement for proper driving proce-

dures and is not designed to correct

careless, inattentive or absent-

minded driving. ProPILOT Assist will

not always steer the vehicle to keep it

in the lane. The ProPILOT Assist sys-

tem is not designed to prevent loss of

control. It is the driver’s responsibility

to stay alert, drive safely, keep the ve-

hicle in the traveling lane, and be in

control of the vehicle at all times.

∙ There are limitations to the ProPILOT

Assist system capability. The ProPI-

LOT Assist system does not function

in all driving, traffic, weather, and road

conditions. It is the driver’s responsi-

bility to stay alert, drive safely, keep

the vehicle in the traveling lane, and

be in control of the vehicle at all times.

∙ The ProPILOT Assist system is only an

aid to assist the driver and is not a

collision warning or avoidance device.

∙ The ProPILOT Assist system is for

highway use only and is not intended

for city driving. Failure to apply the

brakes or steer the vehicle when nec-

essary may result in a serious

accident.

∙ Always observe posted speed limits

and do not set the speed over them.

∙ Never take your hands off the steering

wheel when driving. Always keep your

hands on the steering wheel and drive

your vehicle safely.

∙ Never unfasten your safety belt when

using ProPILOT Assist. Doing so auto-

matically cancels the ProPILOT Assist

system.

PROPILOT™ ASSIST (if so equipped)

5-90 Starting and driving

∙ The ProPILOT Assist system does not

react to stationary and slow moving

vehicles.

∙ Always drive carefully and attentively

when using the ProPILOT Assist sys-

tem. Read and understand the Own-

er’s Manual thoroughly before using

the ProPILOT Assist system. To avoid

serious injury or death, do not rely on

the system to prevent accidents or to

control the vehicle’s speed in emer-

gency situations. Do not use the Pro-

PILOT Assist system except in appro-

priate road and traffic conditions

The ProPILOT Assist system is intended to

enhance the operation of the vehicle when

following a vehicle traveling in the same

lane and direction.

The ProPILOT Assist system uses a multi-

sensing front camera 䊊

Ainstalled behind

the windshield and a radar sensor located

on the front of the vehicle 䊊

Bto measure

the distance to the vehicle ahead in the

same lane and to monitor the lane mark-

ers. If the vehicle detects a slower moving

vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the

vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows

the vehicle in front at the selected distance.

The system will also help keep the vehicle

centered in the traveling lane when clear

lane markings are detected.

LSD2799

Starting and driving 5-91

1. Steering-wheel-mounted control (left)

2. Vehicle information display

3. Steering-wheel-mounted control

(right)

4. ProPILOT Assist switch

PROPILOT™ ASSIST SYSTEM

OPERATION

The ProPILOT Assist system has the follow-

ing two functions:

1. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

The ICC system can be set to one of

two cruise control modes:

∙Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode: For cruising at a pre-

set speed

NOTE:

Steering assist is not available in the

conventional (fixed speed) cruise control

mode.

LSD2800

5-92 Starting and driving

∙Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode: The ICC system maintains a

selected distance from the vehicle in

front of you within the speed range of

0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the

set speed. The set speed can be se-

lected by the driver between 20 to

90 mph (32 to 144 km/h). When the

vehicle ahead slows to a stop, your

vehicle gradually decelerates to a

standstill. When the vehicle is

stopped, the ICC system maintains

braking force to keep your vehicle

stopped.

NOTE:

When your vehicle is stopped for less

than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead

begins to move, your vehicle will start

moving again automatically.

– When the vehicle ahead begins to

move forward, push the RES+ switch

on the steering-wheel-mounted

control or lightly depress the accel-

erator pedal to release the brake.

The ICC system will restart to main-

tain a selected distance from the ve-

hicle in front of you.

– When no vehicle is detected ahead

within the driver selected distance,

the vehicle travels at the speed set

by the driver. The speed must be

above 20 mph (32 km/h) to use this

function.

NOTE:

Even if the Automatic Emergency Brak-

ing (AEB) setting is turned off by the

driver using the “Settings” menu in the

vehicle information display, AEB will be

automatically turned on when ICC is

used.

2. Steering Assist

The Steering Assist function controls

the steering system to help keep your

vehicle within the traveling lane.

When there is no vehicle ahead, Steer-

ing Assist is not available at speeds

under 37 mph (60 km/h).

ProPILOT™ Assist switches

1. DISTANCE switch:

– Long

– Middle

– Short

2. RES+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases

speed incrementally

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the ProPILOT Assist sys-

tem

LSD2801

Starting and driving 5-93

4. SET- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces

speed incrementally

5. ProPILOT Assist switch:

Turns the ProPILOT Assist system on or

off

6. Steering Assist switch:

Turns the Steering Assist function on

or off

The ProPILOT™ Assist system

display and indicators

1. Lane marker indicator

Indicates whether the system detects

lane markers

– No lane markers displayed: Steering

Assist is turned off

– Lane marker indicator (gray): No lane

markers detected

– Lane marker indicator (green): Lane

markers detected

– Lane marker indicator (yellow): Lane

departure is detected

2. Set distance indicator

Displays the selected distance

3. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

Indicates whether the system detects

a vehicle in front of you

4. Steering Assist indicator

Indicates the status of the Steering As-

sist function by the color of the indica-

tor

– Steering Assist indicator (gray):

Steering Assist standby

– Steering Assist indicator (green):

Steering Assist active

– Steering Assist indicator (orange):

Steering Assist malfunction

5. ProPILOT Assist activation

Displays once the ProPILOT Assist sys-

tem is activated

LSD2807 LSD2802

5-94 Starting and driving

6. Steering Assist status

indicator/warning

Displays the status of the Steering As-

sist by the color of the

indicator/warning

– No Steering Assist status indicator

displayed: Steering Assist is turned

off

– Steering Assist indicator (gray):

Steering Assist standby

– Steering Assist indicator (green):

Steering Assist active

– Steering Assist indicator (yellow):

Steering Assist malfunction

7. Speed control status

indicator/warning

Displays the status of speed control by

the color and shape of the

indicator/warning

– Speed control status

indicator/warning (gray): ICC

standby

– Speed control status

indicator/warning (solid

green ): ICC (distance control

mode) is active (vehicle detected

ahead). Your vehicle matches the

speed of the vehicle ahead.

– Speed control status

indicator/warning (green

outline ): ICC (maintain speed

control mode) is active (no vehicle

detected ahead). Your vehicle main-

tains the driver-selected set speed.

– Speed control status

indicator/warning (orange): Indi-

cates an ICC malfunction

8. Set vehicle speed indicator

Indicates the set vehicle speed

9. ProPILOT Assist status indicator

Indicates the status of the ProPILOT

Assist system by the color of the indi-

cator

– ProPILOT Assist status indicator

(white): ProPILOT Assist is on but in

standby.

– ProPILOT Assist status indicator

(blue): ProPILOT Assist active

TURNING THE CONVENTIONAL

(fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL

MODE ON

NOTE:

ProPILOT™ Assist provides no approach

warnings, automatic braking, or steering

assist in the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode.

To choose the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, push and hold the

ProPILOT Assist switch for longer than ap-

proximately 1.5 seconds. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode” in this section.

Starting and driving 5-95

OPERATING PROPILOT™ ASSIST

1. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch 䊊

This turns on the ProPILOT Assist sys-

tem and displays the status of the Pro-

PILOT Assist system on the vehicle in-

formation display 䊊

2. Accelerate or decelerate your vehicle

to the desired speed.

3. Push the SET- switch 䊊

C. The ProPILOT

Assist system begins to automatically

maintain the set speed. The ProPILOT

Assist activation indicator 䊊

Dand Pro-

PILOT Assist status indicator 䊊

Eillumi-

nate (blue). When a vehicle ahead is

traveling at a speed of 20 mph

(32 km/h) or below and the SET- switch

is pushed, the set speed of your vehicle

is 20 mph (32 km/h).

NOTE:

Turning the ProPILOT Assist system on

will turn on the Intelligent Lane Interven-

tion (I-LI) system at the same time. For

additional information, refer to “Intelli-

gent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in this sec-

tion.

When the SET- switch is pushed under the

following conditions, the ProPILOT Assist

system cannot be set and the set vehicle

speed indicator 䊊

1blinks for approximately

2 seconds:

∙ When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)

and the vehicle ahead is not detected

∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

position or manual shift mode

∙ When the parking brake is applied

∙ When the brakes are operated by the

driver

LSD2808 LSD2810 LSD2826

5-96 Starting and driving

∙ When the VDC system is off. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) system” in this sec-

tion.

∙ When the VDC system (including the

traction control system) is operating

∙ When a wheel is slipping

∙ When any door is open

∙ When the driver’s seat belt is not fas-

tened

How to change the set vehicle

speed

The set vehicle speed can be adjusted.

To change to a faster cruising speed:

∙ Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set

vehicle speed increases by approxi-

mately 5 mph (5 km/h).

∙ Push, then quickly release, the RES+

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed increases by approximately

1 mph (1 km/h).

To change to a slower cruising speed:

∙ Push and hold the SET- switch. The set

vehicle speed decreases by approxi-

mately 5 mph (5 km/h).

∙ Push, then quickly release, the SET-

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed decreases by approximately

1 mph (1 km/h).

How to momentarily accelerate or

decelerate

∙ Depress the accelerator pedal when

acceleration is required. Release the ac-

celerator pedal to resume the previ-

ously set vehicle speed.

∙ Depress the brake pedal when decel-

eration is required. Control by the ProPI-

LOT™ Assist system is canceled. Push

the RES+ switch to resume the previ-

ously set vehicle speed.

LSD2827

Starting and driving 5-97

WARNING

When the accelerator pedal is de-

pressed and you are approaching the

vehicle ahead, the ICC system will nei-

ther control the brake nor warn the

driver with the chime and display. The

driver must manually control the ve-

hicle speed to maintain a safe distance

to the vehicle ahead. Failure to do so

could result in severe personal injury or

death.

NOTE:

When you accelerate by depressing the

accelerator pedal or decelerate by push-

ing the SET- switch and the vehicle trav-

els faster than the speed set by the

driver, the set speed vehicle indicator will

blink.

How to change the set distance

to the vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be

selected at any time.

Each time the DISTANCE switch 䊊

Ais

pushed, the set distance will change to

long, middle, short and back to long again

in that sequence.

LSD2805

5-98 Starting and driving

Distance Approximate distance at

60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]

1. Long 200 (60)

2. Middle 150 (45)

3. Short 90 (30)

∙ The distance to the vehicle ahead

changes automatically according to

the vehicle speed. The higher the ve-

hicle speed, the longer the distance.

∙ If the engine is stopped, the set distance

becomes “long.” (Each time the engine

is started, the initial setting becomes

“long.”)

LSD2806

Starting and driving 5-99

1. Steering-wheel-mounted control

(right)

2. Vehicle information display

3. Steering Assist switch

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

STEERING ASSIST

Use the following methods to enable or

disable the Steering Assist.

Steering Assist switch:

To turn the Steering Assist on or off, push

the Steering Assist switch 䊊

3on the instru-

ment panel.

NOTE:

∙When the Steering Assist switch is

used to turn the system on or off, the

system remembers the setting even

if the ignition switch is cycled. The

switch must be pushed again to

change the setting to on or off.

∙The Steering Assist switch changes

the status of the “Steering Assist” se-

lection made in the “Settings” screen

in the vehicle information display.

LSD2813

5-100 Starting and driving

Setting in the vehicle information dis-

play:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel 䊊

1until “Settings” displays in the

vehicle information display 䊊

2and then

press the OK button 䊊

2. Use the button 䊊

1to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK

button 䊊

3. Use the button 䊊

1to select “Driv-

ing Aids.” Then press the OK button 䊊

4. Select “Steering Assist” and press the

OK button 䊊

NOTE:

∙When the Cruise screen is displayed

on the vehicle information display,

press the OK button on the steering

wheel to call up the “Driving Aids” set-

ting display.

∙When enabling/disabling the system

through the vehicle information dis-

play or when pressing the Steering

Assist switch, the system retains the

current settings even if the engine is

restarted.

How to cancel the ProPILOT™

Assist system

To cancel the ProPILOT Assist system, use

one of the following methods:

∙ Push the CANCEL switch.

∙ Tap the brake pedal (except at a stand-

still).

∙ Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn

the system off. The ProPILOT Assist sta-

tus indicator will go out.

When the ProPILOT Assist system is can-

celed while the vehicle is stopped, the elec-

tronic parking brake is automatically acti-

vated.

WARNING

When you leave the vehicle, make sure

to push the ProPILOT Assist switch to

turn the system off, place the shift lever

in the P (Park) position, and turn the

engine off.

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL

(ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT™

Assist)

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the ICC sys-

tem could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The ICC system is only an aid to assist

the driver and is not a collision warn-

ing or avoidance device. It is for high-

way use only and it is not intended for

congested areas or city driving. It is

the driver’s responsibility to stay alert,

drive safely, and be in control of the

vehicle at all times.

Starting and driving 5-101

∙ There are limitations to the ICC sys-

tem capability. The ICC system does

not function in all driving, traffic,

weather, and road conditions. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert,

drive safely, keep the vehicle in the

traveling lane, and be in control of the

vehicle at all times.

∙ Always observe posted speed limits

and do not set the speed over them.

∙ The ICC system does not react to sta-

tionary and slow moving vehicles.

∙ Always drive carefully and attentively

when using the ICC system. Read and

understand the Owner’s Manual thor-

oughly before using the ICC system.

To avoid serious injury or death, do

not rely on the system to prevent ac-

cidents or to control the vehicle’s

speed in emergency situations. Do

not use the ICC system except in ap-

propriate road and traffic conditions.

ICC system operation

The ICC system is designed to maintain a

selected distance from the vehicle in front

of you and can reduce the speed to match

a slower vehicle ahead. The system decel-

erates the vehicle as necessary and if the

vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle

decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC

system can only apply up to 40% of the

vehicle’s total braking power. This system

should only be used when traffic condi-

tions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly

constant or when vehicle speeds change

gradually. If a vehicle moves into the travel-

ing lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling

ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance be-

tween vehicles may become closer be-

cause the ICC system cannot decelerate

the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs,

the ICC system sounds a warning chime

and blinks the system display to notify the

driver to take necessary action.

The ICC system cancels and a warning

chime sounds if the speed is below ap-

proximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle

is not detected ahead.

The ICC system operates as follows:

∙ When there are no vehicles traveling

ahead, the ICC system maintains the

speed set by the driver. The set speed

range is between approximately 20 and

90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).

∙ When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,

the ICC system adjusts the speed to

maintain the distance, selected by the

driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the ve-

hicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle

decelerates to a standstill. Once your

vehicle stops, the ICC system keeps the

vehicle stopped.

∙ When your vehicle is at a standstill for

more than 3 seconds and the vehicle

ahead begins to accelerate, push the

RES+ switch or lightly depress the accel-

erator pedal. The ICC system starts to

follow the vehicle ahead.

∙ When the vehicle traveling ahead

moves to a different traveling lane, the

ICC system accelerates and maintains

vehicle speed up to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle

speed or warn you when you approach

stationary and slow moving vehicles. You

must pay attention to vehicle operation to

maintain proper distance from vehicles

ahead when approaching toll gates or traf-

fic congestion.

5-102 Starting and driving

When driving on the freeway at a set speed

and approaching a slower traveling vehicle

ahead, the ICC system adjusts the speed to

maintain the distance, selected by the

driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle

ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway,

the ICC system accelerates and maintains

the speed up to the set speed. Pay atten-

tion to the driving operation to maintain

control of the vehicle as it accelerates to

the set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed on winding or hilly roads. If this oc-

curs, you will have to manually control the

vehicle speed.

Normally when controlling the distance to

a vehicle ahead, the system automatically

accelerates or decelerates your vehicle ac-

cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead.

Depress the accelerator to properly accel-

erate your vehicle when acceleration is re-

quired for a lane change. Depress the brake

pedal when deceleration is required to

maintain a safe distance to the vehicle

ahead due to sudden braking or if a vehicle

cuts in. Always stay alert when using the

ICC system.

No vehicle detected ahead

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed

based on the road conditions. The ICC sys-

tem maintains the set vehicle speed, simi-

lar to standard cruise control, as long as no

vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The

ICC system displays the set speed.

SSD0254

System set display with no vehicle

detected ahead

LSD2803

Starting and driving 5-103

Vehicle detected ahead

When a vehicle is detected in the lane

ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve-

hicle by controlling the throttle and apply-

ing the brakes to match the speed of a

slower vehicle ahead. The ICC system then

controls the vehicle speed based on the

speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the

driver selected distance.

NOTE:

∙The stoplights of the vehicle come on

when braking is performed by the ICC

system.

∙When the brake is applied by the sys-

tem, a noise may be heard. This is not

a malfunction.

When the ICC system detects a vehicle

ahead, the vehicle ahead detection indica-

tor and the speed control status indicator

(distance control mode) illuminates (solid

green ).

Vehicle ahead stops

When the vehicle ahead decelerates to

stop, your vehicle decelerates to a stand-

still. Once your vehicle stops, the ICC sys-

tem automatically applies the brakes to

keep the vehicle stopped. When your ve-

hicle is at a standstill, the “(RES+) Press to

start” message is displayed on the vehicle

information display.

NOTE:

When your vehicle stops for less than

3 seconds, your vehicle will automati-

cally follow the vehicle as it accelerates

from a stop.

Vehicle ahead accelerates

When your vehicle is stopped and the ve-

hicle ahead begins to accelerate, push the

RES+ switch or lightly depress the accelera-

tor pedal. The ICC system starts to follow

the vehicle ahead.

Vehicle ahead not detected

When a vehicle is no longer detected

ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-

ates your vehicle to resume the previously

set vehicle speed. The ICC system then

maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the

vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off

and speed control status indicator (main-

tain speed control mode) illuminates

(green outline ).

The ICC system gradually accelerates to

the set speed, but you can depress the

accelerator pedal to quickly accelerate.

When a vehicle is no longer detected and

your vehicle is traveling under approxi-

mately 15 mph (24 km/h), the ICC system

automatically cancels.

System set display with vehicle ahead

LSD2804

5-104 Starting and driving

When passing another vehicle, the set

speed indicator 䊊

Bflashes when the ve-

hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The ve-

hicle ahead detection indicator turns off

when the area ahead of the vehicle is open.

When the pedal is released, the vehicle re-

turns to the previously set speed. Even

though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC

system, you can depress the accelerator

pedal when it is necessary to accelerate

your vehicle rapidly.

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle

ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve-

hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the sys-

tem warns the driver with the chime and

ICC system display. Decelerate by depress-

ing the brake pedal to maintain a safe ve-

hicle distance if:

∙ The chime sounds.

∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator

and set distance indicator blink.

∙ You judge it necessary to maintain a

safe distance.

The warning chime may not sound in

some cases when there is a short distance

between vehicles. Some examples are:

∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the

same speed and the distance between

vehicles is not changing.

∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling

faster and the distance between ve-

hicles is increasing.

∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.

The warning chime will not sound when:

∙ Your vehicle approaches other vehicles

that are parked or moving slowly.

∙ The accelerator pedal is depressed,

overriding the system.

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound

and the system display may flash when

the radar sensor detects objects on the

side of the vehicle or on the side of the

road. This may cause the ICC system to

decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The

radar sensor may detect these objects

when the vehicle is driven on winding,

narrow, or hilly roads or when the vehicle

is entering or exiting a curve. In these

cases, you will have to manually control

the proper distance ahead of your ve-

hicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected

by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or

driving position in the lane) or traffic or ve-

hicle conditions (for example, if a vehicle is

being driven with some damage).

LSD2720

Starting and driving 5-105

ICC system limitations

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the ICC system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death:

∙ The ICC system is primarily intended

for use on straight, dry, open roads

with light traffic. It is not advisable to

use the ICC system in city traffic or

congested areas.

∙ The ICC system will not adapt auto-

matically to road conditions. This sys-

tem should be used in evenly flowing

traffic. Do not use the system on roads

with sharp curves or on icy roads, in

heavy rain or in fog.

∙ As there is a performance limit to the

distance control function, never rely

solely on the ICC system. This system

does not correct careless, inattentive

or absentminded driving or overcome

poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad

weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed

by depressing the brake pedal, de-

pending on the distance to the vehicle

ahead and the surrounding circum-

stances in order to maintain a safe

distance between vehicles.

∙ When the ICC system automatically

brings the car to a stop, your vehicle

can automatically accelerate if the ve-

hicle is stopped for less than approxi-

mately 3 seconds. Be prepared to stop

your vehicle if necessary.

∙ Always pay attention to the operation

of the vehicle and be ready to manu-

ally control the proper following dis-

tance. The ICC system may not be able

to maintain the selected distance be-

tween vehicles (following distance) or

selected vehicle speed under some

circumstances.

∙ The system may not detect the ve-

hicle in front of you in certain road or

weather conditions. To avoid acci-

dents, never use the ICC system under

the following conditions:

– On roads with heavy, high-speed

traffic or sharp curves

– On slippery road surfaces such as

on ice or snow, etc.

– During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.)

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to

the bumper around the distance

sensor

– On steep downhill roads (the ve-

hicle may go beyond the set ve-

hicle speed and frequent braking

may result in overheating the

brakes)

– On repeated uphill and downhill

roads

– When traffic conditions make it dif-

ficult to keep a proper distance be-

tween vehicles because of fre-

quent acceleration or deceleration

5-106 Starting and driving

– Interference by other radar

sources.

∙ Do not use the ICC system if you are

towing a trailer. The system may not

detect a vehicle ahead.

∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a

vehicle or object can unexpectedly

come into the sensor detection zone

and cause automatic braking. Always

stay alert and avoid using the ICC sys-

tem where not recommended in this

warning section.

The ICC system will not detect the following

objects:

∙ Stationary or slow moving vehicles

∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

∙ Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel

lane

The following are some conditions in which

the radar sensor cannot properly detect a

vehicle ahead and the system may not op-

erate properly:

∙ When the sensor detection is reduced

(conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust

storms, sandstorms, and road spray

from other vehicles)

∙ Driving on a steep downhill slope or

roads with sharp curves

∙ Driving on a bumpy road surface, such

as an uneven dirt road

∙ If dirt, ice, snow or other material is cov-

ering the radar sensor area

∙ A complicated-shaped vehicle such as

a car carrier trailer or flatbed

truck/trailer is near the vehicle ahead.

∙ Interference by other radar sources

∙ When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.

∙ When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of

your vehicle.

The ICC system is designed to automati-

cally check the radar sensor’s operation

within the limitations of the system.

The detection zone of the radar sensor is

limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the de-

tection zone for the ICC system to maintain

the selected distance from the vehicle

ahead. A vehicle ahead may move outside

of the detection zone due to its position

within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles

may not be detected in the same lane

ahead if they are traveling offset from the

center line of the lane. A vehicle that is en-

tering the lane ahead may not be detected

until the vehicle has completely moved into

the lane.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you

by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime. The driver may have

to manually control the proper distance

away from the vehicle traveling ahead.

The ICC system (with ProPILOT™ Assist)

uses a multi-sensing front camera. The fol-

lowing are some conditions in which the

camera may not properly detect a vehicle

and detection of a vehicle ahead may be

delayed:

∙ Poor visibility (conditions such as rain,

snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms,

and road spray from other vehicles)

Starting and driving 5-107

∙ The camera area of the windshield is

fogged up or covered with dirt, water

drops, ice, snow, etc.

∙ Strong light (for example, sunlight or

high beams from oncoming vehicles)

enters the front camera

∙ Strong light causes the area around the

pedestrian to be cast in a shadow, mak-

ing it difficult to see

∙ A sudden change in brightness occurs

(for example, when the vehicle enters or

exits a tunnel or shaded area or light-

ning flashes) SSD0252

5-108 Starting and driving

When driving on some roads, such as wind-

ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads

which are under construction, the radar

sensor may detect vehicles in a different

lane, or may temporarily not detect a ve-

hicle traveling ahead. This may cause the

radar system to decelerate or accelerate

the vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be af-

fected by vehicle operation (steering ma-

neuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.)

or vehicle condition.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you

by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will

have to manually control the proper dis-

tance away from the vehicle traveling

ahead.

Automatic cancellation

The following are conditions in which the

ICC system may be temporarily unavail-

able. In these instances, the ICC system

may not cancel and may not be able to

maintain the selected following distance

from the vehicle ahead.

Condition A

Under the following conditions, the ICC system

is automatically canceled. A chime will sound

and the system will not be able to be set:

∙ Any door is open.

∙ The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

∙ The vehicle ahead is not detected and

your vehicle is traveling below the

speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).

∙ Your vehicle has been stopped by the

ICC system for approximately 3 minutes

or longer.

∙ The shift lever is not in the D (Drive) po-

sition or manual shift mode.

∙ The electronic parking brake is applied.

∙ The VDC system is turned off.

∙ The AEB applies harder braking.

∙ VDC (including the traction control sys-

tem) operates.

∙ A wheel slips.

∙ When distance measurement be-

comes impaired due to adhesion of dirt

or obstruction to the sensor.

∙ When the radar signal is temporarily in-

terrupted.

SSD0253

Starting and driving 5-109

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are no

longer present, turn the system off using

the ProPILOT™ Assist switch. Turn the Pro-

PILOT Assist system back on to use the

system.

NOTE:

When the ICC system is canceled under

the following conditions at a standstill,

the electronic parking brake is auto-

matically activated:

∙Any door is open.

∙The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

∙Your vehicle has been stopped by the

ICC system for approximately 3 min-

utes or longer.

∙The shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

position or manual shift mode.

∙The VDC system is turned off.

∙When distance measurement be-

comes impaired due to adhesion of

dirt or obstruction to the sensor.

∙When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted.

Condition B

When the radar sensor of the front bumper

is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC

system will automatically be canceled.

The chime will sound and the “Unavailable:

Front Radar Obstruction” warning mes-

sage will appear in the vehicle information

display.

Action to take:

If the warning message appears, stop the

vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever

in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine

off. When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted, clean the sensor area of the

front bumper and restart the engine. If the

“Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction”

warning message continues to be dis-

played, have the system checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

Condition C

When driving on roads with limited road

structures or buildings (for example, long

bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to

long walls), the system may illuminate the

system warning light and display the “Un-

available: Front Radar Obstruction” mes-

sage.

Action to take:

When the above driving conditions no lon-

ger exist, turn the system back on.

ICC system malfunction

If the ICC system malfunctions, it will be

turned off automatically, a chime will

sound, and the speed control status warn-

ing (orange) will illuminate.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, stop the ve-

hicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,

restart the engine and set the ICC system

again. If it is not possible to set the ICC

system or the indicator stays on, it may be

a malfunction. Although the normal driving

can be continued, the ICC system should

be inspected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ICC sensor maintenance

The radar sensor is located on the front of

the vehicle.

To keep the ICC system operating properly,

be sure to observe the following:

∙ Always keep the sensor area clean.

5-110 Starting and driving

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor.

∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the sensor. This could cause failure

or malfunction.

∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the

sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This

could cause failure or malfunction.

∙ Do not alter, remove, or paint the front

bumper.

Before customizing or restoring the front

bumper, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

The camera sensor is located above the

inside mirror.

To keep the proper operation of the sys-

tems and prevent a system malfunction,

be sure to observe the following:

∙ Always keep the windshield clean.

∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the camera unit.

∙ Do not place reflective materials, such

as white paper or a mirror, on the instru-

ment panel. The reflection of sunlight

may adversely affect the camera unit’s

capability of detecting the lane mark-

ers.

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas

around the camera unit. Do not touch

the camera lens or remove the screw

located on the camera unit.

If the camera unit is damaged due to an

accident, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

STEERING ASSIST

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Steer-

ing Assist could result in serious injury

or death.

∙ The Steering Assist is not a replace-

ment for proper driving procedures

and is not designed to correct care-

less, inattentive or absent-minded

driving. The Steering Assist will not al-

ways steer the vehicle to keep it in the

lane. It is not designed to prevent loss

of control. It is the driver’s responsibil-

ity to stay alert, drive safely, keep the

vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in

control of the vehicle at all times.

∙ As there is a performance limit to the

Steering Assist’s capability, never rely

solely on the system. The Steering As-

sist does not function in all driving,

traffic, weather, and road conditions.

Always drive safely, pay attention to

the operation of the vehicle, and

manually control your vehicle

appropriately.

∙ The Steering Assist is intended for use

on well-developed freeways or high-

ways with gentle (moderate) curves.

To avoid risk of an accident, do not use

this system on local or non-highway

roads.

Starting and driving 5-111

∙ The Steering Assist only steers the ve-

hicle to maintain its position in the

center of a lane. The vehicle will not

steer to avoid objects in the road in

front of the vehicle or to avoid a ve-

hicle moving into your lane.

∙ It is the driver’s responsibility to stay

alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in

the traveling lane, and be in control of

the vehicle at all times. Never take

your hands off the steering wheel

when driving. Always keep your hands

on the steering wheel and drive your

vehicle safely.

∙ Always drive carefully and attentively

when using the Steering Assist. Read

and understand the Owner’s Manual

thoroughly before using the Steering

Assist. To avoid serious injury or

death, do not rely on the system to

prevent accidents or to control the ve-

hicle’s speed in emergency situations.

Do not use the Steering Assist except

in appropriate road and traffic

conditions.

Steering Assist operation

The Steering Assist controls the steering

system to help keep your vehicle near the

center of the lane when driving. The Steer-

ing Assist is combined with the Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system. For additional

information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Con-

trol (ICC) (with ProPILOT™ Assist)” in this

section.

The Steering Assist can be activated when

the following conditions are met:

∙ The ICC system is activated.

∙ Lane markers on both sides are clearly

detected.

∙ A vehicle ahead is detected (when the

vehicle is driven at speeds under

37 mph [60 km/h])

∙ The driver grips the steering wheel.

∙ The vehicle is driven at the center of the

lane.

∙ The turn signals are not operated.

∙ The windshield wiper is not operated in

the low (LO) or high (HI) speed operation

(the steering assist function is disabled

after the wiper operates for approxi-

mately 10 seconds).

Steering Assist display and

indicators

1. Steering Assist status indicator/

warning

Displays the status of the Steering As-

sist by the color of the

indicator/warning

∙ Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steer-

ing Assist standby

∙ Steering Assist indicator (green):

Steering Assist active

∙ Steering Assist indicator (yellow):

Steering Assist malfunction

LSD2809

5-112 Starting and driving

2. Steering Assist indicator

Indicates the status of the Steering As-

sist by the color of the indicator

∙ Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steer-

ing Assist standby

∙ Steering Assist indicator (green):

Steering Assist active

3. Lane marker indicator

Indicates whether the system detects

the lane marker

∙ Lane marker indicator (gray): Lane

markers not detected

∙ Lane marker indicator (green): Lane

markers detected

∙ Lane marker indicator (yellow): Lane

departure is detected

When the Steering Assist is in operation,

the Steering Assist status indicator 䊊

1, the

Steering Assist indicator 䊊

2, and the lane

marker indicator 䊊

3on the vehicle infor-

mation display turn green. A chime sounds

when the Steering Assist initially activates.

When the Steering Assist deactivates, the

Steering Assist status indicator 䊊

1, the

Steering Assist indicator 䊊

2, and the lane

marker indicator 䊊

3on the vehicle infor-

mation display turn gray and a chime

sounds twice.

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)

When a curve or strong cross wind exceeds

the capabilities of the Steering Assist and

your vehicle approaches either the left or

the right side of the traveling lane, a warn-

ing chime sounds and the I-LI indicator

light (orange) on the instrument panel

flashes to alert the driver. Then, the I-LI sys-

tem automatically applies the brakes for a

short period of time to help assist the

driver to return the vehicle to the center of

the traveling lane. This action is in addition

to any Steering Assist actions.

Starting and driving 5-113

Hands on detection

When the Steering Assist is activated, it

monitors the driver’s steering wheel opera-

tion.

If the steering wheel is not operated or the

driver takes his/her hands off the steering

wheel for a period of time, the warning 䊊

appears in the vehicle information display.

If the driver does not operate the steering

wheel after the warning has been dis-

played, an audible alert sounds and the

warning flashes in the vehicle information

display, followed by a quick brake applica-

tion to request the driver to take control of

the vehicle again.

If the driver still does not respond, the Pro-

PILOT™ Assist turns on the hazard flasher

and slows the vehicle to a complete stop.

The driver can cancel the deceleration at

any time by steering, braking, accelerating,

or operating the ProPILOT Assist switch.

LSD2715

5-114 Starting and driving

WARNING

Steering Assist is not a system for a

hands-free driving. Always keep your

hands on the steering wheel and drive

your vehicle safely. Failure to do so

could cause a collision resulting in seri-

ous personal injury or death.

NOTE:

If the driver softly touches (instead of

firmly grips) the steering wheel, the

Steering Assist may not detect the steer-

ing wheel operation and the warning

may be displayed. When the driver holds

and operates the steering wheel again,

the warning turns off and the Steering

Assist resumes automatically.

Steering Assist limitations

WARNING

∙ In the following situations, the cam-

era may not detect lane markers cor-

rectly or may detect lane markers in-

correctly and the Steering Assist may

not operate properly:

– When driving on roads where there

are multiple parallel lane markers,

lane markers that are faded or not

painted clearly, nonstandard lane

markers, or lane markers covered

with water, dirt, snow, etc.

– When driving on roads with dis-

continued lane markers

– When driving on roads with a wid-

ening or narrowing lane width

– When driving on roads where there

are multiple lanes or unclear lane

markers due to road construction

– When driving on roads where there

are sharply contrasting objects,

such as shadows, snow, water,

wheel ruts, seams, or lines remain-

ing after road repairs (the Steering

Assist could detect these items as

lane markers)

– When driving on roads where the

traveling lane merges or separates

∙ Do not use the Steering Assist under

the following conditions because the

system may not properly detect lane

markers. Doing so could cause a loss

of vehicle control and result in an

accident.

– During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, dust, etc.)

– When rain, snow, sand, etc., is

thrown up by the wheels of other

vehicles

– When dirt, oil, ice, snow, water, or

another object adheres to the

camera unit

– When the lens of the camera unit is

foggy

– When strong light (for example,

sunlight or high beams from on-

coming vehicles) shines on the

camera

– When the headlights are not bright

due to dirt on the lens or the head-

lights are off in tunnels or darkness

– When a sudden change in bright-

ness occurs (for example, when the

vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or is

under a bridge)

Starting and driving 5-115

– When driving on roads where the

traveling lane merges or separates

or where there are temporary lane

markers because of road

construction

– When there is a lane closure due to

road repairs

– When driving on a bumpy road sur-

face, such as an uneven dirt road

– When driving on sharp curves or

winding roads

– When driving on repeated uphill

and downhill roads

∙ Do not use the Steering Assist under

the following conditions because the

system will not operate properly:

– When driving with a tire that is not

within normal tire conditions (for

example, tire wear, abnormal tire

pressure, installation of a spare

tire, tire chains, nonstandard

wheels)

– When the vehicle is equipped with

non-original brake or suspension

parts

– When an object such as a sticker or

cargo obstructs the camera

– When excessively heavy baggage

is loaded in the rear seat or lug-

gage area of your vehicle

– When the vehicle load capacity is

exceeded

– When towing a trailer or other

vehicle

∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the beep

may not be heard.

∙ For the ProPILOT™ Assist system to

operate properly, the windshield in

front of the camera must be clean. Re-

place worn wiper blades. The correct

size wiper blades must be used to

help make sure the windshield is kept

clean. Only use Genuine NISSAN wiper

blades, or equivalent wiper blades,

that are specifically designed for use

on your vehicle model and model

year. It is recommended that you visit

your NISSAN dealer for the correct

parts for your vehicle.

Steering Assist temporary

standby

Automatic standby due to driving opera-

tion:

When the driver activates the turn signal,

the Steering Assist is temporarily placed in

a standby mode. (The Steering Assist re-

starts automatically when the operating

conditions are met again.)

Automatic standby:

In the following cases, a warning message

is displayed along with the chime, and the

Steering Assist is placed in a temporary

standby mode. (The Steering Assist re-

starts automatically when the operating

conditions are met again.)

∙ When lane markers on both sides are

no longer detected

∙ When a vehicle ahead is no longer de-

tected under approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h)

5-116 Starting and driving

Steering Assist cancel

Under the following conditions, the Steer-

ing Assist cancels, and the Steering Assist

status indicator and the Steering Assist in-

dicator turn off:

∙ When unusual lane markers appear in

the traveling lane or when the lane

marker cannot be correctly detected

for some time due to certain conditions

(for example, a snow rut, the reflection

of light on a rainy day, the presence of

several unclear lane markers)

∙ When the windshield wiper operates in

the low (LO) or high (HI) speed operation

(the Steering Assist is disabled when

the wiper operates for more than ap-

proximately 10 seconds)

Action to take:

Turn the ICC system off using the CANCEL

switch. When the conditions listed above

are no longer present, turn the ICC system

on again.

Steering Assist malfunction

When the system malfunctions, it turns off

automatically. The Steering Assist status

warning illuminates (orange). A chime may

sound depending on the situation.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-

gine off, restart the engine, resume driving,

and set the Intelligent Cruise Control sys-

tem again. If the warning (orange) contin-

ues to illuminate, the Steering Assist is mal-

functioning. Although the vehicle is still

drivable under normal conditions, have the

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Steering Assist maintenance

The camera sensor is located above the

inside mirror.

To keep the proper operation of the system

and prevent a system malfunction, be sure

to observe the following:

∙ Always keep the windshield clean.

∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the camera unit.

∙ Do not place reflective materials, such

as white paper or a mirror, on the instru-

ment panel. The reflection of sunlight

may adversely affect the camera unit’s

capability of detecting the lane mark-

ers.

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas

around the camera unit. Do not touch

the camera lens or remove the screw

located on the camera unit.

If the camera unit is damaged due to an

accident, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-117

For Canada

Model: ARS4–B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and with Industry Canada licence-

exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-

ject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-

eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation

est autorisee aux deux conditions suiv-

antes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioelectrique subi,

meme si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Infor-

mation:

This equipment complies with FCC radia-

tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-

trolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of 30 cm

between the radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located or

operating in conjunction with any other an-

tenna or transmitter.

Cet equipement est conforme aux limites

d’exposition aux rayonnements IC etablies

pour un environnement non controle. Cet

equipement doit etre installe et utilise avec

un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la

source de rayonnement et votre corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed)

CRUISE CONTROL MODE

NOTE:

ProPILOT™ Assist provides no approach

warnings, automatic braking, or steering

assist in the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode.

This mode allows driving at a speed be-

tween 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) with-

out keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

WARNING

∙ In the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, a warning chime

does not sound to warn you if you are

too close to the vehicle ahead, as nei-

ther the presence of the vehicle ahead

nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is

detected.

∙ Pay special attention to the distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle

ahead of you or a collision could occur.

∙ Always confirm the setting in the ICC

system display.

5-118 Starting and driving

∙ Do not use the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode when

driving under the following

conditions:

– When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed

– In heavy traffic or in traffic that var-

ies in speed

– On winding or hilly roads

– On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.)

– In very windy areas

∙ Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control switches

1. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without eras-

ing the set speed

2. RES/+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed

incrementally

3. SET/- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces

speed incrementally

4. ICC switch:

Master switch to activate the system

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode display and

indicators

The display is located in the vehicle infor-

mation display.

1. Cruise indicator:

This indicator indicates the condition of

the ICC system depending on a color.

∙ Cruise control ON indicator (gray): In-

dicates that the ICC switch is on

∙ Cruise control SET indicator (green):

Indicates that the cruising speed is

set

LSD2723 LSD2724

Starting and driving 5-119

∙ Cruise control warning (yellow): Indi-

cates that there is a malfunction in

the ICC system

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:

This indicator indicates the set vehicle

speed. For Canadian models, the

speed is displayed in km/h.

Operating conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, push and hold the ICC

switch 䊊

Afor longer than about 1.5 sec-

onds.

When pushing ICC switch on, the conven-

tional (fixed speed) cruise control mode

display and indicators 䊊

Bare displayed in

the vehicle information display. After you

hold ICC switch on for longer than about

1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns

off. The cruise indicator appears. You can

now set your desired cruising speed. Push-

ing the ICC switch again will turn the sys-

tem completely off. When the ignition

switch is placed in the OFF position, the

system is also automatically turned off.

To use the ICC system again, quickly push

and release the ICC switch (vehicle-to ve-

hicle distance control mode) or push and

hold it (conventional cruise control mode)

again to turn it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging cruise

control, make sure to turn the ICC switch

off when not using the ICC system.

LSD2725

5-120 Starting and driving

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push the SET/-

䊊

Cswitch and release it. (The color of the

cruise indicator changes to green and set

vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take

your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your

vehicle will maintain the set speed.

∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle will return to the pre-

viously set speed.

∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed when going up or down steep

hills. If this happens, manually maintain

vehicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the

following methods:

1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle

speed indicator will turn off.

2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed

indicator will turn off.

3. Turn the ICC switch off. Both the cruise

indicator and vehicle speed indicator

will turn off.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push and release the SET/- switch.

2. Push and hold the SET/+ switch. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

release the switch.

3. Push, then quickly release the SET/+

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will increase by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the SET/- switch and release it.

2. Push and hold the SET/- switch. Re-

lease the switch when the vehicle

slows down to the desired speed.

3. Push, then quickly release the SET/-

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will decrease by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the SET/+ switch. The vehicle will re-

sume the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

LSD2726

Starting and driving 5-121

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the AEB

system could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The AEB system is a supplemental aid

to the driver. It is not a replacement

for the driver’s attention to traffic

conditions or responsibility to drive

safely. It cannot prevent accidents

due to carelessness or dangerous

driving techniques.

∙ The AEB system does not function in

all driving, traffic, weather and road

conditions.

The AEB system can assist the driver when

there is a risk of a forward collision with the

vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

The AEB system uses a radar sensor 䊊

located on the front of the vehicle to mea-

sure the distance to the vehicle ahead in

the same lane.

LSD2690

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING

(AEB) (if so equipped)

5-122 Starting and driving

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. AEB emergency warning indicator

3. AEB system warning light

AEB SYSTEM OPERATION

The AEB system will function when your

vehicle is driven at speeds above approxi-

mately 3 mph (5 km/h).

If a risk of a forward collision is detected,

the AEB system will provide an initial warn-

ing to the driver by both a visual (orange)

and audible alert.

If the driver applies the brakes quickly and

forcefully after the warning, and the AEB

system detects that there is still the possi-

bility of a forward collision, the system will

automatically increase the braking force. If

the driver does not take action, the AEB

system issues the second visual warning

(red) and audible warning and also applies

partial braking.

If the risk of a collision becomes imminent,

the AEB system applies harder braking au-

tomatically.

LSD2687

Starting and driving 5-123

NOTE:

The vehicle’s brake lights come on when

braking is performed by the AEB system.

Depending on vehicle speed and distance

to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and

roadway conditions, the system may help

the driver avoid a forward collision or may

help mitigate the consequences of a colli-

sion, should one be unavoidable. If the

driver is handling the steering wheel, accel-

erating or braking, the AEB system will

function later or will not function.

The automatic braking will cease under the

following conditions:

∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far

as necessary to avoid a collision.

∙ When the accelerator pedal is de-

pressed.

∙ When there is no longer a vehicle de-

tected ahead.

If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle,

the vehicle will remain at a standstill for

approximately 2 seconds before the

brakes are released.

LSD2769

5-124 Starting and driving

TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM

ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the AEB

systems ON or OFF.

1. Press the button until “Settings”

displays in the vehicle information dis-

play. Use the button to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK

button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK

button.

3. Select “Emergency Brake” and use the

OK button to turn the system on or off.

When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB

system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

The AEB system will be automatically

turned on when the engine is restarted.

AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the AEB system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The AEB system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions.

∙ The radar sensor does not detect the

following objects:

– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles

in the roadway.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Crossing vehicles.

∙ The radar sensor has some perfor-

mance limitations. If a stationary ve-

hicle is in the vehicle’s path, the AEB

system will not function when the ve-

hicle is driven at speeds over approxi-

mately 50 mph (80 km/h).

∙ The radar sensor may not detect a ve-

hicle ahead in the following

conditions:

– Dirt, ice, snow or other material

covering the radar sensor.

– Interference by other radar

sources.

– Snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles.

– If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.

motorcycle).

– When driving on a steep downhill

slope or roads with sharp curves.

∙ In some road or traffic conditions, the

AEB system may unexpectedly apply

partial braking. When acceleration is

necessary, continue to depress the

accelerator pedal to override the

system.

∙ Braking distances increase on slip-

pery surfaces.

Starting and driving 5-125

∙ The system is designed to automati-

cally check the sensor’s functionality,

within certain limitations. The system

may not detect some forms of ob-

structions of the sensor area such as

ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases,

the system may not be able to worn

the driver properly. Be sure that you

check, clean and clear the sensor area

regularly.

∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

LSD2717

5-126 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

Condition A

When the radar sensor picks up interfer-

ence from another radar source, making it

impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the

AEB system is automatically turned off.

The AEB system warning light (orange) will

illuminate.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the AEB system will resume automatically.

Condition B

When the sensor area of the front bumper

is covered with dirt or is obstructed, mak-

ing it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,

the AEB system is automatically turned off.

The AEB system warning light (orange) will

illuminate and the “Unavailable: Front Ra-

dar Obstruction” warning message will ap-

pear in the vehicle information display.

When driving on roads with limited road

structures or buildings (for example, long

bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to

long walls), the system may illuminate the

AEB system warning light (orange) and dis-

play the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruc-

tion” message.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop

the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift

lever in the P (Park) position and turn the

engine off. Clean the radar cover on the

lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the

engine. If the warning light continues to

illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be

turned off automatically, a chime will

sound, the AEB system warning light (or-

ange) will illuminate and the warning mes-

sage [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle

information display.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop

the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en-

gine off and restart the engine. If the warn-

ing light continues to illuminate, have the

AEB system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor 䊊

Ais located on the front of the

vehicle.

To keep the system operating properly, be

sure to observe the following:

∙ Always keep the sensor area of the front

bumper clean.

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor.

∙ Do not cover or attach stickers or simi-

lar objects on the front bumper near

the sensor area. This could cause failure

or malfunction.

LSD2690

Starting and driving 5-127

∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the

sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This

could cause failure or malfunction.

∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front

bumper. Before customizing or restor-

ing the front bumper, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada

Model: ARS4–B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause interfer-

ence, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation

of the device.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux

CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux

appareils radio exempts de licence.

L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux

conditions suivantes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit ac-

cepter tout brouillage radioélec-

trique subi, même si le brouillage est

susceptible d’en compromettre le

fonctionnement.

Radio frequency radiation exposure in-

formation:

This equipment complies with FCC and IC

radiation exposure limits set forth for an

uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of

30 cm between the radiator and your

body.

This transmitter must not be co-located

or operating in conjunction with any

other antenna or transmitter.

Cet équipement est conforme aux lim-

ites d’exposition aux rayonnements IC

établies pour un environnement non

contrôlé.

Cet équipement doit être installé et

utilisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de

distance entre la source de rayonnement

et votre corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

5-128 Starting and driving

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the AEB

with Pedestrian Detection system

could result in serious injury or death.

∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system is a supplemental aid to the

driver. It is not a replacement for the

driver’s attention to traffic conditions

or responsibility to drive safely. It can-

not prevent accidents due to care-

lessness or dangerous driving

techniques.

∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system does not function in all driv-

ing, traffic, weather and road

conditions.

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system

can assist the driver when there is a risk of

a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in

the traveling lane or with a pedestrian.

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system

uses a radar sensor located on the front of

the vehicle 䊊

Bto measure the distance to

the vehicle ahead in the same lane. For

pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian De-

tection system uses a camera installed be-

hind the windshield 䊊

Ain addition to the

radar sensor.

LSD2799

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING

(AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION

(if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-129

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection emer-

gency warning indicator

3. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system

warning light

AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN

DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION

The AEB system operates at speeds above

approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). For the pe-

destrian detection function, the system

operates at speeds between6–37mph(10

– 60 km/h).

If a risk of a forward collision with a vehicle

is detected, the AEB with Pedestrian Detec-

tion system will first provide a warning to

the driver by flashing the vehicle ahead de-

tection indicator (orange) and providing an

audible alert. In addition, the system ap-

plies partial braking. If the driver applies the

brakes quickly and forcefully, but the sys-

tem detects that there is still the possibility

of a forward collision, the system will auto-

matically increase the braking force.

LSD2687

5-130 Starting and driving

If the risk of a collision becomes imminent

and the driver does not take action, the AEB

with Pedestrian Detection system issues

the second warning to the driver by flash-

ing the AEB with Pedestrian Detection

emergency warning indicator (red), provid-

ing an audible warning, and then automati-

cally applies harder braking.

If a risk of a forward impact with a pedes-

trian is detected, the AEB with Pedestrian

Detection system will provide a warning to

the driver by flashing the AEB with Pedes-

trian Detection emergency warning indica-

tor (red), provides an audible alert and the

system will apply partial baking. If the driver

applies the brakes quickly and forcefully

but the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-

tem detects that there is still the possibility

of a forward impact with a pedestrian, the

system will automatically increase the

braking force. If the risk of collision be-

comes imminent and the driver does not

take action, the AEB with Pedestrian Detec-

tion system automatically applies harder

braking.

NOTE:

The vehicle’s brake lights come on when

any braking is performed by the AEB

with Pedestrian Detection system.

Depending on vehicle speed and distance

to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well

as driving and roadway conditions, the sys-

tem may help the driver avoid a forward

collision or may help mitigate the conse-

quences if a collision should be unavoid-

able. If the driver is handling the steering

wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB with

Pedestrian Detection system will function

later or will not function.

The automatic braking will cease under the

following conditions:

∙ When the steering wheel is turned to

avoid a collision.

∙ When the accelerator pedal is de-

pressed.

∙ When there is no longer a vehicle or a

pedestrian detected ahead.

If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-

tem has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle

will remain at a standstill for approximately

2 seconds before the brakes are released.

Starting and driving 5-131

TURNING THE AEB WITH

PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM

ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system.

1. Press the button until “Settings”

displays in the vehicle information dis-

play. Use the button to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK

button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK

button.

3. Select “Emergency Brake” and use the

OK button to turn the system on or off.

When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system is turned off, the AEB with Pedes-

trian Detection system warning light illumi-

nates.

NOTE:

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-

tem will be automatically turned on

when the engine is restarted.

LSD2769

5-132 Starting and driving

AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN

DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system. Failure to operate the vehicle in

accordance with these system limita-

tions could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system cannot detect all vehicles or

pedestrians under all conditions.

∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system does not detect the following

objects:

– Small pedestrians (including small

children), animals and cyclists.

– Pedestrians in wheelchairs or us-

ing mobile transport such as

scooters, child-operated toys, or

skateboards.

– Pedestrians who are seated or oth-

erwise not in a full upright stand-

ing or walking position.

– Oncoming vehicles

– Crossing vehicles

– Obstacles on the roadside

∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system has some performance

limitations.

– If a stationary vehicle is in the vehi-

cle’s path, the AEB with Pedestrian

Detection system will not function

when the vehicle is driven at

speeds over approximately

50 mph (80 km/h).

– For pedestrian detection, the AEB

with Pedestrian Detection system

will not function when the vehicle

is driven at speeds over approxi-

mately 37 mph (60 km/h) or below

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system will not function for pedestri-

ans in darkness or in tunnels, even if

there is street lighting in the area.

∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system may not function if the vehicle

ahead is narrow (for example, a

motorcycle).

∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system may not function if speed dif-

ference between the two vehicles is

too small.

∙ The radar sensor AEB with Pedestrian

Detection system may not function

properly or detect a vehicle ahead in

the following conditions:

– Poor visibility (conditions such as

rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sand-

storms, and road spray from other

vehicles)

– Driving on a steep downhill slope

or roads with sharp curves.

– Driving on a bumpy road surface,

such as an uneven dirt road.

– If dirt, ice, snow or other material is

covering the radar sensor area.

– Interference by other radar

sources.

– The camera area of windshield is

fogged up, or covered with dirt, wa-

ter drops, ice, snow, etc.

Starting and driving 5-133

– Strong light (for example, sunlight

or high beams from oncoming ve-

hicles) enters the front camera.

Strong light causes the area

around the pedestrian to be cast in

a shadow, making it difficult to see.

– A sudden change in brightness oc-

curs. (For example, when the ve-

hicle enters or exits a tunnel or a

shaded area or lightning flashes.)

– The poor contrast of a person to

the background, such as having

clothing color or pattern which is

similar to the background.

– The pedestrian’s profile is partially

obscured or unidentifiable due to

the pedestrian transporting lug-

gage, wearing bulky or very loose-

fitting clothing or accessories.

∙ The system performance may de-

grade in the following conditions:

– The vehicle is driven on a slippery

road.

– The vehicle is driven on a slope.

– Excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the trunk

room of your vehicle.

∙ The system is designed to automati-

cally check the sensor’s (radar and

camera) functionality, within certain

limitations. The system may not de-

tect blockage of sensor areas covered

by ice, snow or stickers, for example.

In these cases, the system may not be

able to warn the driver properly. Be

sure that you check, clean and clear

sensor areas regularly.

∙ In some road and traffic conditions,

the AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system may unexpectedly apply par-

tial braking. When acceleration is nec-

essary, depress the accelerator pedal

to override the system.

∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

5-134 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

Condition A:

In the following conditions, the AEB with

Pedestrian Detection system warning light

blinks and the system will be turned off

automatically:

∙ The radar sensor picks up interference

from another radar source.

∙ The camera area of windshield is

misted or frozen.

∙ Strong light is shining from the front.

∙ The cabin temperature is over approxi-

mately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight.

∙ The camera area of windshield glass is

continuously covered with dirt, etc.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system

will resume automatically.

LSD2717

Starting and driving 5-135

NOTE:

When the inside of the windshield on

camera area is misted or frozen, it will

take a period of time to remove it after

the A/C turns on. If dirt appears on this

area, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

Condition B:

In the following conditions, the AEB with

Pedestrian Detection system warning light

will illuminate and the system will be

turned off automatically and the “Unavail-

able: Front Radar Obstruction” warning

message will appear in the vehicle infor-

mation display:

∙ The sensor area of the front bumper is

covered with dirt or is obstructed.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop

the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift

lever in the P (Park) position and turn the

engine off. Clean the radar sensor area of

front bumper or the camera area of wind-

shield with a soft cloth, and restart the en-

gine. If the warning light continues to illumi-

nate, have the AEB with Pedestrian

Detection system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-

tem malfunctions, it will be turned off auto-

matically, a chime will sound, the AEB with

Pedestrian Detection system warning light

(orange) will illuminate and the warning

message [Malfunction] will appear in the

vehicle information display.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop

the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en-

gine off and restart the engine. If the warn-

ing light continues to illuminate, have the

AEB with Pedestrian Detection system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The radar sensor is located on the front of

the vehicle 䊊

B. The camera is located on

the upper side of the windshield 䊊

To keep the AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system operating properly, be sure to ob-

serve the following:

∙ Always keep sensor areas of the front

bumper and windshield clean.

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensors (e.g., bumper, wind-

shield).

LSD2799

5-136 Starting and driving

∙ Do not cover or attach stickers, or install

any accessory near the sensors. This

could block sensor signals, and/or

cause failure or malfunction.

∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the

radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This

could cause failure or malfunction.

∙ Do not place reflective materials, such

as white paper or a mirror, on the instru-

ment panel. The reflection of sunlight

may adversely affect the camera unit’s

detection capability.

∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front

bumper. Before customizing or restor-

ing the front bumper, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada

Model: ARS4–B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause interfer-

ence, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation

of the device.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux

CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux

appareils radio exempts de licence.

L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux

conditions suivantes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit ac-

cepter tout brouillage radioélec-

trique subi, même si le brouillage est

susceptible d’en compromettre le

fonctionnement.

Radio frequency radiation exposure in-

formation:

This equipment complies with FCC and IC

radiation exposure limits set forth for an

uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of

30 cm between the radiator and your

body.

This transmitter must not be co-located

or operating in conjunction with any

other antenna or transmitter.

Cet équipement est conforme aux lim-

ites d’exposition aux rayonnements IC

établies pour un environnement non

contrôlé.

Starting and driving 5-137

Cet équipement doit être installé et

utilisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de

distance entre la source de rayonnement

et votre corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to ob-

tain maximum engine performance

and ensure the future reliability and

economy of your new vehicle. Failure to

follow these recommendations may re-

sult in shortened engine life and re-

duced engine performance.

∙ Avoid driving for long periods at con-

stant speed, either fast or slow, and do

not run the engine over 4,000 RPM.

∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any

gear.

∙ Avoid quick starts.

∙ Avoid hard braking as much as pos-

sible.

∙ Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles

(805 kilometers). Your engine, axle or

other parts could be damaged.

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient

Driving Tips to help you achieve the most

fuel economy from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake

Pedal Application

∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.

∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possible.

∙ Maintain constant speed while com-

muting and coast whenever pos-

sible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed

∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and

minimize stops.

∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic

lights allows you to reduce your num-

ber of stops.

∙ Maintaining a steady speed can mini-

mize red light stops and improve fuel

efficiency.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

5-138 Starting and driving

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher

Vehicle Speeds

∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to open windows to cool the

vehicle due to reduced engine load.

∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle

due to increased aerodynamic drag.

∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin

when the A/C is on reduces cooling

load.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-

tances

∙ Observing the speed limit and not

exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where

legally allowed) can improve fuel effi-

ciency due to reduced aerodynamic

drag.

∙ Maintaining a safe following distance

behind other vehicles reduces un-

necessary braking.

∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate

changes in speed permits reduced

braking and smooth acceleration

changes.

∙ Select a gear range suitable to road

conditions.

5. Use Cruise Control

∙ Using cruise control during highway

driving helps maintain a steady

speed.

∙ Cruise control is particularly effective

in providing fuel savings when driving

on flat terrains.

6. Plan for the Shortest Route

∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to

determine the best route to save

time.

7. Avoid Idling

∙ Shutting off your engine when safe

for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds

saves fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll

Roads

∙ Automated passes permit drivers to

use special lanes to maintain cruis-

ing speed through the toll and avoid

stopping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up

∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact

to fuel economy.

∙ Vehicles typically need no more than

30 seconds of idling at start-up to

effectively circulate the engine oil be-

fore driving.

∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper-

ating temperature more quickly

while driving versus idling.

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade whenever pos-

sible.

∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening

the windows will help to reduce the

inside temperature faster, resulting in

reduced demand on your A/C sys-

tem.

Starting and driving 5-139

∙ Keep your engine tuned up.

∙ Follow the recommended scheduled

maintenance.

∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure. Low tire pressure increases

tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Keep all the wheels in correct align-

ment. Improper alignment increases

tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine

oil. For additional information, refer to

“Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-

tions” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

If any malfunction occurs in the AWD sys-

tem while the engine is running, the master

warning light will come on.

The master warning light may illuminate

while trying to free a stuck vehicle due to

high powertrain oil temperature. The driv-

ing mode may change to 2WD. AUTO mode

may change to LOCK mode before the

warning light illuminates. If the master

warning light illuminates during operation,

stop the vehicle with the engine idling in a

safe place immediately. Then, if the light

turns off after a while, you can continue

driving.

A large difference between the diameters

of the front and rear wheels will make the

warning light illuminate. Pull off the road in

a safe area and idle the engine. Check that

all tire sizes are the same, tire pressure is

correct, and the tires are not worn.

CAUTION

∙ If the warning light remains on after

the above operation, have your ve-

hicle checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ If the warning light comes on while

driving, there may be a malfunction in

the AWD system. Reduce the vehicle

speed and have your vehicle checked

as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

∙ The powertrain may be damaged if

you continue driving with the warning

light illuminated.

∙ Never drive on dry, hard surface roads

in the LOCK mode, as this will overload

the powertrain and may cause a seri-

ous malfunction.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so

equipped)

5-140 Starting and driving

WARNING

∙ For AWD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result

in drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result

in serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

∙ Do not attempt to test an AWD

equipped vehicle on a 2–wheel dyna-

mometer (such as the dynamometers

used by some states for emissions

testing) or similar equipment even if

the other two wheels are raised off the

ground. Make sure that you inform

the test facility personnel that your

vehicle is equipped with AWD before it

is placed on a dynamometer. Using

the wrong test equipment may result

in drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result

in serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) LOCK

SWITCH OPERATIONS

The AWD LOCK switch is located on the

lower side of the instrument panel. This

switch is used to select the AUTO or LOCK

mode depending on the driving conditions.

LOCK mode:

The AWD LOCK indicator light will illumi-

nate.

AUTO mode:

The AWD LOCK indicator light will turn off.

LIC2645

Starting and driving 5-141

AWD mode Wheels driven AWD LOCK indicator light Use conditions

AUTO

Distribution of torque

to the front and rear

wheels changes

automatically, depend-

ing on road conditions

encountered [100:0]

←→ [50:50]. This results

in improved driving

stability. *1

For driving on paved

or slippery roads.

LOCK AWD *2, *3 For driving on rough

roads.

*1 When the rotation difference between the front and rear wheels is large, the AWD mode

may change from AUTO to LOCK for a while; however, this is not a malfunction.

*2 The LOCK mode will change to AUTO mode automatically when the vehicle has been

driven at a high speed. The AWD LOCK indicator light turns off.

*3 LOCK mode will automatically be canceled when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

∙ The AWD torque distribution between the front and rear wheels can be displayed in the

video information display.

∙ If the AWD LOCK switch is operated while accelerating or decelerating, or if the ignition

switch is placed in the OFF position, you may feel a jolt. This is normal.

∙ The oil temperature of the powertrain

parts will increase if the vehicle is con-

tinuously operated under conditions

where the difference in rotation be-

tween the front and rear wheels is large

(wheel slip), such as when driving the

vehicle on rough roads or through sand

or mud or freeing a stuck vehicle. In

these cases, the master warning light

illuminates and the AWD mode

changes to 2WD to protect the pow-

ertrain parts. Stop driving with the en-

gine idling and wait until the warning

light turns off and the AWD returns to

the AUTO mode. If the warning light re-

mains on, have your vehicle checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

5-142 Starting and driving

WARNING

∙ When driving straight, shift the AWD

LOCK switch to AUTO. Do not operate

the AWD LOCK switch when making a

turn or backing up.

∙ Do not operate the AWD LOCK switch

with the front wheel spinning.

∙ Engine idling speed is high while

warming up the engine. Be especially

careful when starting or driving on

slippery surfaces.

∙ When turning the vehicle in LOCK

mode on paved roads, you may feel a

braking effect. This is a normal condi-

tion of the AWD model. WARNING

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

∙ Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park). Fail-

ure to do so could cause the vehicle to

move unexpectedly or roll away and

result in an accident. Make sure the

shift lever has been pushed as far for-

ward as it can go and cannot be

moved without depressing the foot

brake pedal.

∙ Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

Starting and driving 5-143

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-

sition.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling

into traffic when parked on an incline, it

is a good practice to turn the wheels as

illustrated.

∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and

move the vehicle forward until the curb

side wheel gently touches the curb.

∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb

and move the vehicle back until the

curb side wheel gently touches the

curb.

∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels toward the side of the

road so the vehicle will move away

from the center of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

WARNING

∙ If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as-

sist for the steering will not work.

Steering will be harder to operate.

∙ When the power steering warning

light illuminates with the engine run-

ning, there will be no power assist for

the steering. You will still have control

of the vehicle, but the steering will be

much harder to operate. Have the

power steering system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

The power steering system is designed to

provide power assistance while driving to

operate the steering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated re-

peatedly or continuously while parking or

driving at a very low speed, the power as-

sist for the steering wheel will be reduced.

This is to prevent overheating of the power

steering system and protect it from getting

damaged. While the power assist is re-

duced, steering wheel operation will be-

come heavy. If the steering wheel opera-

tion is still performed, the power steering

may stop and the power steering warning

light will illuminate. In a safe location, stop

POWER STEERING

5-144 Starting and driving

the engine and place the ignition switch in

the OFF position. The temperature of the

power steering system will go down after a

period of time and the power assist level

will return to normal after starting the en-

gine. The power steering warning light will

go off. Avoid repeating such steering wheel

operations that could cause the power

steering system to overheat.

You may hear a noise from the front of the

vehicle when the steering wheel is oper-

ated. This is a normal operational noise

and is not a malfunction.

If the power steering warning light illumi-

nates while the engine is running, it may

indicate the power steering system is not

functioning properly and may need servic-

ing. Have the power steering system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the power steering warning light illu-

minates with the engine running, the

power assist for the steering will cease op-

eration but you will still have control of the

vehicle. At this time, greater steering efforts

are required to operate the steering wheel,

especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

The brake system has two separate hy-

draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,

you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using

engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you

can stop the vehicle by depressing the

brake pedal. However, greater foot pres-

sure on the brake pedal will be required to

stop the vehicle and stopping distance will

be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal

while driving. This will overheat the brakes,

wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce

gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent

the brakes from overheating, reduce speed

and downshift to a lower gear before going

down a slope or long grade. Overheated

brakes may reduce braking performance

and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or ac-

celerating could cause the wheels to

skid and result in an accident.

∙ If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as-

sist for the brakes will not work. Brak-

ing will be harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven

through water, the brakes may get wet. As

a result, your braking distance will be lon-

ger and the vehicle may pull to one side

during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly pressing the brake

pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until

the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving

the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes

function correctly.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-145

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever

the stopping effect of the parking brake is

weakened or whenever the parking brake

shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,

in order to assure the best braking perfor-

mance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle

service manual. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but

it cannot prevent accidents resulting

from careless or dangerous driving

techniques. It can help maintain ve-

hicle control during braking on slip-

pery surfaces. Remember that stop-

ping distances on slippery surfaces

will be longer than on normal sur-

faces even with ABS. Stopping dis-

tances may also be longer on rough,

gravel or snow covered roads, or if you

are using tire chains. Always maintain

a safe distance from the vehicle in

front of you. Ultimately, the driver is

responsible for safety.

∙ Tire type and condition may also af-

fect braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and

type as specified on the Tire and

Loading Information label. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Tire

and Loading Information label” in

the “Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

– For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels

do not lock during hard braking or when

braking on slippery surfaces. The system

detects the rotation speed at each wheel

and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-

vent each wheel from locking and sliding.

By preventing each wheel from locking, the

system helps the driver maintain steering

control and helps to minimize swerving

and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady

pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The

Anti-lock Braking System will operate to

prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer

the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping

distances.

Self-test feature

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in-

cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps,

hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start

the engine and move the vehicle at a low

speed in forward or reverse. When the self-

test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise

and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.

This is normal and does not indicate a mal-

function. If the computer senses a mal-

function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-

nates the ABS warning light on the

5-146 Starting and driving

instrument panel. The brake system then

operates normally but without anti-lock

assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during

the self-test or while driving, have the ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-

ates at speeds above3-6mph(5-

10 km/h). The speed varies according to

road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more

wheels are close to locking up, the actuator

rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-

sure. This action is similar to pumping the

brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-

tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise

from under the hood or feel a vibration

from the actuator when it is operating. This

is normal and indicates that the ABS is op-

erating properly. However, the pulsation

may indicate that road conditions are haz-

ardous and extra care is required while

driving.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal

exceeds a certain level, the brake assist is

activated generating greater braking force

than a conventional brake booster even

with light pedal force.

WARNING

The brake assist is only an aid to assist

braking operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle at

all times.

The VDC system uses various sensors to

monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.

Under certain driving conditions, the VDC

system helps to perform the following

functions:

∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce

wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel

so power is transferred to a non-

slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

∙ Controls brake pressure and engine

output to reduce drive wheel slip based

on vehicle speed (traction control func-

tion).

∙ Controls brake pressure at individual

wheels and engine output to help the

driver maintain control of the vehicle in

the following conditions:

– Understeer (vehicle tends to not fol-

low the steered path despite in-

creased steering input)

– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due

to certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to

maintain control of the vehicle, but it can-

not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv-

ing situations.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-147

When the VDC system operates, the

indicator in the instrument panel flashes

so note the following:

∙ The road may be slippery or the system

may determine some action is required

to help keep the vehicle on the steered

path.

∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal and hear a noise or vibration from

under the hood. This is normal and indi-

cates that the VDC system is working

properly.

∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the

road conditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip in-

dicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system,

the and indicator lights come

on in the instrument panel. The VDC sys-

tem automatically turns off when these in-

dicator lights are on.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system. The indicator illumi-

nates to indicate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off the

system, the VDC system still operates to

prevent one drive wheel from slipping by

transferring power to a non-slipping drive

wheel. The indicator flashes if this oc-

curs. All other VDC functions are off and

the indicator will not flash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to

on when the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-

ture that tests the system each time you

start the engine and move the vehicle for-

ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When

the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk

noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and is not an indica-

tion of a malfunction.

WARNING

∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and

be especially careful when driving and

cornering on slippery surfaces and al-

ways drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,

the VDC system may not operate

properly. This could adversely affect

vehicle handling performance, and

the indicator may flash or both

the and indicator lights

may illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and both

the and the indicator

lights may illuminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, both the

and indicator lights may

illuminate.

5-148 Starting and driving

∙ When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator may

flash or both the and indi-

cator lights may illuminate. Do not

drive on these types of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator may flash or

both the and indicator

lights may illuminate. This is not a

malfunction. Restart the engine after

driving onto a stable surface.

∙ If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are used,

the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator may

flash or both the and indi-

cator lights may illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION

During braking while driving through turns,

the system optimizes the distribution of

force to each of the four wheels depending

on the radius of the turn.

WARNING

∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and

be especially careful when driving and

cornering on slippery surfaces and al-

ways drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,

the VDC system may not operate

properly. This could adversely affect

vehicle handling performance, and

the indicator may flash or both

the and indicator lights

may illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and both

the and the indicator

lights may illuminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, both the

and indicator lights may

illuminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator may

flash or both the and indi-

cator lights may illuminate. Do not

drive on these types of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator may flash or

both the and indicator

lights may illuminate. This is not a

malfunction. Restart the engine after

driving onto a stable surface.

Starting and driving 5-149

∙ If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are used,

the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator may

flash or both the and indi-

cator lights may illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

The chassis control is an electric control

module that includes the following func-

tions:

∙ Intelligent Trace Control

∙ Intelligent Engine Brake

∙ Active Ride Control

INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL

(I-TC)

This system senses driving based on the

driver’s steering and acceleration/braking

patterns, and controls brake pressure at

individual wheels to aid tracing at corners

and help smooth vehicle response.

The I-TC can be set to on (enabled) or off

(disabled) through the vehicle information

display “Settings” page. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle information dis-

play” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC sys-

tem, the I-TC is also turned off.

CHASSIS CONTROL

5-150 Starting and driving

When the I-TC is operated and the “Chassis

Control” mode is selected in the vehicle in-

formation display, the I-TC graphics are

shown in the vehicle information display.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

If the “Chassis Control System Error: See

Owner’s Manual” warning message ap-

pears in the vehicle information display, it

may indicate that the I-TC is not function-

ing properly. Have the system checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

The I-TC may not be effective depend-

ing on the driving condition. Always

drive carefully and attentively.

When the I-TC is operating, you may feel a

pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a

noise. This is normal and indicates that the

I-TC is operating properly.

Even if the I-TC is turned off, some functions

will remain on to assist the driver (for ex-

ample, avoidance scenes).

INTELLIGENT ENGINE BRAKE (I-EB)

The I-EB function adds subtle deceleration

by controlling Continuously Variable Trans-

mission (CVT) gear ratio, depending on the

cornering condition calculated from driv-

er’s steering input and plural sensors. This

benefit is for easier traceability and less

workload of adjusting speed with braking

at corners.

The I-EB also enhances braking feel by

adding subtle deceleration with CVT gear

ratio control according to driver’s brake

pedal operation

The I-EB can be set to on (enabled) or off

(disabled) through the vehicle information

display “Settings” page. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle information dis-

play” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

LSD2185

Starting and driving 5-151

When the I-EB is operated at corners and

the “Chassis Control” mode is selected in

the vehicle information display, the I-EB

graphics are shown in the vehicle informa-

tion display. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

If the “Chassis Control System Error: See

Owner’s Manual” warning message ap-

pears in the vehicle information display, it

may indicate that the I-EB is not function-

ing properly. Have the system checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

The I-EB may not be effective depend-

ing on the driving condition. Always

drive carefully and attentively.

When the I-EB is operating, the needle of

the tachometer will rise up and you may

hear an engine noise. This is normal and

indicates that the I-EB is operating prop-

erly.

ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL (ARC)

This system senses upper body motion

(based on wheel speed information) and

controls engine torque and four wheel

brake pressure.This will enhance ride com-

fort in effort to restrain uncomfortable up-

per body movement when passing over

undulated road surfaces. This system

comes into effect above 25 mph (40 km/h).

When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC sys-

tem, the ARC is also turned off.

LSD2185

5-152 Starting and driving

When brake control of ARC is operated and

the “Chassis Control” mode is selected in

the vehicle information display, the ARC

graphics are shown in the vehicle informa-

tion display. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

If the “Chassis Control System Error: See

Owner’s Manual” warning message ap-

pears in the vehicle information display, it

may indicate that the ARC is not function-

ing properly. Have the system checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the ARC is operating, you may hear

noise and sense slight deceleration. This is

normal and indicates that the ARC is oper-

ating properly.

WARNING

∙ Never rely solely on the hill start assist

system to prevent the vehicle from

moving backward on a hill. Always

drive carefully and attentively. De-

press the brake pedal when the ve-

hicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be es-

pecially careful when stopped on a hill

on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to

prevent the vehicle from rolling back-

wards may result in a loss of control of

the vehicle and possible serious injury

or death.

LSD2186 LSD2441

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-153

∙ The hill start assist system is not de-

signed to hold the vehicle at a stand-

still on a hill. Depress the brake pedal

when the vehicle is stopped on a

steep hill. Failure to do so may cause

the vehicle to roll backwards and may

result in a collision or serious personal

injury.

∙ The hill start assist may not prevent

the vehicle from rolling backwards on

a hill under all load or road conditions.

Always be prepared to depress the

brake pedal to prevent the vehicle

from rolling backwards. Failure to do

so may result in a collision or serious

personal injury.

When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill

start assist system automatically keeps

the brakes applied. This helps prevent the

vehicle from rolling backward in the time it

takes the driver to release the brake pedal

and apply the accelerator.

Hill start assist will operate automatically

under the following conditions:

∙ The shift lever is moved to a forward or

reverse gear.

∙ The vehicle is stopped completely on a

hill by applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.

After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll

back and hill start assist will stop operating

completely.

Hill start assist will not operate when the

shift lever is moved to N (Neutral) or P (Park)

or on a flat and level road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

de-icer through the key hole. If the lock

becomes frozen, heat the key before in-

serting it into the key hole, or use the

NISSAN Intelligent Key®.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),

check the antifreeze to assure proper win-

ter protection. For additional information,

refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during

extremely cold weather conditions, the

battery fluid may freeze and damage the

battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,

the battery should be checked regularly.

For additional information, refer to “Battery”

in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-154 Starting and driving

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without

anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, in-

cluding the engine block. Refill before oper-

ating the vehicle. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in

the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry

pavement. However, the performance

of these tires will be substantially re-

duced in snowy and icy conditions. If

you operate your vehicle on snowy or

icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use

of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES

on all four wheels. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire

type, size, speed rating and availability

information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads,

studded tires may be used. However,

some U.S. states and Canadian prov-

inces prohibit their use. Check local,

state and provincial laws before install-

ing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow

tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For additional

information, refer to “Tire chains” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items

be carried in the vehicle during winter:

∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-

move ice and snow from the windows

and wiper blades.

∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under

the jack to give it firm support.

∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-

drifts.

∙ Extra washer fluid to refill the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” un-

der these conditions.Try to avoid driv-

ing on wet ice until the road is salted

or sanded.

∙ Whatever the condition, drive with

caution. Accelerate and slow down

with care. If accelerating or down-

shifting too fast, the drive wheels will

lose even more traction.

∙ Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

∙ Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch

of ice is seen ahead, brake before

reaching it. Try not to brake while on

the ice, and avoid any sudden steering

maneuvers.

Starting and driving 5-155

∙ Do not use the cruise control (if so

equipped) on slippery roads.

∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

PARKING BRAKE

CAUTION

When parking in an area where the out-

side temperature is below 32°F (0°C), do

not apply the parking brake to prevent

it from freezing.

For safe parking, place the shift lever in

the P (Park) position and securely block

the wheels.

For models equipped with

electronic parking brake system

CAUTION

To keep the electronic parking brake re-

leased after the engine is turned off, re-

fer to “Parking brake” in this section.

5-156 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ..................6-2

Emergency engine shut off

(Push-button ignition models only) ..............6-2

Flat tire ..........................................6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)........................................6-3

Run-flat tires (if so equipped) .................6-4

Changing a flat tire ...........................6-4

Jump starting ..................................6-12

Push starting ...................................6-14

If your vehicle overheats........................6-14

Towing your vehicle ............................6-15

Towing recommended by NISSAN ...........6-15

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck

vehicle) ......................................6-17

Push the switch on to warn other drivers

when you must stop or park under emer-

gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure

to move the vehicle well off the road.

∙ Do not use the hazard warning flash-

ers while moving on the highway un-

less unusual circumstances force you

to drive so slowly that your vehicle

might become a hazard to other

traffic.

∙ Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition

switch placed in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use

of the hazard warning flasher switch

while driving.

To shut off the engine in an emergency

situation while driving, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

∙ Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch three consecutive times in less

than 1.5 seconds, or

∙ Push and hold the push-button ignition

switch for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

(Push-button ignition models only)

6-2 In case of emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It moni-

tors tire pressure of all tires except the

spare. When the low tire pressure warning

light is lit, and the “Tire Pressure Low — Add

Air” (“Flat Tire — Visit Dealer” for vehicles

equipped with run-flat tires) warning ap-

pears in the vehicle information display,

one or more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated. If equipped, the system also

displays pressure of all tires (except the

spare tire) on the display screen by sending

a signal from a sensor that is installed in

each wheel. If the vehicle is being driven

with low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti-

vate and warn you of it by the low tire pres-

sure warning light. This system will activate

only when the vehicle is driven at speeds

above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional in-

formation, refer to “Warning lights, indicator

lights and audible reminders” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section and “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may per-

manently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light OFF. If the light still

illuminates while driving after adjust-

ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat

or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire

is flat and all tires are properly in-

flated, have the vehicle checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ When replacing a wheel without TPMS

such as the spare tire, TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will remain

on after 1 minute. Have your tires re-

placed and/or TPMS system reset as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

these services.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

RUN-FLAT TIRES (if so equipped)

Run-flat tires are those tires that can be

used temporarily if they are punctured. For

additional information, refer to “Run-flat

tires” in “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

For additional information, refer to the tire

safety information in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

WARNING

∙ Although you can continue driving

with a punctured run-flat tire, remem-

ber that vehicle handling stability is

reduced, which could lead to an acci-

dent and personal injury. Also, driving

a long distance at high speeds may

damage the tires.

∙ Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph

(80 km/h) and do not drive more than

approximately 93 miles (150 km) with

a punctured run-flat tire. The actual

distance the vehicle can be driven on

a flat tire depends on outside tem-

perature, vehicle load, road conditions

and other factors.

∙ Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid

hard cornering or braking, which may

cause you to lose control of the

vehicle.

∙ If you detect any unusual sounds or

vibrations while driving with a punc-

tured run-flat tire, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop the vehicle as

soon as possible. The tire may be seri-

ously damaged and need to be

replaced.

CAUTION

∙ Never install tire chains on a punc-

tured run-flat tire, as this could dam-

age your vehicle.

∙ Avoid diving over any projection or

pothole, as the clearance between the

vehicle and the ground is smaller than

normal.

∙ Do not enter an automated car wash

with a punctured run-flat tire.

∙ Have the punctured tire inspected by

a NISSAN dealer or other authorized

repair shop. Replace the tire as soon

as possible if the tire is seriously

damaged.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the

parking brake. Move the shift lever to P

(Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic

and to signal professional road assis-

tance personnel that you need assis-

tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-

hicle and stand in a safe place, away

from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

6-4 In case of emergency

WARNING

∙ Make sure the parking brake is se-

curely applied and the shift lever is

shifted into P (Park).

∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic

is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-

fessional road assistance.

A. Blocks

B. Flat tire

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front and

back of the wheel diagonally opposite the

flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving

when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools (if

so equipped)

Open the rear liftgate. Remove the Divide-

N-Hide® floor. For additional information,

refer to “Divide-N-Hide® adjustable floor” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

Lift the floorboard.

LCE2142 LCE2111

In case of emergency 6-5

1. The jack and tool kit are located in the

storage compartment to the left.

2. Remove the storage door by pressing

the two release tabs 䊊

Asimultane-

ously.

3. Unhook the clip 䊊

Brestraining the jack

and tool kit.

4. Remove the tool kit.

5. Remove the jack by turning the spindle

䊊

Ccounterclockwise, relieving the

pressure on the jack.

LIC2640 LCE2112 LCE2247

6-6 In case of emergency

6. To loosen the bolt, turn counterclock-

wise.

7. Once loosened, remove the bolt.

8. Remove the spare tire.

9. Once the flat tire is exchanged with the

spare tire, store the flat tire where the

spare tire was located.

10. Turn the bolt clockwise to tighten.

Changing the spare tire with

BOSE® sub-woofer (if so

equipped)

1. To loosen the bolt, turn counterclock-

wise.

2. Once loosened, remove the bolt.

3. Place the sub-woofer in the upper right

corner of the cargo space, leaning

against the 2nd row passenger side

seat.

4. Remove the spare tire.

5. Once the flat tire is exchanged with the

spare tire, store the flat tire where the

spare was located.

6. Place the sub-woofer inside the flat tire.

7. Turn the bolt clockwise to tighten.

WCE0188 LCE2109 LCE2110

In case of emergency 6-7

Removing wheel cover (if so

equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheel

caps or wheel covers. Doing so could

result in personal injury.

To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod

䊊

1as illustrated.

Apply cloth 䊊

2between the wheel and jack

rod to prevent damaging the wheel and

wheel cover.

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover

or wheel surface.

SCE0630

6-8 In case of emergency

Jacking up vehicle and removing

the damaged tire

WARNING

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

∙ Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use

the jack provided with your vehicle on

other vehicles. The jack is designed

for lifting only your vehicle during a

tire change.

∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for

jack support.

∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.

∙ Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the

vehicle to move. This is especially true

for vehicles with limited slip

differentials.

∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

LCE2380

In case of emergency 6-9

∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)

off the ground. It may cause the ve-

hicle to move.

Always refer to the illustrations for the cor-

rect placement and jack-up points for your

specific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached

to the jack body and the following in-

structions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by

turning counterclockwise with the

wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the

wheel nuts until the tire is off the

ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the

jack-up point as illustrated so the top

of the jack contacts the vehicle at the

jack-up point. Align the jack head be-

tween the 2 notches in the front or the

rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the

jack head between the notches as

shown.

The jack should be used on firm and

level ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack

lever and rod with both hands. Carefully

raise the vehicle until the tire clears the

ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and

then remove the tire.

SCE0002

6-10 In case of emergency

Installing the spare tire (if so

equipped)

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and

tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten

wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the

sequence illustrated until they are tight

(䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D,䊊

E).

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the

wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel

nuts securely in the sequence illus-

trated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D,䊊

E). Lower the ve-

hicle completely.

5. Securely store the jacking equipment

in the vehicle. When storing the tool kit,

it is requested to tighten the bag se-

curely with the attached band to pre-

vent movement of the tools, otherwise

noise may occur.

WARNING

∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the

nuts to become loose.

∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel

nuts to the specified torque with a

torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened

to specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specifications at each lubrication inter-

val.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-

sure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been

parked for 3 hours or more or driven less

than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire

and loading information label affixed to

the driver side center pillar.

WCE0056

In case of emergency 6-11

To start your engine with a booster battery,

the instructions and precautions below

must be followed.

WARNING

∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting

in severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away from

the battery.

∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a

corrosive sulfuric acid solution which

can cause severe burns. If the fluid

should come into contact with any-

thing, immediately flush the con-

tacted area with water.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

∙ The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

∙ Whenever working on or near a bat-

tery, always wear suitable eye protec-

tors (for example, goggles or indus-

trial safety spectacles) and remove

rings, metal bands, or any other jew-

elry. Do not lean over the battery

when jump starting.

∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause

serious injury.

∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any

time. Keep hands and other objects

away from it.

JUMP STARTING

6-12 In case of emergency

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage

to the charging system and cause per-

sonal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-

hicle, position the two vehicles to bring

their batteries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to

touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift

lever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces-

sary electrical systems (lights, heater,

air conditioner, etc.).

3. Ensure the vent caps are level and

tight.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the se-

quence illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D).

CAUTION

∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to posi-

tive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body

ground (for example, strut mounting

bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to

the battery.

∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine

compartment and that the cable

clamps do not contact any other

metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster

vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start

the engine of the vehicle being jump

started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged

for more than 10 seconds. If the engine

does not start right away, place the ig-

nition switch in the OFF position and

wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully dis-

connect the negative cable and then

the positive cable.

LCE2223

In case of emergency 6-13

CAUTION

∙ Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models cannot be push-started

or tow-started. Attempting to do so

may cause transmission damage.

∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The

three-way catalyst may be damaged.

WARNING

∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause en-

gine damage or a vehicle fire.

∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap while the engine is still

hot. When the radiator or coolant res-

ervoir cap is removed, pressurized hot

water will spurt out, possibly causing

serious injury.

∙ Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by

an extremely high temperature gauge

reading), or if you feel a lack of engine

power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the

following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap-

ply the parking brake and move the

shift lever to P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the

windows, move the heater or air condi-

tioner temperature control to maxi-

mum hot and fan control to high

speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen

for steam or coolant escaping from the

radiator before opening the hood. If

steam or coolant is escaping, turn off

the engine. Do not open the hood fur-

ther until no steam or coolant can be

seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the

engine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage

or looseness. Also check if the cooling

fan is running. The radiator hoses and

radiator should not leak water. If cool-

ant is leaking, the water pump belt is

missing or loose, or the cooling fan

does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or

the engine cooling fan. The engine cool-

ing fan can start at any time.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

6-14 In case of emergency

6. After the engine cools down, check the

coolant level in the engine coolant res-

ervoir tank with the engine running.

Add coolant to the engine coolant res-

ervoir tank if necessary. Have your ve-

hicle repaired. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional

and local regulations for towing must be

followed. Incorrect towing equipment

could damage your vehicle. Towing in-

structions are available from a NISSAN

dealer. Local service operators are gener-

ally familiar with the applicable laws and

procedures for towing. To assure proper

towing and to prevent accidental damage

to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends hav-

ing a service operator tow your vehicle. It is

advisable to have the service operator

carefully read the following precautions:

WARNING

∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

∙ Never get under your vehicle after it

has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

∙ When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering system

and powertrain are in working condi-

tion. If any of these conditions apply,

dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be

used.

∙ Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For additional information, refer to “Flat

towing for All-Wheel drive vehicle” or “Flat

towing for front wheel drive vehicle” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle

based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-

tional information, refer to the diagrams in

this section to ensure that your vehicle is

properly towed.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

In case of emergency 6-15

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models with

Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT)

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies

be used when towing your vehicle or place

the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow AWD models equipped with a

CVT with any of the wheels on the

ground as this may cause serious and

expensive damage to the transfer case

and transmission due to the lack of

lubrication.

LCE2238

6-16 In case of emergency

Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) models

with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT)

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (front) wheels off the

ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed

truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

∙ Never tow CVT models with the front

wheels on the ground or four wheels

on the ground (forward or backward),

as this may cause serious and expen-

sive damage to the transmission. If it

is necessary to tow the vehicle with

the rear wheels raised always use

towing dollies under the front wheels.

∙ When towing CVT models with the

rear wheels on the ground or on tow-

ing dollies:

– Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position, and secure the steering

wheel in a straight-ahead position

with a rope or similar device. Never

secure the steering wheel by plac-

ing the ignition switch in the LOCK

position. This may damage the

steering lock mechanism (for

models with a steering lock

mechanism).

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a

stuck vehicle)

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-

sonal injury or death when recovering a

stuck vehicle:

∙ Contact a professional towing service

to recover the vehicle if you have any

questions regarding the recovery

procedure.

∙ Tow chains or cables must be at-

tached only to main structural mem-

bers of the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to

tow or free a stuck vehicle.

LCE2239

In case of emergency 6-17

∙ Only use devices specifically designed

for vehicle recovery and follow the

manufacturer’s instructions.

∙ Always pull the recovery device

straight out from the front of the ve-

hicle. Never pull at an angle.

∙ Route recovery devices so they do not

touch any part of the vehicle except

the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use a tow strap or other device de-

signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and

result in serious injury. Parts of your

vehicle could also overheat and be

damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind

the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to

clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and

backward.

∙ Shift back and forth between R (Re-

verse) and D (Drive).

∙ Apply the accelerator as little as pos-

sible to maintain the rocking motion.

∙ Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R (Reverse) and D

(Drive).

∙ Do not spin the tires above 35 mph

(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a

few tries, contact a professional towing

service to remove the vehicle.

6-18 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ................................7-2

Washing......................................7-2

Waxing .......................................7-2

Removing spots ..............................7-3

Underbody ...................................7-3

Glass .........................................7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) .......7-3

Chromeparts................................7-3

Tire dressings ................................7-3

Cleaning interior.................................7-4

Air fresheners ................................7-4

Floor mats ...................................7-5

Seatbelts....................................7-6

Cleaning the seat tracks...................... 7-7

Corrosion protection ............................ 7-7

Most common factors contributing to

vehicle corrosion ............................. 7-7

Environmental factors influence the

rate of corrosion.............................. 7-7

Protect your vehicle from corrosion .......... 7-7

In order to maintain the appearance of

your vehicle, it is important to take proper

care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash

your vehicle as soon as you can:

∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-

age from acid rain.

∙ After driving on coastal roads.

∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or

bugs get on the paint surface.

∙ When dust or mud builds up on the sur-

face.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-

hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in

a shady area or protect the vehicle with a

body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-

face when putting on or removing the

body cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us-

ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or

general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed

with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, es-

pecially brushless ones, use some

acid for cleaning. The acid may react

with some plastic vehicle compo-

nents, causing them to crack. This

could affect their appearance, and

also could cause them not to function

properly. Always check with your car

wash to confirm that acid is not used.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical de-

tergents, gasoline or solvents.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot,

as the surface may become

water-spotted.

∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of

clean water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on the

doors, hatches and hood are particularly

vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-

fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.

Take care that the drain holes in the lower

edge of the door are open. Spray water

under the body and in the wheel wells to

loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the

vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface

and helps retain new vehicle appearance.

Polishing is recommended to remove

built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-

ered appearance before re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing

the proper product.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions sup-

plied with the wax.

∙ Do not use a wax containing any abra-

sives, cutting compounds or cleaners

that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol-

ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-

ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,

insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible

from the surface of the paint to avoid last-

ing damage or staining. Special cleaning

products are available at a NISSAN dealer

or any automotive accessory store. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it

is necessary to clean the underbody regu-

larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from

building up and causing the acceleration of

corrosion on the underbody and suspen-

sion. Before the winter period and again in

the spring, the underseal must be checked

and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and

dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor-

mal for glass to become coated with a film

after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.

Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily

remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the win-

dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,

abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based

disinfectant cleaners. They could dam-

age the electrical conductors, radio an-

tenna elements or rear window de-

froster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so

equipped)

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge

dampened in a mild soap solution, espe-

cially during winter months in areas where

road salt is used. If not removed, road salt

can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as

ambient temperature.

∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after

the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a

non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain

the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a

coating to the tires to help reduce discolor-

ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-

plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-

ing and form a compound. This compound

may come off the tire while driving and

stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

Appearance and care 7-3

∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The

coating on the tire dissolves more easily

than with an oil-based tire dressing.

∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be diffi-

cult to remove).

∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is

completely removed from the tire

tread/grooves.

∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by the tire dressing manufac-

turer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the

interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a

vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe

the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur-

faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in

mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a

dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in

order to maintain the appearance of the

leather (if so equipped).

Before using any fabric protector, read the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Some

fabric protectors contain chemicals that

may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to

clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or occupant classifi-

cation sensor. This can also affect the

operation of the air bag system and re-

sult in serious personal injury.

CAUTION

∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any

similar material.

∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive

and damaging to leather surfaces

and should be removed promptly. Do

not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol-

ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,

detergents or ammonia-based clean-

ers as they may damage the leather’s

natural finish.

∙ Never use fabric protectors unless

recommended by the manufacturer.

∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may

damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that

could affect the vehicle interior. If you use

an air freshener, take the following precau-

tions:

∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause

permanent discoloration when they

contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place

the air freshener in a location that al-

lows it to hang free and not contact an

interior surface.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip

on the vents. These products can cause

immediate damage and discoloration

when spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufactur-

er’s instructions before using the air fresh-

eners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference

that may result in a collision, injury or

death:

∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-

other floor mat in the driver front po-

sition or install them upside down or

backwards.

∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

or equivalent floor mats, that are spe-

cifically designed for use in your ve-

hicle model and model year.

∙ Properly position the mats in the

floorwell using the floor mat position-

ing hook. For additional information,

refer to "Floor mat installation" in this

section.

∙ Make sure the floor mat does not in-

terfere with pedal operation.

∙ Periodically check the floor mats to

make sure they are properly installed.

∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,

check the floor mats to make sure

they are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and

make it easier to clean the interior. Mats

should be maintained with regular clean-

ing and replaced if they become exces-

sively worn.

LAI2007

Appearance and care 7-5

Floor mat installation

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po-

sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of

the floor mat positioning hooks for each

seating position varies depending on the

vehicle.

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

follow the installation instructions provided

with the mat and the following:

1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the

shift lever in P (Park) position and with

the parking brake fully applied, position

the floor mat in the floorwell so that the

floor mat grommet holes are aligned

with the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the

hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is

properly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter-

fere with pedal operation. With the igni-

tion still in the OFF position, the shift

lever in the P (Park) position and with

the parking brake applied, fully apply

and release all pedals. The floor mat

must not interfere with pedal opera-

tion or prevent the pedal from return-

ing to its normal position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for details about installing the floor

mats in your vehicle.

The illustration shows the location of the

floor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping

them with a sponge dampened in a mild

soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-

pletely in the shade before using them. For

additional information, refer to “Seat belt

maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system”

section of this manual.

Positioning hooks

LAI2046

7-6 Appearance and care

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in

the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat

belts, since these materials may se-

verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS

CAUTION

Periodically clean the seat tracks to pre-

vent reduction of ability to move the

seats.

Clean periodically with a high-powered

vacuum cleaner. Dirt and debris may re-

duce the ability to adjust the seat. A wet

cleansing agent may be used if necessary.

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

∙ The accumulation of moisture-

retaining dirt and debris in body panel

sections, cavities, and other areas.

∙ Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on

the vehicle body underside can accelerate

corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry

completely inside the vehicle and should

be removed for drying to avoid floor panel

corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of

high relative humidity, especially those ar-

eas where the temperatures stay above

freezing and where atmospheric pollution

exists and road salt is used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of

corrosion to those parts which are not well

ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in

the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt

use accelerates the corrosion process.

Road salt also accelerates the disintegra-

tion of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to

keep the vehicle clean.

∙ Always check for minor damage to the

paint and repair it as soon as possible.

∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the

doors open to avoid water accumula-

tion.

∙ Check the underbody for accumulation

of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with

water as soon as possible.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-7

CAUTION

∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compart-

ment by washing it out with a hose.

Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or

broom.

∙ Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic com-

ponents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing

are extremely corrosive. They accelerate

corrosion and deterioration of underbody

components such as the exhaust system,

fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan

and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be

cleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust and

corrosion, which may be required in some

areas, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions .......................8-2

Engine compartment check locations...........8-3

Engine cooling system ..........................8-4

Checking engine coolant level ................8-5

Changing engine coolant.....................8-5

Engine oil........................................8-6

Checking engine oil level .....................8-6

Changing engine oil ..........................8-7

Changing engine oil filter .....................8-8

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid .............................................8-9

Brake fluid .......................................8-9

Windshield-washer fluid ........................8-10

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir............8-10

Battery.........................................8-12

Jump starting ...............................8-15

Variable voltage control system ................8-15

Drive belt .......................................8-16

Spark plugs ....................................8-16

Replacing spark plugs .......................8-16

Air cleaner......................................8-17

In-cabin microfilter ..........................8-18

Windshield wiper blades ........................8-18

Cleaning ....................................8-18

Replacing ...................................8-18

Brakes..........................................8-20

Fuses...........................................8-21

Engine compartment .......................8-21

Passenger compartment....................8-22

Battery replacement ...........................8-23

NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) ......8-23

NISSAN jackknife key (if so equipped) ........8-25

Lights ..........................................8-26

Headlights...................................8-26

Fog lights (if so equipped) ...................8-27

Exterior and interior lights ...................8-28

Wheels and tires................................8-30

Tire pressure ................................8-30

Tire labeling .................................8-34

Types of tires ................................8-36

Tire chains ..................................8-39

Changing wheels and tires ..................8-40

When performing any inspection or main-

tenance work on your vehicle, always take

care to prevent serious accidental injury to

yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol-

lowing are general precautions which

should be closely observed.

WARNING

∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the ve-

hicle from moving. Move the shift le-

ver to P (Park).

∙ Be sure the ignition switch is in the

OFF or LOCK position when perform-

ing any parts replacement or repairs.

∙ If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans,

belts and any other moving parts.

∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jew-

elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be-

fore working on your vehicle.

∙ Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic engine cooling fan. It may come

on at any time without warning, even

if the ignition switch is in the OFF po-

sition and the engine is not running.

To avoid injury, always disconnect the

negative battery cable before work-

ing near the fan.

∙ If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure

there is proper ventilation for exhaust

gases to escape.

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

∙

Because the fuel lines on gasoline en-

gine models are under high pressure

even when the engine is off, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.

CAUTION

∙ Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

∙ Avoid contact with used engine oil

and coolant. Improperly disposed en-

gine oil, engine coolant and/or other

vehicle fluids can damage the envi-

ronment. Always conform to local

regulations for disposal of vehicle

fluid.

∙ Never leave the engine or Continu-

ously Variable Transmission (CVT) re-

lated component harnesses discon-

nected while the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

∙ Never connect or disconnect the bat-

tery or any transistorized component

while the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc-

tions regarding only those items which are

relatively easy for an owner to perform.

You should be aware that incomplete or

improper servicing may result in operating

difficulties or excessive emissions, and

could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt

about any servicing, it is recommended

that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

QR25DE engine

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Battery

5. Air cleaner

6. Fuse/Fusible link box

7. Radiator cap

8. Engine oil dipstick

9. Drive belt location

10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

* Engine cover removed for clarity.

LDI2809

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

Do-it-yourself 8-3

The engine cooling system is filled at the

factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%

Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to

provide year-round antifreeze and coolant

protection. The antifreeze solution con-

tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi-

tional engine cooling system additives are

not necessary.

WARNING

∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool

down. Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping from

the radiator. For additional informa-

tion on precautions, refer to “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-

gine damage, use only a Genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

∙ Never use any cooling system addi-

tives such as radiator sealer. Additives

may clog the cooling system and

cause damage to the engine, trans-

mission and/or cooling system.

∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-

diluted to provide antifreeze protec-

tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional

freeze protection is needed due to

weather where you operate your ve-

hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen-

trate following the directions on the

container. If an equivalent coolant

other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-

low the coolant manufacturer’s in-

structions to maintain minimum anti-

freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The

use of other types of coolant solu-

tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent may damage the engine

cooling system.

∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

or 7 years. Mixing any other type of

coolant other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),

including Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use

of non-distilled water will reduce the

life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-

ant. For additional information, refer

to the "Maintenance and schedules"

section of this manual.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-4 Do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir

when the engine is cold. If the coolant

level is below the MIN level 䊊

B, add coolant

to the MAX level 䊊

A. If the reservoir is empty,

check the coolant level in the radiator

when the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-

cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator

with coolant up to the filler opening and

also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX

level 䊊

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex-

pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is

105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing

any other type of coolant or the use of

non-distilled water will reduce the life ex-

pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad-

ditional information, refer to the "Mainte-

nance and schedules" section of this

manual.

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, have it checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

For additional information on the location

of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En-

gine compartment check locations” in this

section.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine

coolant. The service procedure can be

found in the NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine over-

heating.

WARNING

∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the

engine is hot.

∙ Never remove the radiator or engine

coolant reservoir cap when the en-

gine is hot. Serious burns could be

caused by high pressure fluid escap-

ing from the radiator.

∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-

erly. Check your local regulations.

LDI2810

Do-it-yourself 8-5

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it

reaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than

10 minutes for the oil to drain back

into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check

the oil level. It should be between the H

(High) and L (Low) marks 䊊

B. This is the

normal operating oil level range. If the

oil level is below the L (Low) mark 䊊

remove the oil filler cap and pour rec-

ommended oil through the opening.

Do not overfill 䊊

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period,depending on the sever-

ity of operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating the engine with an insuffi-

cient amount of oil can damage the en-

gine, and such damage is not covered

by warranty.

LDI2811 LDI2812

ENGINE OIL

8-6 Do-it-yourself

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it

reaches operating temperature, then

turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊

Aby turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain

plug 䊊

5. Remove the drain plug 䊊

Bwith a

wrench by turning it counterclockwise

and completely drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove

and replace it at this time. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing

engine oil filter” in this section.

∙

Waste oil must be disposed of properly.

∙Check your local regulations.

WARNING

∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin

cancer.

∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-

gine oil may be hot.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a

new washer. Securely tighten the drain

plug with a wrench. Do not use exces-

sive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

25 ft-lb (34 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil

through the oil filler opening, then install

the oil filler cap securely.

For additional information on drain

and refill capacity, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-

ties” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

The drain and refill capacity depends

on the oil temperature and drain time.

Use these specifications for reference

only. Always use the dipstick to deter-

mine when the proper amount of oil is

in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage

around the drain plug and oil filter. Cor-

rect as required.

LDI2813

Do-it-yourself 8-7

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level with the

dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil

filter 䊊

4. Remove pins 䊊

Afrom the right engine

protector located inside right wheel

well, remove protector. Remove oil filter

䊊

Bwith an oil filter wrench by turning it

counterclockwise. Then remove the oil

filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-

gine oil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface

with a clean rag.

CAUTION

∙ Be sure to remove any old gasket

material remaining on the sealing

surface of the engine. Failure to do

so could lead to an oil leak and en-

gine damage.

∙ The dipstick must be inserted in

place to prevent oil spillage from

the dipstick hole when filling the

engine with oil.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with

clean engine oil.

LDI2814

8-8 Do-it-yourself

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resis-

tance is felt, then tighten an additional

2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add en-

gine oil if necessary.

CAUTION

∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent)

ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with

other fluids.

∙ Do not use Automatic Transmission

Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission

fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may dam-

age the CVT. Damage caused by the

use of fluids other than as recom-

mended is not covered under

NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may

also damage the CVT. Damage caused

by the use of fluids other than as rec-

ommended is not covered under

NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

When checking or replacement of CVT fluid

is required, it is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated

fluid may damage the brake system.

The use of improper fluids can dam-

age the brake system and affect the

vehicle’s stopping ability.

∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.

∙ Brake fluid is poisonous and should

be stored carefully in marked contain-

ers out of reach of children.

LDI2815

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

BRAKE FLUID

Do-it-yourself 8-9

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid

is spilled, immediately wash the surface

with water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the

brake fluid is below the MIN line 䊊

B, the

brake warning light will illuminate. Add

brake fluid up to the MAX line 䊊

A. For addi-

tional information on brake fluid type, refer

to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

If the brake fluid must be added frequently,

the brake system should be thoroughly

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir

periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid

when the low windshield-washer fluid

warning light (if so equipped) comes on or

the “Low Washer Fluid” warning message (if

so equipped) shows on the vehicle infor-

mation display or when there is no fluid in

the dip tube.

To check the fluid level with the dip tube,

use your finger to plug the center hole 䊊

Aof

the cap/tube assembly, then remove it

from the reservoir. If there is no fluid in the

dip tube, add fluid.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,

lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the

windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir

opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for

better cleaning. In the winter season, add a

windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the

manufacturer’s instructions for the mix-

ture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when

driving conditions require an increased

amount of windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN

Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &

Antifreeze or equivalent.

LDI3130

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

8-10 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for windshield-washer fluid.

This may result in damage to the

paint.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl

alcohol based washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s rec-

ommended levels before pouring the

fluid into the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir. Do not use the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir to mix the

washer fluid concentrate and water.

Do-it-yourself 8-11

Caution symbols for battery

WARNING

䊊

1No smoking, No exposed flames, No

Sparks

Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is

explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

䊊

2Shield eyes

Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or

battery acid.

䊊

3Keep away from children

Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

䊊

4Battery acid

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After handling the

battery or battery cap, immediately wash your hands thoroughly. If the battery fluid gets into your

eyes, or onto your skin or clothing, flush with water immediately for at least 15 minutes and seek

medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the battery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it

could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.

䊊

5Note operating instructions

Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.

䊊

6Explosive gas

Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or

injury.

∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.

∙ Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.

∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

BATTERY

8-12 Do-it-yourself

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING

∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,

an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy-

drogen gas generated by the battery

is explosive. Explosive gases can

cause blindness or injury. Do not allow

battery fluid to contact your skin,

eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul-

furic acid can cause blindness or in-

jury. After touching a battery or bat-

tery cap, do not touch or rub your

eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If

the acid contacts your eyes, skin or

clothing, immediately flush with wa-

ter for at least 15 minutes and seek

medical attention.

∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid

in the battery is low. Low battery fluid

can cause a higher load on the battery

which can generate heat, reduce bat-

tery life, and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

∙ When working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protection

and remove all jewelry.

∙ Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after

handling.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent

caps tight and the battery level.

1. Remove the vent caps with a screw-

driver as shown. Use a cloth to protect

the battery case.

Battery (Type A) (if so equipped)

WDI0224

Do-it-yourself 8-13

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only dis-

tilled water to bring the level up to the

bottom of the filler opening. Do not

overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or

under severe conditions require frequent

checks of the battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Do not try to open the top of the battery.

The Type B battery is not equipped with

removable vent caps. If low battery fluid is

suspected, it is recommended you see a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

WDI0529

Battery (Type B) (if so equipped)

LDI2817

8-14 Do-it-yourself

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump

starting” in the “In case of emergency” sec-

tion of this manual. If the engine does not

start by jump starting, the battery may

have to be replaced. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

CAUTION

∙ Do not ground accessories directly to

the battery terminal. Doing so will by-

pass the variable voltage control sys-

tem and the vehicle battery may not

charge completely.

∙ Use electrical accessories with the en-

gine running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable

voltage control system. This system mea-

sures the amount of electrical discharge

from the battery and controls voltage gen-

erated by the generator.

The current sensor is located near the bat-

tery along the negative battery cable. If you

add electrical accessories to your vehicle,

be sure to ground them to a suitable body

ground such as the frame or engine block

area.

LDI2132

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL

SYSTEM

Do-it-yourself 8-15

1. Crankshaft pulley

2. Drive belt automatic tensioner pul-

ley

3. Water pump pulley

4. Generator pulley

5. Air conditioner compressor pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF or LOCK position before servic-

ing drive belt. The engine could rotate

unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un-

usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If

the belt is in poor condition or is loose,

have it replaced or adjusted. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for

condition and tension in accordance

with the maintenance schedule found

in the "Maintenance and schedules"

section of this manual.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace iridium-

tipped 䊊

Aspark plugs as frequently as con-

ventional type spark plugs because they

last much longer. Follow the maintenance

log shown in the "Maintenance and sched-

ules" section of this manual. Do not service

iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or

regapping.

∙Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

QR25DE engine

LDI2130 SDI1895

DRIVE BELT SPARK PLUGS

8-16 Do-it-yourself

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch

are off and that the parking brake is

engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect

socket can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned

and reused. Replace it according to the

maintenance log shown in the "Mainte-

nance and schedules" section of this

manual.

To remove the air cleaner filter:

1. Pinch the retaining clips 䊊

Ainward to

unlock, move tab 䊊

Bfrontward, and re-

move air duct 䊊

Cupward.

NOTE:

Do not bend retaining clips outward or

they may break.

2. Unlatch the retaining clips 䊊

Dand

move air cleaner cover 䊊

Eforward.

3. Remove air cleaner filter.

Follow the removal instruction in reverse

order to install air cleaner filter, air cleaner

cover and air cleaner duct.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner, make

sure the air cleaner cover and air cleaner

duct are seated correctly and all the re-

taining clips are latched.

LDI3139 LDI3141

AIR CLEANER

Do-it-yourself 8-17

WARNING

∙ Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or

others to be burned. The air cleaner

not only cleans the air, it stops the

flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t

there, and the engine backfires, you

could be burned. Do not drive with the

air cleaner removed, and be careful

when working on the engine with the

air cleaner removed.

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body

or attempt to start the engine with

the air cleaner removed. Doing so

could result in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry

of airborne dust and pollen particles and

reduces some objectionable outside

odors. The filter is located behind the glove

box. For additional information, refer to the

“Maintenance and schedules” section of

this manual for change intervals.

If replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using

the windshield-washer or if a wiper blade

chatters when running, wax or other mate-

rial may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer solution or a mild detergent. Your

windshield is clean if beads do not form

when rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth

soaked in a washer solution or a mild de-

tergent. Then rinse the blades with clear

water. If your windshield is still not clear

after cleaning the blades and using the

wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can

damage the windshield and impair

driver vision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

To replace the windshield wiper blades, fol-

low the procedure below:

1. When ignition switch is ON or within

60 seconds after placing the ignition

switch from the ON to OFF position,

place the windshield wiper and washer

lever into the OFF position.

Rapidly lift the windshield wiper and washer

lever

䊊

upwards twice within 0.5 seconds.

This action will cause the wipers to auto-

matically take the service position.

LDI2476

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-18 Do-it-yourself

3. Once the wipers are in the service po-

sition, push the release tab 䊊

4. Move the wiper blade down 䊊

Cand re-

move.

5. Insert the new wiper blade onto the

wiper arm until it clicks into place.

6. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is

in the groove.

7. Finally, lift the windshield wiper and

washer lever to the mist position 䊊

once and release. This action will cause

the wipers to resume the set position.

CAUTION

∙ After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when

the hood is opened.

∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact

the glass; otherwise the arms may be

damaged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be care-

ful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle

䊊

F. This may cause clogging or improper

windshield-washer operation. If wax gets

into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or

small pin 䊊

LDI2475 LDI2477

LDI2820

Do-it-yourself 8-19

Rear window wiper blade

If checking or replacement is required, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have

the brakes checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-

adjust every time the brake pedal is ap-

plied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if the

brake pedal height does not return to

normal. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have

audible wear indicators. When a brake pad

requires replacement, a high pitched

scraping or screeching sound will be heard

when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will

be heard whether or not the brake pedal is

depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the wear indicator

sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,

occasional brake squeak, squeal or other

noise may be heard. Occasional brake

noise during light to moderate stops is nor-

mal and does not affect the function or

performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information re-

garding brake inspections, refer to the ap-

propriate maintenance schedule informa-

tion in the "Maintenance and schedules"

section of this manual.

BRAKES

8-20 Do-it-yourself

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, check for an open fuse.

Fuses are used in the passenger and en-

gine compartment. Spare fuses are pro-

vided and can be found in the passenger

compartment fuse box.

When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is

installed in the fuse box securely.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or electronic con-

trol units or cause a fire

If any electrical equipment does not come

on, check for an open fuse.

For checking and replacing fuses, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

Fusible links

If the electrical equipment does not oper-

ate and fuses are in good condition, check

the fusible links. If any of these fusible links

are melted, replace with only Genuine

NISSAN parts.

LDI2385 LDI2840

FUSES

Do-it-yourself 8-21

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or electronic con-

trol units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

The fuse box is located on the driver’s

side of the instrument panel.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the

headlight switch are OFF.

2. Remove the fuse box cover with a suit-

able tool. Use a cloth to avoid damag-

ing the trim.

3. Locate the fuse that needs to be re-

placed.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller

䊊

5. If the fuse is open 䊊

B, replace it with an

equivalent good fuse 䊊

6. Push the fuse box cover to install.

If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired, It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

LDI2821 LDI2760

8-22 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swal-

low the battery or removed parts.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so

equipped)

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as

follows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the

Intelligent Key.

2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver 䊊

into the slit 䊊

Bof the corner and twist it

to separate the upper part from the

lower part. Place a cloth over the

screwdriver to protect the casing.

LDI2001

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Do-it-yourself 8-23

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2032 or

equivalent.

∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as doing so could

cause a malfunction.

∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Hold-

ing the battery across the contact

points will seriously deplete the stor-

age capacity.

∙ Make sure that the + side faces the

bottom of the lower part.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with

䊊

Cand 䊊

5. Operate the buttons to check the op-

eration.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer if you need assistance for replace-

ment.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Note:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

LDI2637

8-24 Do-it-yourself

NISSAN JACKKNIFE KEY (if so

equipped)

Replace the battery in the jackknife key as

follows:

䊊

1Hold jackknife key button side up. In-

sert a small screwdriver into the slit of

the corner and twist it to separate the

upper part from the lower part. Use a

cloth to protect the casing.

䊊

2Remove old battery.

䊊

3Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2032 or

equivalent.

∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as doing so could

cause a malfunction.

∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Hold-

ing the battery across the contact

points will seriously deplete the stor-

age capacity.

䊊

4Close lid securely as illustrated.

Operate the buttons to check the opera-

tion.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer if you need assistance for replace-

ment.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

LDI2354

Do-it-yourself 8-25

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

HEADLIGHTS

For additional information on headlight

bulb replacement, refer to the instructions

outlined in this section.

Replacing the halogen headlight

bulb (if so equipped)

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type

which uses a replaceable headlight (halo-

gen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside

the engine compartment without remov-

ing the headlight assembly.

If headlight bulb replacement is required, it

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAUTION

∙ Aiming is not necessary after replac-

ing the bulb. When aiming adjustment

is necessary, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly

open without a bulb installed for a

long period of time. Dust, moisture,

smoke, etc. entering the headlight

body may affect bulb performance.

Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly just before a replacement

bulb is installed.

∙ Only touch the base when handling

the bulb. Never touch the glass enve-

lope. Touching the glass could signifi-

cantly affect bulb life and/or head-

light performance.

∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is

scratched or the bulb is dropped.

∙ Use the same number and wattage as

shown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens

of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car

wash. A temperature difference between

the inside and the outside of the lens

causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If

large drops of water collect inside the lens,

it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for servicing.

LIGHTS

8-26 Do-it-yourself

Replacing the LED headlight bulb

(if so equipped)

If LED headlight bulb replacement is re-

quired, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

For additional information on fog light bulb

replacement, refer to the instructions out-

lined in this section.

Replacing the fog light bulb

If bulb replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

CAUTION

∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is

scratched or the bulb is dropped.

∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch

the glass envelope.

∙ Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed as shown in the

chart.

∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog

light for a long period of time as dust,

moisture and smoke may enter the

fog light body and affect the perfor-

mance of the fog light.

Do-it-yourself 8-27

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*

High 65 H9

Low 55 H11

Turn 28/8 7444NA

Side marker 5 W5W

Daytime running lights* — —

Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*

High — —

Low — —

Turn 28/8 7444NA

Side marker — —

Daytime running lights* — —

Fog lights (if so equipped)* 35 H8

Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* — —

Map light* — —

Glove box light* — —

Vanity mirror light (if so equipped) 1.8 —

Room light (if so equipped) 8 —

Personal lights (if so equipped) 8 —

Cargo light* 5 —

High-mounted stop light* — —

Rear combination light*

Stop 21 7440

Tail/Stop — —

Turn 21 WY21W

Side marker 5 W5W

Backup (reversing) assembly*

Backup 18 921

Tail — —

License plate light* 5 W5W

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts informa-

tion. LDI2822

8-28 Do-it-yourself

1. Headlight assembly

2 Map light

3 Personal light (if so equipped)

4. Door mirror turn signal light (if so

equipped)

5. Fog light (if so equipped)

6. Daytime running light

7. Room light (if so equipped)

8. High mounted stoplight

9. License plate light

10. Backup (reversing) assembly

11. Rear combination light

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.

When replacing a bulb, first remove the

lens, lamp and/or cover.

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installation

WDI0263

Do-it-yourself 8-29

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in

the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely af-

fect electric medical equipment.

Those who use a pacemaker

should contact the electric medi-

cal equipment manufacturer for

the possible influences before

use.

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

It monitors tire pressure of all tires

except the spare. When the low tire

pressure warning light is lit and the

“Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

appears in the vehicle information

display, one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. If

equipped, the system also displays

pressure of all tires (except the spare

tire) on the display screen by send-

ing a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system

may not detect a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example a flat tire while

driving).

For additional information, refer to

“Low tire pressure warning light” in

the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion, “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section and “Flat tire” in the “In

case of emergency” section of this

manual.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including

the spare) often and always prior to

long distance trips. The recom-

mended tire pressure specifications

are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label or the Tire and

Loading Information label under the

“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire

and Loading Information label is af-

fixed to the driver side center pillar.

Tire pressures should be checked

regularly because:

∙ Most tires naturally lose air over

time.

∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other ob-

jects or if the vehicle strikes a

curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be

checked when the tires are cold. The

tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or

more hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert

provides visual and audible signals

outside the vehicle for inflating the

tires to the recommended COLD tire

pressure. For additional information,

refer to “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire

Alert” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-30 Do-it-yourself

Incorrect tire pressure, including

under inflation, may adversely af-

fect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an

accident.

∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight

capacity is indicated on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

Do not load your vehicle beyond

this capacity. Overloading your

vehicle may result in reduced

tire life, unsafe operating condi-

tions due to premature tire fail-

ure, or unfavorable handling

characteristics and could also

lead to a serious accident. Load-

ing beyond the specified capac-

ity may also result in failure of

other vehicle components.

∙ Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure

gauge to ensure that the tire

pressures are at the specified

level.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-31

Tire and Loading Information

label

䊊

1Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that can

be seated in the vehicle.

䊊

2Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” in

this section.

䊊

3Cold tire pressure: Inflate the

tires to this pressure when the

tires are cold. Tires are consid-

ered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours,

or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)

at moderate speeds. The rec-

ommended cold tire inflation is

set by the manufacturer to pro-

vide the best balance of tire

wear, vehicle handling, drivability,

tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s

GVWR.

䊊

4Original tire size: The size of the

tires originally installed on the

vehicle at the factory.

䊊

5Spare tire size (if so equipped).

䊊

6Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Ve-

hicle loading information” in the

“Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

LDI2737

8-32 Do-it-yourself

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge

squarely onto the valve stem. Do

not press too hard or force the

valve stem sideways, or air will

escape. If the hissing sound of air

escaping from the tire is heard

while checking the pressure, re-

position the gauge to eliminate

this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the

gauge stem and compare to the

specification shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If

too much air is added, press the

core of the valve stem briefly

with the tip of the gauge stem to

release pressure. Recheck the

pressure and add or release air

as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other

tires, including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Infla-

tion Pressure

Front and Rear

Original Tire:

225/65R17 102H

33 psi, 230 kPa

Front and Rear

Original Tire:

225/65RF17

100H

33 psi, 230 kPa

Front and Rear

Original Tire:

225/60R18 100H

33 psi, 230 kPa

Front and Rear

Original Tire:

225/55R19 99H

33 psi, 230 kPa

Spare Tire:

T155/90D17 101M 60 psi, 420 kPa

Spare Tire:

T145/90D16

106M

60 psi, 420 kPa

LDI0393

Do-it-yourself 8-33

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufac-

turers to place standardized infor-

mation on the sidewall of all tires.

This information identifies and de-

scribes the fundamental character-

istics of the tire and also provides the

tire identification number (TIN) for

safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in

case of a recall.

䊊

1Tire size (example: P215/65R15

95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles

(not all tires have this informa-

tion).

2. Three-digit number (215): This

number gives the width in milli-

meters of the tire from sidewall

edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This

number, known as the aspect

ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of

height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter

in inches.

Example

WDI0394

Example

WDI0395

8-34 Do-it-yourself

6. Two- or three-digit number (95):

This number is the tire’s load in-

dex. It is a measurement of how

much weight each tire can sup-

port. You may not find this infor-

mation on all tires because it is

not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should

not drive the vehicle faster than

the tire speed rating.

䊊

2TIN (Tire Identification Number)

for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX

XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De-

partment Of Transportation”.

The symbol can be placed

above, below or to the left or

right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).

5. Four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was built.

For example, the numbers 3103

means the 31st week of 2003. If

these numbers are missing then

look on the other sidewall of the

tire.

Example

LDI2786

Do-it-yourself 8-35

䊊

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate

the materials in the tire, which in-

clude steel, nylon, polyester and oth-

ers.

䊊

4Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire.Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure.

䊊

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maxi-

mum load in kilograms and pounds

that can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle, al-

ways use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

䊊

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires

an inner tube (“tube type”) or not

(“tubeless”).

䊊

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire

has radial structure.

䊊

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that

are defined throughout this section,

Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the

sidewall that contains a whitewall,

bears white lettering or bears

manufacturer, brand, and/or model

name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on

the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)

the outward facing sidewall of an

asymmetrical tire that has a particu-

lar side that must always face out-

ward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

∙ When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and

construction. A NISSAN dealer may be

able to help you with information

about tire type, size, speed rating and

availability.

∙ Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory

equipped tires, and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum

speed rating of the tire.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the low tire

pressure warning system.

∙ For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

8-36 Do-it-yourself

∙ Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels. Failure to

do so may result in a circumference

difference between tires on the front

and rear axles which can cause the

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system

to malfunction resulting in personal

injury or death, excessive tire wear

and may damage the transmission,

transfer case and differential gears.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

CAUTION

∙ ONLY use spare tires specified for the

AWD model.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-

mended that all four tires be replaced with

tires of the same size, brand, construction

and tread pattern. The tire pressure and

wheel alignment should also be checked

and corrected as necessary. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some

models to provide good performance all

year, including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL

SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.

Snow tires have better snow traction than

All Season tires and may be more appropri-

ate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior performance

on dry roads. Summer tire performance is

substantially reduced in snow and ice.

Summer tires do not have the tire traction

rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy

or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the

use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all

four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to

select tires equivalent in size and load rat-

ing to the original equipment tires. If you do

not, it can adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat-

ings than factory equipped tires and may

not match the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum speed

rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the

same size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud-

ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit

their use. Check local, state and provincial

laws before installing studded tires. Skid

and traction capabilities of studded snow

tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer

than that of non-studded snow tires.

Run–Flat Tires (if so equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires

and is not equipped with a spare tire, or a

jack and tool kit. The jack and tool kit may

be purchased at the dealer. Please consult

a NISSAN dealer for additional information.

You can continue driving to a safe location

even if the run-flat tires are punctured. Al-

ways use run-flat tires of the specified size

on all four wheels. Mixing tire sizes or con-

struction may reduce vehicle handling sta-

bility. If necessary, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Frequently check the tire pressure and ad-

just pressure of each tire properly. The tire

pressure can be also checked in the vehicle

information display.

Do-it-yourself 8-37

It can be difficult to tell if a run-flat tire is

under-inflated or flat. Check the tire pres-

sures as described in this section. If the tire

becomes under-inflated while driving, the

low tire pressure warning light will illumi-

nate and the “Tire Pressure Low – Add Air”

warning appears in the vehicle information

display. If the tire becomes flat while driving,

the low tire pressure warning light and the

“Flat Tire – Visit dealer" (if so equipped)

warning will appear.

Low tire pressure:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the low tire pressure warning

light will illuminate and the “Tire Pressure

Low – Add Air” warning appears in the ve-

hicle information display.

Flat tire:

If the vehicle is being driven with one or

more flat tires, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will illuminate continuously and a

chime will sound for 10 seconds. A “Flat-Tire

– Visit dealer" (if so equipped) warning also

appears in the vehicle information display.

The chime will only sound at the first indi-

cation of a flat tire and the warning light will

illuminate continuously. When the flat tire

warning is activated, have the system reset

and the tire checked and replaced if neces-

sary. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service. Even if the

tire is inflated to the specified COLD tire

pressure, the warning light will continue to

illuminate until the system is reset. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

If the low tire pressure warning light illumi-

nates continuously and the “Flat Tire – Visit

dealer" (if so equipped) warning appears in

the vehicle information display:

∙ Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

∙ Increase your following distance to al-

low for increased stopping distances.

∙ Avoid sudden maneuvers, hard corner-

ing and hard braking.

WARNING

∙ Although you can continue driving

with a punctured run-flat tire, remem-

ber that vehicle handling stability is

reduced, which could lead to an acci-

dent and personal injury. Also, driving

a long distance at high speeds may

damage the tire.

∙ Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph

(80 km/h) and do not drive more than

approximately 93 miles (150 km) with

a punctured run-flat tire. The actual

distance the vehicle can be driven on

a flat tire depends on outside tem-

perature, vehicle load, read conditions

and other factors.

∙ Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid

hard cornering or braking, which may

cause you to lose control of the

vehicle.

∙ If you detect any unusual sounds or

vibrations while driving with a punc-

tured run-flat tire, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop the vehicle as

soon as possible. The tire may be seri-

ously damaged and need to be

replaced.

CAUTION

∙ Never install tire chains on a punc-

tured run-flat tire, as this could dam-

age your vehicle.

∙ Avoid driving over any projection or

pothole, as the clearance between the

vehicle and the ground is smaller than

normal.

8-38 Do-it-yourself

∙ Do not enter an automated car wash

with a punctured run-flat tire.

∙ Have the punctured tire inspected by

a NISSAN dealer or other authorized

repair shop. Replace the tire as soon

as possible if the tire is seriously

damaged.

∙ Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction (bias, bias-

belted or radial), and tread pattern on

all four wheels. Failure to do so may

result in a circumference difference

between tires on the front and rear

axles which will cause excessive tire

wear and may damage the transmis-

sion, transfer case and differential

gears (AWD models).

∙ ONLY use spare tires specified for the

AWD model.

∙ If excessive tire wear is found, it is rec-

ommended that all four tires be re-

placed with tires of the same size,

brand, construction and tread pat-

tern. The tire pressure and wheel

alignment should also be checked

and corrected as necessary. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-

cording to location. Check the local laws

before installing tire chains. When installing

tire chains, make sure they are the proper

size for the tires on your vehicle and are

installed according to the chain manufac-

turer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”

chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-

hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-

ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains

are designed to meet the minimum clear-

ances between the tire and the closest ve-

hicle suspension or body component re-

quired to accommodate the use of a

winter traction device (tire chains or

cables). The minimum clearances are de-

termined using the factory equipped tire

size. Other types may damage your vehicle.

Use chain tensioners when recommended

by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a

tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain

must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage

to the fenders or underbody. If possible,

avoid fully loading your vehicle when using

tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced

speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be

damaged and/or vehicle handling and

performance may be adversely affected.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving

with chains in such conditions can cause

damage to the various mechanisms of the

vehicle due to some overstress.

Do-it-yourself 8-39

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the

tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

For additional information on tire re-

placing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”

in the “In case of emergency” section

in this manual.

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-

ened to specifications at all times.

It is recommended that wheel nuts

be tightened to specification at

each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

∙ After rotating the tires, check

and adjust the tire pressure.

∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

∙ Do not include the spare tire in

the tire rotation.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Tire wear and damage

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING

∙ Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking,

bulging or objects caught in the

tread. If excessive wear, cracks,

bulging or deep cuts are found,

the tire(s) should be replaced.

WDI0258 WDI0259

8-40 Do-it-yourself

∙ The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

∙ Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because

some tire damage may not be

obvious. Replace the tires as

necessary to prevent tire failure

and possible personal injury.

∙ Improper service of the spare

tire may result in serious per-

sonal injury. If it is necessary to

repair the spare tire, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size,

tread design, speed rating and load carry-

ing capacity as originally equipped. Rec-

ommended types and sizes are shown in

“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ The use of tires other than those rec-

ommended or the mixed use of tires

of different brands, construction

(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread

patterns can adversely affect the ride,

braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system, ground clear-

ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire

chain clearance, speedometer cali-

bration, headlight aim and bumper

height. Some of these effects may

lead to accidents and could result in

serious personal injury.

∙ For 2WD models, if your vehicle was

originally equipped with four tires

that were the same size and you are

only replacing two of the four tires,

install the new tires on the rear axle.

Placing new tires on the front axle

may cause loss of vehicle control in

some driving conditions and cause an

accident and personal injury

∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels

which have the same off-set dimen-

sion. Wheels of a different off-set

could cause premature tire wear, de-

grade vehicle handling characteris-

tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-

terference with the brake discs. Such

interference can lead to decreased

braking efficiency and/or early brake

pad/shoe wear. For additional infor-

mation on wheel off-set dimensions,

refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

Do-it-yourself 8-41

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS, such as the spare tire, TPMS will

not function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will remain

on after 1 minute. Have your tires re-

placed and/or TPMS system reset as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if

it is not handled correctly. Be careful

when handling the TPMS sensor.

∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the

ID registration may be required. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for ID registration.

∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not

specified by NISSAN. The valve stem

cap may become stuck.

∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are

correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve

may be clogged up with dirt and

cause a malfunction or loss of

pressure.

∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been re-

paired. Such wheels or tires could

have structural damage and could fail

without warning.

∙ The use of retread tires is not

recommended.

∙ For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted

or radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Failure to do so may result in a

circumference difference between tires

on the front and rear axles which will

cause excessive tire wear and may

damage the transmission, transfer case

and differential gears (AWD models).

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-

mended that all four tires be replaced with

tires of the same size, brand, construction

and tread pattern. The tire pressure and

wheel alignment should also be checked

and corrected as necessary. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle

handling and tire life. Even with regular use,

wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,

they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

∙For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve-

hicle to maintain their appearance.

∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when

the wheel is changed or the underside

of the vehicle is washed.

∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when

washing the wheels.

8-42 Do-it-yourself

∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents

or corrosion. Such damage may cause

loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire

bead.

∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road

wheels to protect against road salt in

areas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire) (if so equipped)

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS

such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not

function.

Observe the following precautions if the

TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be

used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be

damaged or involved in an accident:

WARNING

∙ The spare tire should be used for

emergency use only. It should be re-

placed with the standard tire at the

first opportunity to avoid possible tire

or differential damage.

∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid

sharp turns and abrupt braking while

driving.

∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation

pressure. Always keep the pressure of

the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire

at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).

∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare

tire installed do not drive the vehicle

at speeds faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h).

∙ When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire should be used on the

rear wheels and the original tire used

on the front wheels (drive wheels).

∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster

rate than the standard tire. Replace

the spare tire as soon as the tread

wear indicators appear.

∙ Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at

the same time.

∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains

will not fit properly and may cause

damage to the vehicle.

∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire is smaller than the original

tire, ground clearance is reduced. To

avoid damage to the vehicle, do not

drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive

the vehicle through an automatic car

wash since it may get caught.

Do-it-yourself 8-43

MEMO

8-44 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements......................9-2

General maintenance ........................9-2

Scheduled maintenance .....................9-2

Where to go for service .......................9-2

General maintenance ...........................9-2

Explanation of general maintenance

items.........................................9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5

Emission control system maintenance:.......9-5

Chassis and body maintenance:..............9-6

Maintenance schedules .........................9-7

Additional maintenance items for

severe operating conditions ..................9-7

Standard maintenance..........................9-8

Emission control system maintenance .......9-8

Chassis & body maintenance................9-10

Maintenance under severe operating

conditions......................................9-12

Severe driving conditions ....................9-12

Maintenance log ...............................9-13

Some day-to-day and regular mainte-

nance is essential to maintain your vehicle

good mechanical condition, as well as its

emissions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure

that the scheduled maintenance, as well as

general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one

who can ensure that your vehicle receives

proper maintenance. You are a vital link in

the maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal

day-to-day operation. They are essential

for proper vehicle operation. It is your re-

sponsibility to perform these procedures

regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks

requires minimal mechanical skill and only

a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done

by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you

prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

The maintenance items listed in this sec-

tion are required to be serviced at regular

intervals. However under severe driving

conditions, additional or more frequent

maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your

vehicle appears to malfunction, have the

systems checked and serviced. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-

cialists and are kept up-to-date with the

latest service information through techni-

cal bulletins, service tips and training pro-

grams. They are completely qualified to

work on NISSAN vehicles before work be-

gins.

You can be confident that a NISSAN deal-

er’s service department can perform the

service needed to meet the maintenance

requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of

the vehicle, general maintenance should

be performed regularly as prescribed in

this section. If you detect any unusual

sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to

check for the cause or have it checked

promptly. In addition, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think

that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-

nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-

nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be performed from time to time, unless

otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that the

doors and engine hood operate properly.

Also ensure that all latches lock securely.

Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers

and links if necessary. Make sure that the

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

secondary latch keeps the hood from

opening when the primary latch is re-

leased.

When driving in areas using road salt or

other corrosive materials, check lubrica-

tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular

basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop

lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other

lights are all operating properly and in-

stalled securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check-

ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are

missing, and check for any loose wheel

nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev-

ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge

often and always prior to long distance

trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all

tires, including the spare, to the pressure

specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts

or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the

TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core

and cap when the tires are replaced due to

wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve-

hicle should pull to either side while driving

on a straight and level road, or if you detect

uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may

be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer-

ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-

way speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in

the Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a

regular basis. Check the windshield at least

every six months for cracks or other dam-

age. Have a damaged windshield repaired

by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for

cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked on a regular basis, such as

when performing scheduled maintenance,

cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the

pedal does not catch or require uneven

effort. Keep the floor mat away from the

pedal.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes

down further than normal, the pedal feels

spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer

to stop, have your vehicle checked imme-

diately. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the

floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull

the vehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a

fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held

securely with the shift lever in the P (Park)

position without applying any brakes.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake

operation regularly. The vehicle should be

securely held on a fairly steep hill with only

the parking brake applied. If the parking

brake needs adjustment, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Seats: Check seat position controls such

as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to

ensure they operate smoothly and all

latches lock securely in every position.

Check that the head restraints/headrests

move up and down smoothly and the locks

(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched

positions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat

belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,

adjusters and retractors) operate properly

and smoothly, and are installed securely.

Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,

wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering system, such as excessive free

play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all

warning lights and chimes are operating

properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly

and in sufficient quantity when operating

the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check

that the wipers and washer operate prop-

erly and that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked periodically (for example, each

time you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* (for serviceable batteries):

Check the fluid level in each cell. The fluid

should be at the bottom of the filler open-

ing. Vehicles operated in high tempera-

tures or under severe conditions require

frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake

fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines

on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant

level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive

belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after

parking the vehicle on a level spot and

turning off the engine. Wait more than

15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the

oil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no

loose supports, cracks or holes. If the

sound of the exhaust seems unusual or

there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi-

ately have the exhaust system inspected. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon mon-

oxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for

fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the

vehicle has been parked for a while. Water

dripping from the air conditioner after use

is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if

fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause

and have it corrected immediately.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,

leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.

Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor-

mation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently

exposed to corrosive substances such as

those used on icy roads or to control dust. It

is very important to remove these sub-

stances, otherwise rust may form on the

floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the

exhaust system. At the end of winter, the

underbody should be thoroughly flushed

with plain water, being careful to clean

those areas where mud and dirt may accu-

mulate. For additional information, refer to

the “Appearance and care” section of this

manual.

Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that

there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to

give you a better understanding of the

scheduled maintenance items that should

be regularly checked or replaced. The

maintenance schedule indicates at which

mileage/time intervals each item requires

service.

In addition to scheduled maintenance,

your vehicle requires that some items be

checked during normal day-to-day opera-

tion. For additional information, refer to

“General maintenance” in this section.

Items marked with “*” are recommended

by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.

You are not required to perform mainte-

nance on these items in order to maintain

the warranties which come with your

NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in-

tervals are required.

When applicable, additional information

can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

NOTE:

NISSAN does not advocate the use of

non-OEM approved aftermarket flush-

ing systems and strongly advises

against performing these services on a

NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar-

ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap-

proved chemicals or solvents, the use of

which has not been validated by NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,

grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-

ties” in the “Technical and consumer in-

formation” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE:

Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for

wear, fraying or cracking and for proper

tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.

Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter-

vals. When driving for prolonged periods in

dusty conditions, check/replace the filter

more frequently.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the

specified interval. When adding or replac-

ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For

additional information on the proper mix-

ture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling

system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.)

NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant

or the use of non-distilled water may re-

duce the recommended service interval

of the coolant.

Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil

and oil filter at the specified intervals. For

recommended oil grade and viscosity refer

to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if

valve noise increase. Adjust valve clearance

if necessary.

Evaporative emissions control vapor

lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or loose-

ness. Tighten connections or replace parts

as necessary.

Fuel filter*: Periodic maintenance is not re-

quired. (in-tank type filter)

Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping

and connections for leaks, looseness, or

deterioration. Tighten connections or re-

place parts as necessary.

Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.

Install new plugs of the same type as origi-

nally equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODY

MAINTENANCE:

Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for

proper installation. Check for chafing,

cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.

Replace any deteriorated or damaged

parts immediately.

Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear,

deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any

deteriorated or damaged parts immedi-

ately.

Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-

haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,

cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten

connections or replace parts as necessary.

In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified

intervals. When driving for prolonged peri-

ods in dusty conditions, replace the filter

more frequently.

Propeller shaft(s): Check for damage,

looseness, and grease leakage. (AWD)

Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-

pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check

for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil

or grease. Under severe driving conditions,

inspect more frequently.

Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every

5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the in-

structions under “Explanation of general

maintenance items” in this section. When

rotating tires, check for damage and un-

even wear. Replace if necessary.

Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil,

transfer case oil: Visually inspect for signs

of leakage at specified intervals.

If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top

carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads:

∙ Replace the fluid/oil every 20,000 miles

(32,000 km) or 24 months.

∙ Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles

(96,000 km) or request the dealer to in-

spect the fluid deterioration data using

a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is

more than 210000, replace the CVT fluid.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

Off-Road Maintenance Check the follow-

ing items frequently whenever you drive

off-road through deep sand, mud or water:

∙ Brake pads and rotors

∙ Differential, transmission and transfer

case oil

∙ Steering linkage

∙ Propeller shaft(s) and front drive shafts

∙ Engine air filter

To help ensure smooth, safe and economi-

cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte-

nance schedules that may be used, de-

pending upon the conditions in which you

usually drive. These schedules contain

both distance and time intervals, up to

120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For

most people, the odometer reading will in-

dicate when service is needed. However, if

you drive very little, your vehicle should be

serviced at the regular time intervals

shown in the schedule.

After 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months, continue

maintenance at the same mileage/time

intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

FOR SEVERE OPERATING

CONDITIONS

Additional maintenance items for severe

operating conditions should be per-

formed on vehicles that are driven under

especially demanding conditions. Addi-

tional maintenance items should be per-

formed if you primarily operate your vehicle

under the following conditions:

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than

10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-

tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-

and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-

ing for long distances, such as police,

taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or using

a car-top carrier.

NOTE:

For vehicles operated in Canada, both

standard and severe maintenance items

should be performed at every interval.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

The following tables show the standard

maintenance schedule. Depending upon

weather and atmospheric conditions,

varying road surfaces, individual driving

habits and vehicle usage, additional or

more frequent maintenance may be re-

quired. After 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months, continue

maintenance at the same mileage/time

interval.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR

Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR

Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)

NOTE:

(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if

found damaged.

(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.

(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles

(120,000 km) or 60 months.

(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%

demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy

of the factory fill coolant.

(6) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.055 in (1.4 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage.

(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.

* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform

such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and

intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Brakelinesandcables IIIIII

Brake pads and rotors夝IIIIII

Brake fluid夝RRR

CVTfluid SeeNOTE(1)IIIIII

Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I IIIII

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension

parts夝

III

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD mod-

els)夝

IIIIII

Exhaust system夝III

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

Intelligent key battery R R R R

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Brakelinesandcables IIIIII

Brake pads and rotors夝IIIIII

Brake fluid夝RRR

CVTfluid SeeNOTE(1)IIIIII

Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I IIIII

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension

parts夝

III

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD mod-

els)夝

IIIIII

Exhaust system夝III

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

Intelligent key battery R R R R

NOTE:

Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.

(1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every

60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT

fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every

20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.

(3) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

The maintenance intervals shown on the

preceding pages are for normal operating

conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated

under severe driving conditions as shown

below, more frequent maintenance must

be performed on the following items as

shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than

10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-

tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-

and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-

ing for long distance, such as police, taxi

or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or using

a car-top carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval

Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months

Brake pads & rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD models) Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE

OPERATING CONDITIONS

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

MAINTENANCE LOG

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or

120 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities ......................................10-2

Fuel recommendation.......................10-3

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendations ..........................10-6

Air conditioner system refrigerant and

oil recommendations .......................10-7

Specifications ..................................10-8

Engine ......................................10-8

Wheels and tires.............................10-9

Dimensions and weights ....................10-9

When traveling or registering in another

country........................................10-10

Vehicle identification ..........................10-10

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

plate .......................................10-10

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) ...........................10-10

Engine serial number........................10-11

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-11

Emission control information label ..........10-11

Tire and Loading Information label .........10-12

Air conditioner specification label...........10-12

Installing front license plate....................10-12

Vehicle loading information ................... 10-13

Terms ...................................... 10-13

Vehicle load capacity .......................10-14

Securing the load...........................10-15

Loading tips ................................10-16

Measurement of weights ...................10-16

Towing a trailer ................................ 10-17

Maximum load limits ....................... 10-17

Towing load/specification ..................10-20

Towing safety .............................. 10-21

Flat towing for all–wheel drive vehicle

(if so equipped) .............................10-26

Flat towing for front wheel drive vehicle

(if so equipped) .............................10-26

Uniform tire quality grading....................10-27

Emission control system warranty.............10-28

Reporting safety defects ......................10-29

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)

test............................................10-30

Event Data Recorders (EDR)....................10-30

Additional Data Recording

(on vehicles equipped with optional

ProPILOT Assist) ............................ 10-31

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information ...................................10-32

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different.When refilling, follow the procedure

described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Fuel 55 L 14-1/2 gal 12-1/8 gal • For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in

this section.

Engine oil*1

Drain and refill

*1: For additional

information, refer to “Engine

oil” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

With oil filter

change 4.6 L 4-7/8 qt 4 qt • Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.

• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor

oil that matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional

information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations”

in this section.

Without oil filter

change 4.3 L 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt

Engine coolant

with reservoir 8.1 L 2-1/8 gal 1-3/4 gal • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

or equivalent

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — —

• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or

equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.

Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT NS-3

may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other

than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Ve-

hicle Limited Warranty.

Differential gear oil — — — • Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or

equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil

Transfer oil — — —

Brake fluid — — —

• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or equivalent

DOT 3

*2: Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —

• HFC-134a (R-134a)

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system re-

frigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Air conditioning system oil — — —

• NISSAN A/C System Oil Type ND-OIL8 or exact equivalents

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system re-

frigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Windshield-washer fluid 5 L 1-3/8 gal 1-1/8 gal • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & An-

tifreeze or equivalent

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number

91).

CAUTION

∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85. Fuel system

or other damage can occur if E-85 is

used in vehicles that are not designed

to run on E-85.

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel

containing more than 15% ethanol.

Using a fuel containing more than 15%

ethanol in a vehicle not specifically

designed for a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol can adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle. Damage caused

by such fuel is not covered by the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-

tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using

fuel containing MMT may adversely

affect vehicle performance and ve-

hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-

ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-

tent, so you may have to consult your

gasoline retailer for more details.

Note that Federal and California laws

prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-

lated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage

for that region.

Technical and consumer information 10-3

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that

meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)

specifications where it is available. Many of

the automobile manufacturers developed

this specification to improve emission con-

trol system and vehicle performance. Ask

your service station manager if the gaso-

line meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing re-

formulated gasolines. These gasolines are

specially designed to reduce vehicle emis-

sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards

cleaner air and suggests that you use re-

formulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-

ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl

Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with

or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

fuels of which the oxygenate content and

the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-

not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask

your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,

please take the following precautions as

the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle

performance problems and/or fuel system

damage.

∙The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

∙If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 15% oxygenate.

∙If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable

amount of appropriate cosolvents

and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-

erly formulated with appropriate co-

solvents and corrosion inhibitors,

such methanol blends may cause fuel

system damage and/or vehicle per-

formance problems. At this time, suf-

ficient data is not available to ensure

that all methanol blends are suitable

for use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine

stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-

rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,

immediately change to a non-oxygenate

fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during re-

fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates

can cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%

fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.

E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed

to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula-

tions require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified with small, square,

orange and black label with the common

abbreviation or the appropriate percent-

age for that region.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%

fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel

Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-

hicle. U.S. government regulations require

fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and black

label with the common abbreviation or the

appropriate percentage for that region.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-

nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-

ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the

use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may

adversely affect vehicle performance, in-

cluding the emissions control system. Note

that while some fuel pumps label MMT

content, not all do, so you may have to

consult your gasoline retailer for more de-

tails.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-

ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane

booster, intake valve deposit removers,

etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of

these additives intended for gum, varnish

or deposit removal may contain active sol-

vents or similar ingredients that can be

harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can

cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”

(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping

noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine

damage. If you detect a persistent heavy

spark knock even when using gasoline

of the stated octane rating, or if you hear

steady spark knock while holding a

steady speed on level roads, it is recom-

mended that you have a NISSAN dealer

correct the condition. Failure to correct

the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for

which NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in

spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,

which may cause excessive fuel consump-

tion or engine damage. If any of the above

symptoms are encountered, have your ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is not

a cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure

satisfactory engine life and performance.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in this section. NISSAN recommends the

use of an energy conserving oil in order to

improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the

American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-

cation or International Lubricant Standard-

ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)

certification and SAE viscosity standard.

These oils have the API certification mark

on the front of the container. Oils which do

not have the specified quality label should

not be used as they could cause engine

damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not

necessary when the proper oil type is used

and maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has

been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness

changes with temperature. Because of

this, it is important to select the engine oil

viscosity based on the temperatures at

which the vehicle will be operated before

the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-

ity other than that recommended could

cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or

its equivalent for the reason described in

“Change intervals.”

LTI2051

10-6 Technical and consumer information

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for

your engine are based on the use of the

specified quality oils and filters. Using en-

gine oil and filters that are not of the speci-

fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil

and filter change intervals could reduce

engine life. Damage to the engine caused

by improper maintenance or use of incor-

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is

not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality

engine oil when it was built. You do not have

to change the oil before the first recom-

mended change interval. Oil and filter

change intervals depend upon how you

use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions

may require more frequent oil and filter

changes:

∙ repeated short distance driving at cold

outside temperatures

∙ driving in dusty conditions

∙ extensive idling

∙ towing a trailer

∙ stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to the

“Maintenance and schedules” section of

this manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your

NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the

refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and

NISSAN A/C system oil Type ND-OIL8 or

the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil

will cause severe damage to the air con-

ditioning system and will require the re-

placement of all air conditioner system

components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s

ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does

not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain

government regulations require the recov-

ery and recycling of any refrigerant during

automotive air conditioner system service.

A NISSAN dealer has the trained techni-

cians and equipment needed to recover

and recycle your air conditioner system re-

frigerant.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer when servicing your air conditioner

system.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

ENGINE

Model QR25DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.504 x 3.937 (89.0 x 100.0)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 151.82 (2,488)

Firing order 1-3-4-2

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.

CVT (in N position)

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO%atidle

Spark plug FXE20HE-11C

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS

10-8 Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type Offset in (mm) Size

Steel 1.38 (35) 17 x 7J

Aluminum 1.38 (35) 17 x 7J

1.38(35) 18x7J

19x7J

Tires Size

Non Run Flat 225/65R17

225/60R18

225/55R19

Run Flat 225/65RF17

Spare tires Size

Spare Wheel - Steel T145/90D16

Spare Wheel - Steel T155/90D17

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 184.5 (4,686)

Overall width in (mm) 72.4 (1,840)

Overall height

with All-wheel drive in (mm) 68.5 (1,741)

with front wheel drive in (mm) 68.0 (1,726)

Front and Rear Track in (mm) 62.8 (1,595)

Wheelbase in (mm) 106.5 (2,706)

Gross vehicle weight rating lbs. (kg) Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.

V.S.S. certification label” on

the center pillar between

the driver’s side front and

rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lbs. (kg)

Rear lbs. (kg)

Technical and consumer information 10-9

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first

find out if the fuel available is suitable for

your vehicle's engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too

low may cause engine damage. All gaso-

line vehicles must be operated with un-

leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking

your vehicle to areas where appropriate

fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of

your vehicle to another country, state,

province or district, it may be necessary

to modify the vehicle to meet local laws

and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle

emission control and safety standards

vary according to the country, state, prov-

ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica-

tions may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, trans-

portation and registration are the re-

sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-

sponsible for any inconvenience that

may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The VIN plate is attached as shown. This

number is the identification for your vehicle

and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is lo-

cated as shown.

TI1050M LTI2270

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

10-10 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as

shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION

LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi-

cation label is affixed as shown. This label

contains valuable vehicle information, such

as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of

manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is

attached to the underside of the hood as

shown.

WTI0096 WTI0099 LTI2072

Technical and consumer information 10-11

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label. The label is

located as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is af-

fixed to the underside of the hood as

shown.

To mount the front license plate, attach the

license plate bracket to the bumper fascia

at the location marks (small dimples) using

the two provided screws 䊊

LTI2251 LTI2271 LTI2265

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

10-12 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

∙ It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside a ve-

hicle. In a collision, people riding

in these areas are more likely to

be seriously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in

any area of your vehicle that is

not equipped with seats and

seat belts.

∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself

with the following terms before

loading your vehicle:

∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of

your vehicle) - vehicle weight in-

cluding: standard and optional

equipment, fluids, emergency

tools, and spare tire assembly.

This weight does not include

passengers and cargo.

∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight

of passengers and cargo.

∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle,

passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer

tongue load and any other op-

tional equipment. This informa-

tion is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit

specified for the front or rear axle.

This information is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

rating) - The maximum total

weight rating of the vehicle, pas-

sengers, cargo, and trailer.

∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load

limit, Total load capacity - maxi-

mum total weight limit specified

of the load (passengers and

cargo) for the vehicle. This is the

maximum combined weight of

occupants and cargo that can be

loaded into the vehicle. If the ve-

hicle is used to tow a trailer, the

trailer tongue weight must be in-

cluded as part of the cargo load.

This information is located on the

Tire and Loading Information la-

bel.

∙ Cargo capacity - permissible

weight of cargo, the subtracted

weight of occupants from the

load limit.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 10-13

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-

firm that you do not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

or the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the

GVWR and GAWR are located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

For additional information, refer to

“Measurement of weights” in this

section.

Do not exceed the load limit of your

vehicle shown as “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo” on

the Tire and Loading Information la-

bel. Do not exceed the number of

occupants shown as “Seating Ca-

pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label.

To get “the combined weight of oc-

cupants and cargo”, add the weight

of all occupants, then add the total

luggage weight. Examples are

shown in the following illustration.

Example

LTI0152

10-14 Technical and consumer information

Steps for determining correct

load limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s

Tire and Loading Information la-

bel.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For ex-

ample, if the XXX amount equals

1,400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lbs. passengers in your ve-

hicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) =

650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =

300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed

the available cargo and luggage

load capacity calculated in

step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to deter-

mine how this reduces the avail-

able cargo and luggage load ca-

pacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-

firm that you do not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

or the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) for your vehicle. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Measure-

ment of weights” in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation

pressures. For additional informa-

tion, refer to the “Tire and Loading

Information label” in this section.

SECURING THE LOAD

There are luggage hooks (if so equipped)

located in the cargo area as shown. The

hooks can be used to secure cargo with

ropes or other types of straps.

When securing items using luggage

hooks located on the side finisher do not

apply a load over more than 6.5 lbs. (29 N)

to a single hook.

The luggage hooks that are located on

the floor should have loads less than

110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook.

Cargo area luggage hooks

LIC2629

Technical and consumer information 10-15

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ The child restraint top tether strap

may be damaged by contact with

items in the cargo area. Secure any

items in the cargo area. Your child

could be seriously injured or killed in a

collision if the top tether strap is

damaged.

∙ Do not load your vehicle any heavier

than the GVWR or the maximum front

and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of

your vehicle can break, tire damage

could occur, or it can change the way

your vehicle handles. This could result

in loss of control and cause personal

injury.

LOADING TIPS

∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

∙ Do not load the front and rear

axle to the GAWR. Doing so will

exceed the GVWR.

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent

it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the

seatbacks. In a sudden stop or

collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear

GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage

could occur, or it can change the

way your vehicle handles. This

could result in loss of control

and cause personal injury.

∙ Overloading not only can

shorten the life of your vehicle

and the tire, but can also cause

unsafe vehicle handling and

longer braking distances. This

may cause a premature tire fail-

ure which could result in a seri-

ous accident and personal in-

jury. Failures caused by

overloading are not covered by

the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent

weight shifts that could affect the

balance of your vehicle.When the ve-

hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and

weigh the front and the rear wheels

separately to determine axle loads.

Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the GAWR. The total of

the axle loads should not exceed the

GVWR. These ratings are given on

the vehicle certification label. If

weight ratings are exceeded, move

or remove items to bring all weights

below the ratings.

10-16 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a

trailer and its cargo can adversely affect

vehicle handling, braking and perfor-

mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

∙ Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy

load for the first 500 miles (805 km).

Your engine, axle or other parts could

be damaged.

∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that

you tow a trailer, do not drive over

50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make

starts at full throttle. This helps the

engine and other parts of your vehicle

wear in at the heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used

primarily to carry passengers and cargo.

Remember that towing a trailer places ad-

ditional loads on your vehicle’s engine,

drive train, steering, braking and other sys-

tems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is avail-

able on the website at

www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes

information on trailer towing capability and

the special equipment required for proper

towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed

the value specified in the “Towing

Load/Specification” chart found in this sec-

tion. The total trailer load equals trailer

weight plus its cargo weight.

The maximum Gross Combined Weight

Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the value

specified in the following Towing

Load/Specification Chart.

The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)

equals the combined weight of the towing

vehicle (including passengers and cargo)

plus the total trailer load. Towing loads

greater than these or using improper tow-

ing equipment could adversely affect ve-

hicle handling, braking and performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is

not only related to the maximum trailer

loads, but also the places you plan to tow.

Tow weights appropriate for level highway

driving may have to be reduced for low

traction situations (for example, on slippery

boat ramps).

LTI2030

TOWING A TRAILER

Technical and consumer information 10-17

Temperature conditions can also affect

towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer

in high outside temperatures on graded

roads can affect engine performance and

cause overheating. The engine protection

mode, which helps reduce the chance of

engine damage, could activate and auto-

matically decrease engine power. Vehicle

speed may decrease under high load. Plan

your trip carefully to account for trailer and

vehicle load, weather and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced en-

gine power and vehicle speed. The re-

duced speed may be lower than other

traffic, which could increase the chance

of a collision. Be especially careful when

driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a

safe driving speed, pull to the side of the

road in a safe area. Allow the engine to

cool and return to normal operation. For

additional information, refer to “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from im-

proper towing procedures is not cov-

ered by NISSAN warranties.

Tongue load

When using a weight carrying or a weight

distributing hitch, keep the tongue load be-

tween 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or use

the trailer tongue load specified by the

trailer manufacturer. The tongue load

must be within the maximum tongue load

limits shown in the following “Towing

Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue

load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo

to allow for proper tongue load.

WTI0160

10-18 Technical and consumer information

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle

Weight (GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label. The GVW equals the

combined weight of the unloaded vehicle,

passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue

load and any other optional equipment. In

addition, front or rear GAW must not ex-

ceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label.

Towing capacities are calculated assum-

ing a base vehicle with driver and any op-

tions required to achieve the rating. Addi-

tional passengers, cargo and/or optional

equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will

add weight to the vehicle and reduce your

vehicle’s maximum towing capacity and

trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed

to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,

Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined

Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be mea-

sured using platform type scales com-

monly found at truck stops, highway weigh

stations, building supply centers or salvage

yards.

To determine the available payload capac-

ity for tongue/king pin load, use the follow-

ing procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all

of the passengers and cargo that are

normally in the vehicle when towing a

trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from

the GVWR. The remaining amount is

the available maximum tongue/king

pin load.

To determine the available towing capacity,

use the following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the

"Towing Load/Specification" chart

found in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight

from the GCWR.The remaining amount

is the available maximum towing ca-

pacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight,

weigh your trailer on a scale with all equip-

ment and cargo, that are normally in the

trailer when it is towed. Make sure the

Gross trailer weight is not more than the

Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the

trailer and is not more than the calculated

available maximum towing capacity.

LTI2031

Technical and consumer information 10-19

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the

scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle

Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not

more than Front Gross Axle Weight and

Rear Gross Axle Weight on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The

cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to

be moved or removed to meet the speci-

fied ratings.

Example:

∙ Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed

on a scale - including passengers, cargo

and hitch - 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg).

∙ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-

bel - 7,250 lbs. (3,289 kg).

∙ Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)

from “Towing Load/Specification" chart

- 15,100 lbs. (6,849 kg).

∙ Maximum Trailer towing capacity from

“Towing Load/Specification" chart -

9,100 lbs. (4,128 kg).

7,250 lbs. (3,289 kg) GVWR

– 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg) GVW

= 900 lbs. (409 kg) Available for tongue

weight

15,100 lbs. (6,849 kg) GCWR

– 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg) GVW

= 9,123 lbs. (4,138 kg) Capacity available for

towing

900 lbs. (409 kg) Available tongue

weight

/ 8,750 lbs. (3,969 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less

than the maximum towing capacity due to

the passenger and cargo load in the ve-

hicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight

between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or

within the trailer tongue load specification

recommended by the trailer manufacturer.

If the tongue load becomes excessive, re-

arrange the cargo to obtain the proper

tongue load. Do not exceed the maximum

tongue weight specification shown in the

“Towing load/specification” chart even if

the calculated available tongue weight is

greater than 15%. If the calculated tongue

weight is less than 10%, reduce the total

trailer weight to match the available

tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are

within the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

WARNING

The towing capacities provided in this

manual are for general reference only.

The safe towing capacity of your vehicle

is affected by dealer and factory in-

stalled options and passenger and

cargo loads. You must weigh the vehicle

and trailer as described in this manual

to determine the actual vehicle towing

capacity. Do not exceed the published

maximum towing capacity or the GCWR

or the GVWR shown on the

FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can re-

sult in an accident causing serious per-

sonal injury or property damage.

10-20 Technical and consumer information

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART

U.S. and Canada

Maximum Towing Capacity*1 1,100 lbs.

(500 kg)

Maximum Tongue Load 110 lbs.

(50 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 5,291 lbs.

(2,400 kg)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options re-

quired to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to

the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an op-

tional trailer tow package. The trailer tow

package includes a receiver-type frame

mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the

maximum towing capacity of this vehicle

when the proper towing equipment is

used. Choose a proper ball mount and

hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be

towed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and

hitch balls are available from a NISSAN

dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the op-

tional trailer tow package, check the tow-

ing capacity of your bumper hitch or

receiver-type frame mounted hitch.

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and

trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is

available from a NISSAN dealer. Make sure

the trailer hitch is securely attached to the

vehicle to help avoid personal injury or

property damage due to sway caused by

crosswinds, rough road surfaces or pass-

ing trucks.

Technical and consumer information 10-21

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specific

weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-

pable of towing a trailer heavier than the

weight rating of the hitch components.

Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch

components. Doing so can cause serious

personal injury or property damage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and

weight rating for your trailer:

∙ The required hitch ball size is stamped

on most trailer couplers. Most hitch

balls also have the size printed on the

top of the ball.

∙ Choose the proper class hitch ball

based on the trailer weight.

∙ The diameter of the threaded shank of

the hitch ball must be matched to the

ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball

shank should be no more than 1/16”

smaller than the hole in the ball mount.

∙ The threaded shank of the hitch ball

must be long enough to be properly

secured to the ball mount. There should

be at least 2 threads showing beyond

the lock washer and nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount

and the ball mount is inserted into the

hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball

mount based on the trailer weight. Addi-

tionally, the ball mount should be chosen to

keep the trailer tongue level with the

ground.

Weight carrying hitches

A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball

mount is one that is designed to carry the

whole amount of tongue weight and gross

weight directly on the ball mount and on

the receiver.

Weight distribution hitch

This type of hitch is also called a “load-

leveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars

attach to the ball mount and to the trailer

to distribute the tongue weight (hitch

weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can’t

carry the full tongue weight of a given

trailer, and need some of the tongue

weight transferred through the frame and

pushing down on the front wheels. This

gives stability to the tow vehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class

IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trail-

ers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs.

(2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towing

equipment manufacturers to determine if

they recommend the use of a weight-

distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system may

affect the operation of trailer surge

brakes. If you are considering use of a

weight-distributing hitch system with a

surge brake-equipped trailer, check with

the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufac-

turer to determine if and how this can be

done.

Follow the instructions provided by the

manufacturer for installing and using the

weight-distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level sur-

face. With the ignition on and the doors

closed, allow the vehicle to stand for

several minutes so that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point

on the front and rear bumpers at the

center of the vehicle.

10-22 Technical and consumer information

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and ad-

just the hitch equalizers so that the

front bumper height is within 0 -

.5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of the reference

height measured in step 2. The rear

bumper should be no higher than the

reference height measured in step 2.

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributing

hitch so the rear of the bumper is no

higher than the measured reference

height when the trailer is attached. If

the rear bumper is higher than the mea-

sured reference height when loaded,

the vehicle may handle unpredictably

which could cause a loss of vehicle con-

trol and cause serious personal injury or

property damage.

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buf-

feting caused by other vehicles can affect

trailer handling. Sway control devices may

be used to help control these affects. If you

choose to use one, contact a reputable

trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway

control device will work with the vehicle,

hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system.

Follow the instructions provided by the

manufacturer for installing and using the

sway control device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow

trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs.

(907 kg).

Tire pressures

∙ When towing a trailer, inflate the

vehicle tires to the recom-

mended cold tire pressure indi-

cated on the Tire and Loading In-

formation label.

∙ Trailer tire condition, size, load rat-

ing and proper inflation pressure

should be in accordance with the

trailer and tire manufacturer’s

specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. The safety

chains should be crossed and should be

attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle

bumper or axle. The safety chains can be

attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is

mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave

enough slack in the chains to permit turn-

ing corners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical

system, a commercially available

power-type module/converter must be

used to provide power for all trailer

lighting. This unit uses the vehicle bat-

tery as a direct power source for all

trailer lights while using the vehicle tail

light, stoplight and turn signal circuits

as a signal source. The

module/converter must draw no more

that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail

lamp circuits. Using a

module/converter that exceeds these

power requirements may damage the

vehicle’s electrical system. It is recom-

mended that you visit a reputable

trailer retailer to obtain the proper

equipment and to have it installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal

and/or local regulations. For assistance in

hooking up trailer lights, contact a NISSAN

dealer or reputable trailer retailer. Vehicles

Technical and consumer information 10-23

equipped with the optional trailer tow

package are equipped with a 7-pin trailer

harness connector. If your trailer is

equipped with a flat 4-pin connector, an

adapter will be needed to connect the

trailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters are

available at auto parts stores and hitch re-

tailers.

Pre-towing tips

∙ Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or un-

loaded trailer is hitched.Do not drive the

vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or

nose-down condition; check for im-

proper tongue load,overload, worn sus-

pension or other possible causes of ei-

ther condition.

∙ Always secure items in the trailer to pre-

vent load shift while driving.

∙ Keep the cargo load as low as possible

in the trailer to keep the trailer center of

gravity low.

∙ Load the trailer so approximately 60%

of the trailer load is in the front half and

40% is in the back half. Also make sure

the load is balanced side to side.

∙ Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,

vehicle tire pressure, trailer light opera-

tion, and trailer wheel lug nuts every

time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.

∙ Be certain your rearview mirrors con-

form to all federal, state or local regula-

tions. If not, install any mirrors required

for towing before driving the vehicle.

∙ Determine the overall height of the ve-

hicle and trailer so the required clear-

ance is known.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding

of the vehicle’s behavior, you should prac-

tice turning, stopping and backing up in an

area which is free from traffic. Steering sta-

bility and braking performance will be

somewhat different than under normal

driving conditions.

∙ Always secure items in the trailer to pre-

vent load shift while driving.

∙ Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin

or lock to prevent the coupler from in-

advertently becoming unlatched.

∙ Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or

stops.

∙ Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

∙ Always drive your vehicle at a moderate

speed.

∙ When backing up, hold the bottom of

the steering wheel with one hand. Move

your hand in the direction in which you

want the trailer to go. Make small cor-

rections and back up slowly. If possible,

have someone guide you when you are

backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle

and trailer when parking. Parking on a

slope is not recommended; however, if you

must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position before blocking the wheels

and applying the parking brake, trans-

mission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the

downhill side of the vehicle and trailer

wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place,

slowly release the brake pedal until the

blocks absorb the vehicle load.

4. Apply the parking brake.

10-24 Technical and consumer information

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer

are clear from the blocks.

6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

7. Have someone retrieve and store the

blocks.

∙ While going downhill, the weight of the

trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may

decrease overall stability. Therefore, to

maintain adequate control, reduce your

speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid

long or repeated use of the brakes

when descending a hill, as this reduces

their effectiveness and could cause

overheating. Shifting to a lower gear in-

stead provides “engine braking” and re-

duces the need to brake as frequently.

∙ If the engine coolant temperature rises

to a high temperature, refer to “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this owner’s

manual.

∙ Trailer towing requires more fuel than

normal circumstances.

∙ Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s

first 500 miles (805 km).

∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you

do tow, do not drive over 50 mph

(80 km/h).

∙ Have your vehicle serviced more often

than at intervals specified. For addi-

tional information, refer to "Mainte-

nance schedules" in the "Maintenance

and schedules" section of this manual..

∙ When making a turn, your trailer wheels

will be closer to the inside of the turn

than your vehicle wheels. To compen-

sate for this, make a larger than normal

turning radius during the turn.

∙ Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-

versely affect vehicle/trailer handling,

possibly causing vehicle sway. When

being passed by larger vehicles, be pre-

pared for possible changes in cross-

winds that could affect vehicle han-

dling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to

sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal

to allow the vehicle to coast and steer

as straight ahead as the road condi-

tions allow. This combination will help

stabilize the vehicle

– Do not correct trailer sway by steer-

ing or applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently ap-

ply the brakes and pull to the side of the

road in a safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is

balanced as described in this section.

∙ Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires

considerably more distance than nor-

mal passing. Remember, the length of

the trailer must also pass the other ve-

hicle before you can safely change

lanes.

Technical and consumer information 10-25

∙ Downshift the transmission to a lower

gear for engine braking when driving

down steep or long hills. This will help

slow the vehicle without applying the

brakes.

∙ Avoid holding the brake pedal down too

long or too frequently. This could cause

the brakes to overheat, resulting in re-

duced braking efficiency.

∙ Increase your following distance to al-

low for greater stopping distances

while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops

and brake gradually.

∙ NISSAN recommends that the cruise

control not be used while towing a

trailer.

∙ Some states or provinces have specific

regulations and speed limits for ve-

hicles that are towing trailers. Obey the

local speed limits.

∙ Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness

connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts

after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at

every break.

∙ When launching a boat, don’t allow the

water level to go over the exhaust tail

pipe or rear bumper.

∙ Make sure you disconnect the trailer

lights before backing the trailer into the

water or the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil

should be replaced and transmission

oil/fluid should be changed more fre-

quently. For additional information, refer

to the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

FLAT TOWING FOR ALL–WHEEL

DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on

the ground is sometimes called flat towing.

This method is sometimes used when

towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-

hicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ Never flat tow your All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) vehicle.

∙ DO NOT tow your All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) vehicle with any wheels on the

ground. Doing so may cause serious

and expensive damage to the

powertrain.

∙ For emergency towing procedures re-

fer to “Towing recommended by

NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

FLAT TOWING FOR FRONT WHEEL

DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on

the ground is sometimes called flat towing.

This method is sometimes used when

towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-

hicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

∙ Never tow your front wheel drive ve-

hicle with the front tires on the

ground. Doing so may cause serious

and expensive damage to the

powertrain.

10-26 Technical and consumer information

∙ DO NOT tow your front wheel drive

continuously variable transmission

vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL

DAMAGE internal transmission parts

due to lack of transmission

lubrication.

∙ For emergency towing procedures re-

fer to “Towing recommended by

NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

Continuously Variable

Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with a continu-

ously variable transmission, an appropriate

vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the

towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow

the dolly manufacturer’s recommenda-

tions when using their product.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual-

ity Grades: All passenger car tires must

conform to federal safety requirements in

addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli-

cable on the tire sidewall between tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-

ing based on the wear rate of the tire when

tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. For ex-

ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one

and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use,

however, and may depart significantly from

the norm due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to low-

est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-

sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test

surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on straight-ahead braking

traction tests, and does not include ac-

celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the high-

est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-

tance to the generation of heat, and its

ability to dissipate heat when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-

perature can cause the material of the tire

to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-

cessive temperature can lead to sudden

tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a

level of performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-

tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel than the mini-

mum required by law.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Technical and consumer information 10-27

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly in-

flated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, under-inflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in combi-

nation, can cause heat build-up and

possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol-

lowing emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty

Information Booklet which comes with

your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a

Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,

you may obtain a replacement by writing

to:

∙ Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty

Information Booklet which comes with

your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a

Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,

you may obtain a replacement by writing

to:

∙ Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

10-28 Technical and consumer information

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-

fying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a re-

call and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov; or

write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400

Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.

20590. You can also obtain other in-

formation about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contact-

ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform Trans-

port Canada in addition to notifying

NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives com-

plaints, it may open an investigation,

and if it finds that a safety defect

exists in a group of vehicles, it may

request that NISSAN conduct a recall

campaign. However, Transport

Canada cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s

Defect Investigations and Recalls Divi-

sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You

may also report safety defects online

at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/

Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/

fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speak-

ers) or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-

Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-

cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)

Additional information concerning

motor vehicle safety may be obtained

from Transport Canada’s Road Safety

Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371

or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety

(English speakers) or

www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety con-

cerns please contact our Consumer

Information Centre toll free at 1-800-

387-0122.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

Technical and consumer information 10-29

WARNING

A vehicle equipped with All -Wheel Drive

(AWD) should never be tested using a

two wheel dynamometer (such as the

dynamometers used by some states for

emissions testing), or similar equip-

ment. Make sure you inform the test fa-

cility personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with AWD before it is placed

on a dynamometer. Using the wrong

test equipment may result in drivetrain

damage or unexpected vehicle move-

ment which could result in serious ve-

hicle damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states

and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may

be required to be in what is called the

“ready condition” for an

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the

emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”

when it is driven through certain driving

patterns. Usually, the ready condition can

be obtained by ordinary usage of the ve-

hicle.

If a powertrain system component is re-

paired or the battery is disconnected, the

vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-

tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the

vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test

readiness condition. Place the ignition

switch in the ON position without starting

the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds

and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test

condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not

blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-

tion is “ready”. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-

dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data

Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an

EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle,data

that will assist in understanding how a ve-

hicle’s systems performed. The EDR is de-

signed to record data related to vehicle dy-

namics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-

cord such data as:

∙ How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

∙ Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depress-

ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;

and,

∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.

∙ Sounds are not recorded.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

10-30 Technical and consumer information

These data can help provide a better un-

derstanding of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data

are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-

trivial crash situation occurs; no data are

recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g.

name, gender, age and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as

law enforcement, could combine the EDR

data with the type of personally identifying

data routinely acquired during a crash in-

vestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN

dealer, other parties, such as law enforce-

ment, that have the special equipment, can

read the information if they have access to

the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be

accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or

permitted by law.

ADDITIONAL DATA RECORDING (on

vehicles equipped with optional

ProPILOT Assist)

If your vehicle is equipped with the optional

ProPILOT Assist, it will also be equipped

with supplemental data recording function

intended to assist in understanding how

ProPILOT Assist performs in certain non-

trival crash or near-crash scenarios. Spe-

cifically, supplemental recording is de-

signed to capture the following:

∙ Driver operational status of the accel-

erator, brakes, steering, etc.

∙ Detection status of a vehicle ahead and

lane markers

∙ Vehicle information including distance

to vehicle ahead and lateral position

∙ Information on the operation of the

ProPILOT Assist and other crash avoid-

ance features

∙ ProPILOT Assist malfunction diagnosis

information

∙ External images from the multi-sensing

front camera (Available only when the

SRS air bag or IEB system is activated)

The ProPILOT Assist does not record con-

versations, sounds or images of the inside

of the vehicle.

To read this supplemental data, special

equipment is required and access to the

vehicle or the recording unit is needed. This

supplemental data will only be accessed

with the consent of the vehicle owner or

lessee or as otherwise required or permit-

ted by law. If downloaded, NISSAN and third

parties entrusted by NISSAN may use the

data recorded for the purpose of improv-

ing NISSAN’s vehicle safety performance.

NISSAN and third parties entrusted by

NISSAN will not disclose/provide the re-

corded data to a third party except:

- With the consent of the vehicle owner or

with the consent of the lessee

- In response to an official request from law

enforcement, court order, governmental

agency, or other legally enforceable re-

quest

- For research purposes after the data is

modified such that it is no longer tied to a

specific vehicle or vehicle owner (anony-

mized)

Technical and consumer information 10-31

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this

model year and prior can be purchased. A

Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for

your vehicle. This manual is the same one

used by the factory-trained technicians

working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be pur-

chased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of Genu-

ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genu-

ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN

Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this

model year and prior, please contact the

nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-

ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your

area, call the NISSAN Information Center at

1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-

resentative will assist you.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

10-32 Technical and consumer information

11 Index

2nd row bench seat adjustment ......1-6

ActiveRideControl(ARC) .........5-152

Aiming control, headlights . . . . . . . . .2-48

Air bag (See supplemental restraint

system) .....................1-49

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact air

bagsystem)................1-56

Air bag warning labels ............1-67

Airbagwarninglight..........1-68, 2-17

Air bag warning light,

supplemental ..............1-68, 2-17

Air cleaner housing filter...........8-17

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . .4-32, 4-38

Air conditioner specification label . .10-12

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil

recommendations ............10-7

Air conditioner system refrigerant

recommendations ............10-7

Heater and air conditioner

controls...............4-29,4-38

Servicing air conditioner ........4-41

Air flow charts.................4-33

Alarm system

(See vehicle security system) .......2-38

All-Wheel Drive.............5-140,6-16

Anchor point locations ...........1-32

Antenna ....................4-42

Antifreeze ...................5-154

Anti-lock brake warning light ........2-12

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .....5-146

Armrests.....................1-7

Audible reminders ..............2-20

Autolightswitch...............2-44

Automatic

Automatic drive positioner . . .3-44, 3-46

Automatic power window switch. . .2-68

Automatic anti-glare inside

mirror...................3-41,3-43

Automatic door locks .............3-7

Automatic drive positioner . . . . .3-44, 3-46

Automatic Emergency Braking

(AEB) ...................2-12,5-122

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with

Pedestrian Detection ............5-129

AWD...................5-140,6-16

Battery.................5-154,8-12

Charge warning light...........2-13

Battery replacement ............8-23

Keyfob...................8-23

NISSAN Intelligent Key®. . . . . .8-23, 8-25

Before starting the engine .........5-19

Belt(Seedrivebelt)..............8-16

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ..........5-45

Booster seats .................1-45

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . .5-146

Brakefluid..................8-9

Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-28

Brakesystem ..............5-145

Brakewarninglight............2-13

Brakewearindicators......2-20,8-20

Parking brake operation ........5-27

Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Brakeassist..................5-147

Brakefluid....................8-9

Brakes.....................8-20

Brakesystem ................5-145

Break-in schedule ..............5-138

Brightness control

Instrument panel.............2-49

Bulb check/instrument panel .......2-12

Bulb replacement ..............8-28

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants....................10-2

Cargoareastoragebin...........2-62

Cargocover..................2-64

Cargo

(See vehicle loading information).....10-13

Car phone or CB radio ...........4-42

Chassis control ...............5-150

Checking bulbs ................2-12

Check tire pressure .............2-33

Child restraints . . . . . . .1-24, 1-25, 1-27, 1-29

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren)System.............1-29

Precautions on child

restraints.........1-27, 1-34, 1-40, 1-45

Top tether strap anchor point

locations...................1-32

Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-31

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-7

Chimes, audible reminders .........2-20

Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4

C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-11

Coldweatherdriving ............5-154

Console box ..................2-59

Console light ..................2-71

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) .......................5-21

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) fluid...................8-9

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) ............5-21

Controls

Heater and air conditioner

controls................4-29,4-38

Coolant

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine coolant .........8-5

Checking engine coolant level ......8-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6

Corrosionprotection..............7-7

Cruisecontrol.................5-64

Cupholders ..................2-60

Daytime Running Light System ......2-48

Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror

defrosterswitch..............2-43

Dimensions and weights...........10-9

Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-49

Display......................2-20

Door locks ..................3-5,3-6

Drivebelt ....................8-16

Drive positioner, Automatic . . . . . .3-44, 3-46

Driving

Cold weather driving ..........5-154

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) ............5-21

Precautions when starting and

driving..................5-4,5-12

Drivingthevehicle...............5-21

Dynamic driver assistance switch

(for vehicles without ProPILOT™ Assist) . .2-53

ECO mode switch ...............5-33

Economy - fuel ................5-140

Emergency engine shutoff..........5-17

Emission control information label . . . .10-11

Emission control system warranty . . . .10-28

Engine

Before starting the engine ........5-19

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine coolant .........8-5

Changing engine oil ............8-7

Changing engine oil filter .........8-8

Checking engine coolant level ......8-5

Checking engine oil level .........8-6

Engine compartment check

locations...................8-3

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6

Engine cooling system ..........8-4

Engine oil ...................8-6

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation .............10-6

Engine oil viscosity.............10-6

Engine serial number...........10-11

Engine specifications ...........10-8

Starting the engine ............5-19

Engine coolant temperature gauge ....2-6

EventDatarecorders.........10-30,10-31

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).......5-4

Explanation of maintenance items .....9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance

items.......................9-5

Extended storage switch ..........2-57

Eyeglasscase.................2-59

Flashers

(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . .6-2

Flattire......................6-3

Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6

Fluid

Brakefluid..................8-9

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid......................8-9

Engine coolant ...............8-4

Engine oil ...................8-6

Windshield-washer fluid .........8-10

11-2

F.M.V.S.S. certification label..........10-11

Foglightswitch................2-50

Front air bag system

(See supplemental restraint system) . . .1-56

Front-door pocket ..............2-58

Front power seat adjustment ........1-4

Frontseats....................1-2

Fuel

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Fuel economy...............5-140

Fuel-filler door and cap..........3-36

Fuel gauge ..................2-7

Fueloctanerating.............10-5

Fuel recommendation ..........10-3

Loose fuel cap warning .........2-33

Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . .5-138

Fuel-filler door .................3-36

Fuel gauge ....................2-7

Fuses .......................8-21

Fusiblelinks...................8-21

Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver .........2-73,2-74,2-76,2-77

Gascap.....................3-36

Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6

Fuel gauge ..................2-7

Odometer ..................2-5

Speedometer ................2-4

Tachometer .................2-6

Trip odometer ................2-5

General maintenance .............9-2

Glovebox....................2-59

Hazard warning flasher switch........6-2

Headlight aiming control . . . . . . . . . .2-48

Headlight and turn signal switch......2-43

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-43

Headlights...................8-26

Headlights, aiming control . . . . . . . . .2-48

Headrestraints.................1-10

Heatedseats..................2-51

Heated steering wheel switch .......2-52

Heater

Heater and air conditioner

controls................4-29,4-38

Heater operation ..........4-30,4-39

Hill start assist system ...........5-153

HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver .........2-73, 2-74, 2-76, 2-77

Hood .......................3-27

Hook

Luggage hook ...............2-63

Horn.......................2-51

Ignition switch .................5-14

Push-button ignition switch .......5-15

Immobilizer system .......2-39,5-15,5-18

Important vehicle information label. . . .10-11

In-cabinmicrofilter..............8-18

Increasing fuel economy ..........5-140

Indicator

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge

indicator...................5-18

Indicator lights and audible reminders

(See warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders).................2-12,2-17

Informationdisplay..............2-20

Inside automatic anti-glare mirror .3-41, 3-43

Instrument brightness control .......2-49

Instrument panel .............0-6,2-2

Instrument panel dimmer switch .....2-49

Intelligent Around View Monitor .......4-11

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

(for vehicles without ProPILOT™ Assist) . .5-66

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

(for vehicles with ProPILOT™ Assist). . . .5-101

Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) .......5-151

Intelligent Key system

Key operating range............3-13

Key operation ................3-14

Mechanical key ...............

-4

Remote keyless entry operation ....3-17

Troubleshooting guide ..........3-22

Warning signals ..............3-22

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) .....5-39

Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) .......5-150

Interiorlight................2-71, 2-72

ISOFIX child restraints .............1-29

Jumpstarting..............6-12,8-15

11-3

Key.........................3-2

Key fob battery replacement ........8-23

Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system) .......3-17

Without Intelligent Key system

(See remote keyless entry

system) ...............3-2,3-8,3-9

Keys

NISSAN Intelligent Key®........3-3,3-11

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

keys......................3-4

Label

Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12

Labels

Air conditioner specification label . . .10-12

C.M.V.S.S. certification label .......10-11

Emission control information label . .10-11

Engine serial number...........10-11

F.M.V.S.S. certification label........10-11

Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate.....................10-10

Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-67

Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)

system......................5-34

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

system......................5-34

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren)System................1-29

License plate

Installing the license plate .......10-12

Liftgate.....................3-28

Liftgaterelease................3-34

Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-17

Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . .8-28

Bulb check/instrument panel ......2-12

Bulb replacement .............8-28

Charge warning light ...........2-13

Console light ................2-71

Exterior and Interior lights. . . . . . . .8-28

Foglights..................8-27

Foglightswitch..............2-50

Headlight and turn signal switch....2-43

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-43

Headlights.................8-26

Interiorlight..............2-71, 2-72

Lightbulbs.................8-26

Low tire pressure warning light .....2-14

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light......................2-33

Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-59

Personal lights ...............2-72

Security indicator light ..........2-19

Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . .2-72

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ...............2-12,2-17

Lights......................8-26

Maplights..................2-72

Lock

Child safety rear door lock ........3-7

Door locks ................3-5,3-6

Liftgaterelease..............3-34

Power door locks............3-6,3-7

Loose fuel cap warning ........2-33, 3-38

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . .2-15, 2-32

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-14

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light........................2-33

Luggage hook .................2-63

Luggage rack (see roof rack) ........2-65

Luggage

(See vehicle loading information) .....10-13

Luggage storage (see vehicle loading

information)..................2-62

Maintenance

General maintenance ...........9-2

Insidethevehicle..............9-3

Maintenance precautions.........8-2

Outsidethevehicle.............9-2

Seat belt maintenance ..........1-24

Under the hood and vehicle .......9-4

Maintenance log ................9-13

Maintenance requirements..........9-2

Maintenance schedules ............9-7

Maintenance under severe operation

conditions....................9-12

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Manual front seat adjustment ........1-3

Maplights....................2-72

MemorySeat ..............3-44, 3-46

Meters and gauges...............2-4

Instrument brightness control .....2-49

11-4

Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside

mirror.................3-41,3-43

Outsidemirrors..............3-43

Rearview ..................3-40

Vanitymirror................3-40

Mirrors......................3-40

Moonroof.................2-68,2-69

Moving Object Detection (MOD) ......4-23

NissanConnect® Owner's Manual ......4-2

NISSAN Intelligent Key®..........3-3,3-11

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge

indicator.....................5-18

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System...............2-39,5-15,5-18

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . .10-5

Odometer ....................2-5

Oil

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine oil ............8-7

Changing engine oil filter .........8-8

Checking engine oil level .........8-6

Engine oil ...................8-6

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation .............10-6

Engine oil viscosity.............10-6

Outsidemirrors................3-43

Overhead sunglasses holder ........2-59

Overheat

Ifyourvehicleoverheats.........6-14

Owner's manual order form ........10-32

Owner's manual/service manual order

information..................10-32

Parking

Parking brake operation .........5-27

Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . .5-144

Parkingbrake ..............2-14,5-27

Personal lights .................2-72

Power

Front seat adjustment ...........1-4

Power door locks............3-6,3-7

Poweroutlet................2-55

Powerrearwindows...........2-67

Power steering system .........5-144

Powerwindows..............2-66

Rearpowerwindows...........2-67

Poweroutlet..................2-55

Powersteering................5-144

Precautions

Maintenance precautions.........8-2

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions.................5-9

Precautions on booster

seats............1-27, 1-34, 1-40, 1-45

Precautions on child

restraints.........1-27, 1-34, 1-40, 1-45

Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-15

Precautions on supplemental

restraint system ..............1-49

Precautions when starting and

driving..................5-4,5-12

ProPILOT™ Assist ...............5-90

Push starting ..................6-14

Radio

Car phone or CB radio ..........4-42

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)

test.......................10-30

RearCrossTrafficAlert(RCTA) .......5-56

Rearpowerwindows.............2-67

Rearviewmirror................3-40

RearViewMonitor................4-3

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch......................2-43

Rear window wiper and washer

switches.....................2-42

Recommended Fluids ............10-2

Recorders

EventData.............10-30,10-31

Refrigerant recommendation ........10-7

Registering a vehicle in another

country .....................10-10

Remote Engine Start ..........3-24,5-21

Remote keyless entry system . . .3-2, 3-8, 3-9

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-29

Roofrack....................2-65

Safety

Child safety rear door lock ........3-7

11-5

Childseatbelts......1-27, 1-34, 1-40, 1-45

Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-29

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment ......1-3

Front power seat adjustment ......1-4

Second row bench seats .........1-6

Seatback pockets ...............2-58

Seat belt

Childsafety.................1-24

Infants and small children ........1-25

InjuredPerson ...............1-18

Largerchildren...............1-25

Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-15

Pregnant women .............1-18

Seat belt extenders ............1-23

Seat belt maintenance ..........1-24

Seatbelts................1-15, 7-6

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-22

Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-18

Seat belt extenders ..............1-23

Seatbeltwarninglight.........1-18, 2-16

Seats

2nd row bench seat adjustment .....1-6

Adjustment ..................1-2

Armrests ...................1-7

Automatic drive positioner . . . .3-44, 3-46

Frontseats..................1-2

Heatedseats................2-51

Manual front seat adjustment ......1-3

Security indicator light ............2-19

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), engine start.......2-39,5-15,5-18

Security systems

Vehicle security system .........2-38

Self-adjusting brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Service manual order form.........10-32

Servicing air conditioner ...........4-41

Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-22

Spark plug replacement ...........8-16

Spark plugs ...................8-16

Specifications .................10-8

Speedometer ..................2-4

Speedometer and odometer ........2-4

SPORT mode switch .............5-33

Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . .2-72

SRS warning label ...............1-67

Standard maintenance ............9-8

Starting

Before starting the engine ........5-19

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12, 8-15

Precautions when starting and

driving..................5-4,5-12

Push starting ................6-14

Starting the engine ............5-19

Starting the engine ..............5-19

Starting the engine (models with NISSAN

Intelligent Key® system) ...........5-20

Steering

Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-144

Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with

ProPILOT™ Assist) ...............2-53

Steering wheel .................3-38

Stoplight....................8-28

Storage.....................2-58

Storagebin...................2-62

Sunglasses case................2-59

Sunglasses holder ..............2-59

Sunroof .....................2-69

Sunroof (see Moonroof) ...........2-68

Sunvisors....................3-39

Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-67

Supplemental air bag warning

light.....................1-68, 2-17

Supplemental front impact air bag

system......................1-56

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels . . . .1-67

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-49

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system) .......1-49

Switch

Autolightswitch..............2-44

Automatic power window switch . . .2-68

Foglightswitch..............2-50

Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2

Headlight aiming control . . . . . . . .2-48

Headlight and turn signal switch....2-43

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-43

Ignition switch ...............5-14

Instrument brightness control .....2-49

Power door lock switch........3-6,3-7

Rear window and outside mirror

defrosterswitch..............2-43

Rear window wiper and washer

switches...................2-42

Turn signal switch .............2-49

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch....................2-54

Tachometer ...................2-6

Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6

11-6

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),

engine start ............2-39,5-15,5-18

Three-waycatalyst...............5-5

Tire

Flattire....................6-3

Spare tire................6-5,8-43

Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12

Tire chains .................8-39

Tire pressure ................8-30

Tirerotation................8-40

Types of tires ................8-36

Uniform tire quality grading ......10-27

Wheels and tires ..............8-30

Wheel/tire size ...............10-9

Tire pressure

Low tire pressure warning light .....2-14

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). .5-5

Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . .1-31

Towing

4-wheel drive models ...........6-17

Flattowing.................10-26

Towing load/specification .......10-20

Towtrucktowing .............6-15

Trailertowing...............10-17

Towingatrailer................10-17

Transceiver

HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver . . . . . . .2-73, 2-74, 2-76, 2-77

Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid......................8-9

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) ............5-21

Travel (See registering a vehicle in another

country).....................10-10

Trip odometer ..................2-5

Turn signal switch ...............2-49

Uniform tire quality grading ........10-27

USB/iPod® Charging Ports .........4-42

Vanitymirror..................3-40

Variable voltage control system ......8-16

Vehicle dimensions and weights ......10-9

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch......................2-54

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .5-147

Vehicle identification .............10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

(Chassis number) ...............10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate.......................10-10

Vehicle immobilizer system. . .2-39, 5-15, 5-18

Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . . .2-20

Vehicle loading information ........10-13

Vehiclerecovery.............6-17,6-18

Vehicle security system ...........2-38

Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System), engine

start.................2-39,5-15,5-18

Ventilators ...................4-28

Visors ......................3-39

Warning

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-17

Anti-lock brake warning light ......2-12

Battery charge warning light ......2-13

Brakewarninglight............2-13

Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2

Lane Departure Prevention .......5-34

Lane Departure Warning light......5-34

Loose fuel cap warning ......2-33,3-38

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-15, 2-32

Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-14

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light......................2-33

Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-59

Seatbeltwarninglight.......1-18, 2-16

Supplemental air bag warning

light...................1-68, 2-17

TPMS......................2-4

Vehicle security system .........2-38

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ...............2-12, 2-17

Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-67

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders .................2-12,2-17

Audible reminders ..........2-12,2-17

Checking bulbs...............2-12

Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-17

rning lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-17

Warninglights..............2-12,2-17

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ....................2-11

11-7

Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer

switches...................2-42

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . .10-9

Wheels and tires ................8-30

Wheel/tire size .................10-9

When traveling or registering in another

country .....................10-10

Windows ....................2-66

Locking passengers' windows .....2-67

Powerrearwindows...........2-67

Powerwindows..............2-66

Rearpowerwindows...........2-67

Windshield-washer fluid ...........8-10

Windshield wiper blades ...........8-18

Wiper

Rear window wiper and washer

switches...................2-42

Wiper blades ................8-18

Wiper and washer switch ..........2-41

11-8

MEMO

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number

91).

CAUTION

∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85. Fuel system

or other damage can occur if E-85 is

used in vehicles that are not designed

to run on E-85.

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel

containing more than 15% ethanol.

Using a fuel containing more than 15%

ethanol in a vehicle not specifically

designed for a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol can adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle. Damage caused

by such fuel is not covered by the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-

tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using

fuel containing MMT may adversely

affect vehicle performance and ve-

hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-

ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-

tent, so you may have to consult your

gasoline retailer for more details.

Note that Federal and California laws

prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-

lated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage

for that region.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN”

For additional information, refer to “Engine

oil and oil filter recommendations” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:

For additional information, refer to “Tire and

Loading Information label” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of this

manual.

The label is typically located on the driver

side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For

additional information, refer to “Wheels and

tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

2018 Nissan Rogue | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation